Dossier de Calidad - Motivator 01

SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y EXTINCION DE INCENDIO LISTA DE DOCUMENTOS
GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01 FRN-030085-LDO-001

LAS BAMBAS
LISTA DE DOCUMENTOS
FRN-030085-LDO-001
GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01
SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y ALARMA CONTRA INCENDIOS
0 20/03/2021 EMITIDO PARA CONSTRUCCION J.A.I. E.R.V. M.A.R.

B 15/02/2021 EMITIDO PARA APROBACION F.B.S. E.R.V. M.A.R.
A 04/12/2020 EMITIDO PARA REVISION F.B.S. E.R.V. M.A.R.
REV FECHA DESCRIPCION DE LA REVISION POR REV. APD.
LISTA DE DOCUMETOS Page 1 of 4
FRN-030085-LDO-001
REV 0
LAS BAMBAS
TABLA DE CONTENIDO
1. INTRODUCCIÓN ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
2. IDENTIFICACIÓN DE DOCUMENTOS Y PLANOS.................................................................................................. 3
2.1. DOCUMENTOS ................................................................................................................................................ 3
3. LISTA DE DOCUMENTOS DE INGENIERÍA DEL SISTEMA DE PROTECCIÓN DE INCENDIOS ......................... 4
4. LISTA DE PLANOS DEL SISTEMA DE DETECCIÓN Y EXTINCIÓN DE INCENDIOS ........................................... 4
LAS BAMBAS
1. INTRODUCCIÓN
La relación de documentos y planos que son mencionados a continuación son proporcionados por FIRENO S.A.C
El presente documento es desarrollado por FIRENO SAC, como descripción de la ingeniería para su instalación del
sistema de protección de incendios del generador eléctrico 01 – Las Bambas.
2. IDENTIFICACIÓN DE DOCUMENTOS Y PLANOS

La siguiente codificación es el orden de la designación para los documentos y los planos que serán de referencia
para la implementación del proyecto.
2.1. DESIGNACION DE DOCUMENTOS

FRN – XXXXXXXX – XXX – XXXX – XXX
Número de Proyecto
Cliente
Tipo de Documento
Número de Correlativo
2.1.1. TIPO DE DOCUMENTO
HTE : Hojas Técnicas

FC : Filosofía de Control
MDE : Memoria Descriptiva
MCA : Memorias de Calculo
MDP : Memoria de Programación
MOP : Manual de Operaciones.
LTG : Lista de Codificación de Equipos
LDO : Listas de Documentos
LAS BAMBAS
3. LISTA DE DOCUMENTOS DE INGENIERÍA DEL SISTEMA DE PROTECCIÓN DE INCENDIOS
ITEM N° DOCUMENTO TIPO DESCRIPCIÓN DEL DOCUMENTO REV

1 FRN-030085-LDO-0001 PDF LISTA DE DOCUMENTOS 0
2 FRN-030085-MDE-0001 PDF MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA DETECCION Y EXTINCION 0
MEMORIA DE CALCULOS DEL SISTEMA DE
3 FRN-030085-MCA-0001 PDF 0
PROTECCION DE INCENDIOS
MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN DEL SISTMA DE
4 FRN-030085-MOP-0001 PDF 0
PROTECCION DE INCENDIOS
HOJAS TÉCNICAS DEL SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y
5 FRN-030085-HTE-0001 PDF 0
ALARMA DE INCENDIOS
PROTOCOLO DE PRUEBA DEL SISTEMA DE
6 FRN-030085-PTC-000X PDF 0
DETECCION Y EXTINCION
7 FRN-03008521-LB-FC-001 PDF FILOSOFIA DE CONTROL DE DETECCION Y EXTINCION 0
4. LISTA DE PLANOS DEL SISTEMA DE DETECCIÓN Y EXTINCIÓN DE INCENDIOS
ITEM N° PLANO TIPO DESCRIPCIÓN DEL PLANO REV

FRN-030085-P01-D300-DCX- PDF
1 DIAGRAMA UNIFILAR CONEXIONADO 0
001
FRN-030085-P01-D300-PGC- PDF UBICACION DE EQUIPOS DETECCION
2 0
001
FRN-030085-P01-D300-PGU- PDF UBICACION DE EQUIPOS EXTINCION CO2 Y

3 0
001 FM-200
SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y EXTINCION DE INCENDIO MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01 FRN-030085-MDE-001
LAS BAMBAS
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
FRN-030085-MDE-001
SISTEMA DE DETECCION, ALARMA Y EXTINCION
DE INCENDIO CON AGENTE LIMPIO
0 20/03/2021 EMITIDO PARA CONTRUCCION J.A.I. E.R.V. M.A.R.

A 10/022021 REVISION INTERNA F.B.S. E.R.V. M.A.R.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA Page 1 of 19
FRN-030085-MDE-001 REV 0
LAS BAMBAS
TABLA DE CONTENIDO
1. INTRODUCCIÓN ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
2. OBJETIVO ................................................................................................................................................................ 3
3. ALCANCE ................................................................................................................................................................. 3
4. ESTANDARES APLICABLES ................................................................................................................................... 3
5. CRITERIOS DE DISEÑO .......................................................................................................................................... 3
5.1. GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01 ........................................................................................................................ 4
6. EQUIPOS DEL SISTEMA DE DETECCIÓN Y ALARMA DE INCENDIOS ............................................................... 5
6.1. PANEL DE CONTROL DE INCENDIOS ........................................................................................................... 5
6.2. DISPOSITIVOS QUE OPERAN CON EL PANEL CHEETAH XI 50 ................................................................. 7
6.3. DISPOSITIVOS DE NOTIFICACION Y ALARMA ............................................................................................. 9
6.4. INSTALACIÓN DEL SISTEMA ....................................................................................................................... 10
7. EQUIPOS DEL SISTEMA DE INCENDIOS CON CO2 Y FM-200 .......................................................................... 10
7.1. ANALISIS DE RIESGO ................................................................................................................................... 10
7.2. AREAS A PROTEGER ................................................................................................................................... 10
8. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SISTEMA DE EXTINCIÓN POR CO2 ................................................................................... 10
8.1. AGENTE CO2................................................................................................................................................. 10
8.2. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SISTEMA DE EXTINCIÓN POR FM-200 ...................................................................... 11
8.3. FUNCIONAMIENTO DEL HFC227EA ............................................................................................................ 12
8.4. LOS CILINDROS DE HFC-227EA .................................................................................................................. 13
9. CARACTERISTICAS DE LA INSTALACIÓN DEL SISTEMA .................................................................................. 14
10. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SISTEMA DE DETECCIÓN Y ALARMA CONTRA INCENDIOS........................................... 18
10.1. GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01 ...................................................................................................................... 18
11. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SISTEMA DE EXTINCIÓN CON AGENTE LIMPIO .............................................................. 19
LAS BAMBAS
1. INTRODUCCIÓN
La presente memoria descriptiva ha sido desarrollada por FIRENO SAC. En esta memoria se especifican el alcance del
Sistema de Detección y Alarma de Incendios, así como el alcance del Sistema de Extinción de Incendio para el
GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01.
La concepción de seguridad considerada para el proyecto, se basa principalmente en los requerimientos de los códigos y
estándares de la NFPA, los criterios de diseño y especificaciones del cliente y recomendaciones de los fabricantes.
En tal sentido, las soluciones de seguridad descritas en este documento son soluciones que permiten detectar y
anunciar, automática y manualmente, una posible ocurrencia de fuego.
2. OBJETIVO
Los objetivos de este documento son:
 Listar y describir los equipos y dispositivos que componen el Sistema de Detección y Extinción de Incendios a
instalarse.
 Realizar la descripción general del Sistema de Detección y Extinción de Incendios diseñada
3. ALCANCE
Se considera el desarrollo de ingeniería conceptual, para la implementación del Sistema de Detección y Extinción de
Incendios cuyos planos relacionados se detallan a continuación.
ITEM N° PLANO TIPO DESCRIPCIÓN DEL PLANO REV

1 FRN-030085-P01-D300-DCX-001 PDF DIAGRAMA UNIFILAR CONEXIONADO 0
2 FRN-030085-P01-D300-PGC-001 PDF UBICACION DE EQUIPOS DETECCION 0

3 FRN-030085-P01-D300-PGU-001 PDF UBICACION DE EQUIPOS EXTINCION CO2 Y
0
FM-200
4. ESTANDARES APLICABLES
Para el diseño se ha considerado como estándares los siguientes:
 NFPA 2001 Código para Sistema de Extinción Automática por Agentes Limpios
 NFPA 70 Código Eléctrico Nacional
 NFPA 72 Código Nacional de Alarma de Incendios
 UL Requisitos de los listados (Underwriters Laboratories)
 FM Guía de aprobaciones (Factory Mutual Insurance)
Los estándares listados, así como el resto de códigos y estándares aplicables serán utilizados como estándares
“mínimos” de diseño. Considerando, además, las buenas prácticas de ingeniería.
5. CRITERIOS DE DISEÑO
Un sistema de detección y control de incendios con operación de descarga automática de extinción de incendios,
aprobados por los estándares internacionales,
LAS BAMBAS
Detección direccionable, indicando el lugar específico donde está ocurriendo un posible riesgo de incendio.
Detección temprana del fuego y descarga del agente extintor dentro del área, logrando una rápida acción de supresión
del incendio, minimizando daños y periodos de detención de los equipos.
Sistema de control 100% inteligente, programable con desplegué de mensajes en pantalla logrando una rápida reacción
de alarma e interpretación de problema.
 Un Sistema de Detección y Alarma de Incendios aprobado por los estándares internacionales.
 Un Sistema de Extinción de incendio con agente limpio FM-200 (HFC-227ea), por inundación total.
 Detección de fuego y flama con sensores de multi-espectro triple…
 Extinción de incendios con CO2 para los contenedores.
5.1. GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01
El sistema de control de incendios para el generador eléctrico 01 es con CO2 el control se realiza mediante el panel
cheetah Xi 50 de la marca Fike Corp, éste equipo tendrá la capacidad de monitorear los dispositivos inteligentes
iniciadores distribuidos en el contenedor.
Dentro del contenedor se ha instalado 1 panel de módulos, el cual contiene dispositivos para a supervisión de sensores
activación de alarmas y activación de cilindros de CO2, también se encuentran los relés que controla el shut down del
generador eléctrico 01.
ITEM DESCRIPCIÓN TAG UBICACIÓN

1 DETECTOR DE FLAMA – 01 1000-FMI-001 GENERADOR
2 DETECTOR DE FLAMA - 02 1000-FMI-002 GENERADOR
3 DET. TEMPERATURA FIJA 225°F 1000-FMI-003 GENERADOR
4 DET. TEMPERATURA FIJA 225°F 1000-FMI-004 GENERADOR
5 DET. TEMPERATURA FIJA 225°F 1000-FMI-003-1 GENERADOR
6 DET. TEMPERATURA FIJA 225°F 1000-FMI-004-1 GENERADOR
ESTACION MANUAL DE
7 1000-FED-002 GENERADOR
DESCARGA CO2
ESTACION MANUAL DE
8 1000-FED-003 GENERADOR
DESCARGA CO2
Ante una incidencia de incendio esta será reportada al panel de control cheetah para registrar su evento y mostrar la
señal de alarma, adicionalmente el sistema cuenta con dispositivos de accionamiento manual con retardo de 40
segundos para una descarga del agente ante una eventual alarma visual de incendio.
El panel de control de incendios estará alimentado de la celda de medición, control, protección, y paralelo automático,
630A, 7.2 KV, 3F, 60HZ, el cual suministra un volltaje de 220VAC al Panel de control de incendios. Además, cuenta con
una fuente de baterías.
LAS BAMBAS
El panel de control de incendios estará alimentado con una fuente primaria de 220VAC estabilizada proporcionada por el
cliente. Además, se instalará una fuente secundaria auxiliar de 24VDC con baterías de respaldo independientemente (la
configuración se detalla en los diagramas de conexionado). multi-espectro (ultra violeta e infrarrojo) permita detectar
flama de hidrogeno, etanol y metanol (gas natural), estos sensores reportan una incidencia de flama.
CELDAS ELÉCTRICAS
El sistema de control de incendios para las celdas eléctricas es con FM-200 el control se realiza también mediante el
panel cheetah Xi 50 de la marca Fike Corp, éste equipo tendrá la capacidad de monitorear los dispositivos inteligentes
iniciadores distribuidos en el contenedor.
Ante una incidencia de incendio esta será reportada al panel de control cheetah para registrar su evento y mostrar la
señal de alarma. Adicionalmente el sistema cuenta con dispositivos de accionamiento manual de descarga inmediata
del agente supresor ante una eventual alarma de incendio.
ITEM DESCRIPCIÓN TAG UBICACIÓN
3 DET. TEMPERATURA FIJA 225°F 1000-FMI-009 CELDA ELECTRICA
4 DET. TEMPERATURA FIJA 190°F 1000-FMI-010 CELDA ELECTRICA
ESTACION MANUAL DE
8 1000-FED-001 GENERADOR PRINCIPAL
DESCARGA FM-200
6. EQUIPOS DEL SISTEMA DE DETECCIÓN Y ALARMA DE INCENDIOS

6.1. PANEL DE CONTROL DE INCENDIOS
El sistema de detección y control electrónico se basará en un panel de detección, alarma y evacuación de
incendios marca FIKE, modelo Cheetah XI 50; que en nuestro esquema básico representa al sistema de control
central y principal.
Este sistema de control, brinda la tecnología más reciente para comunicar eventos de detección de incendios
teniendo además una amplia capacidad de programación y flexibilidad. La tecnología incorporada, permite una
comunicación muy rápida y eficiente con y entre sus periféricos, brindando un tiempo de respuesta de un cuarto
de segundo al trabajar en red con otros paneles.
A. GENERALIDADES
Entre las principales características del Cheetah Xi 50 tenemos:
 Dos circuitos (audibles) 24V DC, 2A NAC en el tablero principal con sincronización integrada
 254 zonas con usuario definido
 Imagen LCD de 80 caracteres, backlift
 Buffer 3200 de historia de eventos (hasta 1600 hechos de alarma y 800 hechos
 Monitoreo de proceso crítico
 Capacidad de prueba de camino para una persona
 Desconexión por circuito/ punto o zona
LAS BAMBAS
 Función de maniobra en el panel y control remote

 Permite operación para liberar el solenoide
 Verificación de Alarma
 Los dispositivos se conectan/ retiran con facilidad
 Menús de Diagnóstico
 Bloques de terminales móviles para cableado de campo
 Buzzer local con tonos diferentes de eventos.
 Respalda hasta 31 dispositivos periféricos como Vista Remota y Gráfico
 Respalda la capacidad de los puertos de conectar hasta 128 nodos
 Energía de alarma útil de 6 amps, energía de alarma ampliable a 12 amps, reserva de 2ª
 Operación de 120VAC/ 60 Hz o 240VAC 50 /60Hz
 Dos salidas de energía auxiliar continúan 2ª, 24V DC, (ampliable hasta 5 circuitos con SPS)
 Una salida auxiliar reajustable de energía de 24 V DC, 2ª
 Respalda hasta 75 AH de baterías, ampliable hasta 150 AH usando SPS
 Dispositivos direccionales con herramienta infrarroja (IR), similar al dispositivo de control
 Un circuito direccionable estilo NFPA.
 254 dispositivos por circuito, máximo 1016 dispositivos con SLM.
 Protocolo digital real afín para comunicaciones extremadamente rápidas y confiables
 Dispositivo de función “learn/auto-program” (aprendizaje/ programa automático)
 Ajuste automático de sensibilidad día /noche
 Ajuste automático de sensibilidad feriados
 Nueva operación Aclimate para detectores
 La herramienta IR brinda la capacidad de leer niveles de sensibilidad o realizar pruebas remotas del
dispositivo
 Dispositivos con LEDs multicolores para referencia rápida del estado del dispositivo.
 Los detectores brindan detección temprana de advertencia pre-alarma y también pueden brindar una
función sumadora (hasta 8 detectores)
 Dispone de bases de relay o sonar
 Se pueden añadir LEDs Remotos opcionales a la base de un detector, programable para
 Caja de Acero 23.6” alto x 14.35” ancho x 4” grosor (dimensiones de caja posterior)
 Caja equipada con borde de 0.50” de ancho para mejor montaje
 Puerta movible de fácil instalación
 Listado por UL S2203
 Aprobado por FM 3020297
LAS BAMBAS
6.1.1. FUENTE DE ALIMENTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA SECUNDARIA

Corresponde el que provee de energía al sistema al fallar la fuente primaria.
La fuente secundaria deberá proveer energía al sistema dentro de los primeros 30 segundos de falla de
la fuente primaria o cuando la fuente primaria no puede abastecer más del 85% del voltaje requerido por
el sistema.
El sistema de baterías debe cumplir con lo estipulado en la NFPA 72, que mantengan el
100% del sistema de detección y alarma operando, al menos durante 6 días en Standby más 5
minutos de alarma de todos los dispositivos.
Los cálculos para la dimensión de las baterías deben efectuarse de acuerdo a lo establecido por la NFPA
72. Deberá adjuntarse a la propuesta con el formato de la NFPA y con equipos con certificación UL.
El lugar en donde se instalen las baterías debe ser cerrado y no deben existir gases de batería. Debe
estar protegido contra sobre corriente entre 150% y 200% de la carga normal de la batería
6.2. DISPOSITIVOS QUE OPERAN CON EL PANEL CHEETAH XI 50

 Mini módulo de monitoreo de 2.75” x 1.75” para montar en una pequeña caja de empalme detrás de un
dispositivo de monitoreo. Este dispositivo monitoreará un dispositivo de entrada cableado Clase B usando el
extremo de 39 ohm de resistencia de línea. Versión de disyuntor aísla por completo de corto circuito al cableado
estilo 7 de NFPA.
- Este módulo proporciona hilos de transmisión espira lados de 6.5.
- Diseñado para ser cableado y montado sin conexiones rígidas dentro de una caja eléctrica
promedio.
- Corriente de reserva: 0.485mA.
- Corriente de alarma: 2.0mAmax.
 MÓDULO SUPERVISADO DE CONTROL 55-042

Este módulo brinda protocolo digital para comunicaciones rápidas y seguras. El módulo incluye un LED tricolor
que indica al instante el estado del dispositivo. El modulo supervisado de control da a los circuitos de
notificación del edificio una interfaz inteligente para el circuito direccionable.
- Capacidad de operar solenoides de hasta 2 amps @ 24 VDC.
- Puede operar NACs, solenoides, o cajas maestras, pero no varias simultáneamente.
- Resistencia max de cable del circuito NAC es de 100 ohms.
- Resistencia EOL del cirduito NAC para cableado clase B es 39 Kohms
- Corriente de reserva 0.560mA.
- Corriente de alarma 2.0mA max.
 MODULOS DE RELÉ
El módulo de relé proporciona el edificio una interfaz de salida de contacto seco mediante un circuito
direccionable inteligente. Se dispone de dos contactos configurables de forma C del relé para 2 Amps @
30VDC, 0.5 Amp @120VAC.
Contiene una amplia gama de modos operativos incluso operación multizona, hasta 4 estados diferentes y
programación multi-estado. Los parámetros operativos se mantienen en el RAM no volátil para respuestas
rápidas y seguras ante condiciones de emergencia.
- Pueden ser instalado sobre caja de empalme de 4” x 4” x 2 1/8”
LAS BAMBAS
- Resistencia max de cableado entrada de contacto seco 100ohms

- Categorias de contacto seco 3A@30VDC resistente, sin código 0.9A@70.7VAC.
- Resistente sin código.
- Corriente de espera 0.500Ma
- Corriente de alarma 2.0ma max.
 ESTACION MANUAL DE DESCARGA
La estación manual de descarga debe operar como un circuito direccionable inteligente. Dispositivo de
activación de doble acción.
- Diseño duradero.
- Resistente a impacto y a vibración.
- Supervisión dinámica.
- La palanca una vez bajada permanecerá así hasta que se reposicione con llave.
- Listado por UL.
- Aprobado por CSFM, FM y NYMEA.
 PULSADOR DE ABORTO DE DESCARGA 10-1639
El dispositivo está diseñado para abortar la descarga del agente limpio esto se logra colocando un mini módulo
que supervise su contacto e indique al panel su estado cuando el panel detecte el contacto se detendrá la
cuenta de descarga. Esto se usa para evitar la activación de una falsa alarma o una acción por manipulación.
 DETECTOR DE FLAMA
El modelo IPES IR / UV proporciona una combinación de sensores UV e IR, en donde el sensor infrarrojo opera
a una longitud de onda de 4.2 a 4.6 microns, su campo de visión es de 90 grados monitorea regiones
específicas de ambos rangos espectrales. La combinación de múltiples sensores elimina los indicadores falsos
positivos causados por fuentes de radiación que no son llamas.
Características eléctricas
- < 2.0 W, standby
- < 3.0 W, during alarm
- < 5.0 W, self test
- < 7.3 W, maximum with heated window & alarm
- Salidas
- Anolog signal 4 – 20 mA
- Fault signal 2ma ± 0.1mA
- Ready signal 4ma ± 0.1 mA
- Fire signal 18 ma ± 0.1 mA
- RE 485, Mudbus RTU
- Relay (normalmente abierto y cerrado).
- Temperatura de operación
- -40°F to +185°F (-40°C to +85°C)
LAS BAMBAS
Características mecánicas
- Material aluminio, acero inoxidable 316.
- Tipo de entra cable 3/4".
CAMPO DE VISTA Y RANGO DE DETECCIÓN

FUEL SIZE DISTANCIA FEET(M) TIEMPO DE RESPUESTA
n-Heptane 1 ft x 1 ft 100 (30) 5.0
Methanol 1 ft x 1 ft 85 (26) 4.9
JP5 2 ft x 2 ft 100 (30) 5.0
 DETECTOR DE TEMPERATURA
Son de corazón de muchos sistemas de protección de incendios en algunos sistemas es usado como un
dispositivo de alarma para detectar sobrecalentamiento o un incendio y alertar al personal. En otros sistemas
como este se utiliza como un dispositivo de liberación para detectar incendios y accionar el sistema de extinción.
Espicificaciones:
- Temperatura de establecimiento 225ºF
y 190°F Listado en la UL y FM
6.3. DISPOSITIVOS DE NOTIFICACION Y ALARMA

El Sistema de Detección y Alarma de Incendios utilizará los siguientes dispositivos de notificación y alarma:
 SIRENA CON LUZ ESTROBOSCOPICA
El sistema de Notificación constara de sirenas con luz estroboscópica tanto para la parte interior como para la
parte exterior. Los equipos que se utilizarán son marca S. Sensor Modelo: P2R-K, El sistema de Notificación
constará de tres tipos de señales, las cuales se son:
LAS BAMBAS
Alarma de Nivel 1: Una sirena con luz estroboscópica debidamente señalizada en el interior de la sala que
indicará la activación de al menos uno (01) detector térmico, esto además denotará el estado de pre descarga o
cuenta regresiva (30 segundos) al cabo de los cuales se producirá la descarga de agente limpio de manera
automática.
Notificación de Ambiente Inundado: Una luz estroboscópica debidamente señalizada en el exterior de la sala
que indicará que el gas ha sido descargado y que deberá mantenerse la puerta cerrada a fin de mantener la
concentración de diseño del gas en el ambiente.
6.4. INSTALACIÓN DEL SISTEMA
 La canalización que soportará a los cableados, para la transmisión de señales o para alimentación de energía
eléctrica entre los componentes del sistema será diseñado teniendo como objetivo simplificar los trabajos de su
montaje, causando mínima interferencia a las labores del proyecto priorizando su apariencia estética en los
ambientes de instalación.
las rutas de cableado aplicarán canalización adosada en las estructuras a ser instalada consistirá en tuberías
conduit rígido, según se indique en los planos.
Los conductores deben cumplir con los requisitos de la NEC, NFPA 70. Deberá ser de cobre, calibre mínimo #18
AWG para los dispositivos de iniciación y # 16 AWG con recubrimiento FPLP para los cableados horizontales y
FPLR para los montajes listados por UL. Los empalmes entre conductores deberán hacerse con dispositivos
aprobados. Estos detalles serán coordinados y plasmados en el diseño definitivo del sistema.
El conducto será mínimo de 3/4”
7. EQUIPOS DEL SISTEMA DE INCENDIOS CON CO2 Y FM-200

7.1. ANALISIS DE RIESGO
Las zonas a proteger son el generador y celdas eléctricas ubicadas en el contenedor. El tipo de fuego con
posibilidades de ocurrir son de clase B y de clase C, siendo el primero provocado por líquidos derivados de petróleo y
el segundo por equipos eléctricos/electrónicos, ambos generan incidencias de fuego que serán localizados
puntualmente por detectores de flama y escape de gas metano.
7.2. AREAS A PROTEGER
Para la protección del generador se ha dispuesto el uso de un banco de cilindros de CO2, de 6 unidades de 100Lbs
para las 2 celdas eléctricas se ha dispuesto el uso de un cilindro de 20lb del agente limpio FM-200.
8. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SISTEMA DE EXTINCIÓN
8.1. AGENTE CO2

El dióxido de carbóno extingue el fuego por reducción del oxígeno contenido en el área a proteger, hasta el
punto donde éste no puede soportar una combustión. Debido a la extrema densidad del CO2, la protección de las
áreas peligrosas está cubierta con una supresión de incendios rápido y efectivo.
La selección del dióxido de carbóno, es desarrollada para aplicación total, que consiste de la instalación del
tanque conectado a las tuberías en forma fija y las toberas de descarga del CO2, dirigidas directamente en el
área a proteger.
 Requisitos de diseño
- El sistema será diseñado de acuerdo con todos los requisitos aplicables del estándar de la
NFPA12.
LAS BAMBAS
- El sistema será diseñado para los requisitos de aplicación total.

- El sistema utilizará una red de distribución del agente con boquillas fijas.
- El sistema será capaz de la detección automática y la actuación automática o manual.
 Requisitos de funcionamiento
- El sistema será capaz de extinguir los fuegos en peligros de la clase A, B y C.
- El agente del CO2 diluirá el contenido en oxigeno del peligro protegido a un punto donde no
se puede sustentar la combustión.
- El sistema de la detección será aprobado a todas las reglas aplicables y a las regulaciones e
la norma FFPA.
8.2. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SISTEMA DE EXTINCIÓN POR FM-200
 Descripción de HFC-227ea
El HFC-227ea es un agente de extinción rápida diseñado específicamente para contrarrestar estos problemas y
proteger los activos críticos. La mayoría de los sistemas se activan automáticamente con la ayuda de sistemas
de detección y control para detectar el fuego en su etapa más temprana de crecimiento. El HFC-227ea es
enviado rápidamente en la zona afectada, y le fuego es extinguido.
El agente limpio heptaflouropropano HFC-227-ea (FE-227, FM-200) es mejor opción de supresión de incendios
para este tipo de riesgos, porque no es conductor eléctrico, no deja residuos que pueda dañar los componentes,
no deja residuos que limpiar, apaga rápidamente, es seguro para las personas, y está aprobado por la united
state enviromental protección agencia como un agente que no posee cualidades agotadoras de la capa de
ozono. También es un agente muy efectivo, se requieren de menores cantidades, menos contenedores de
almacenaje y menos espacio para almacenarlos.
El agente limpio HFC-227ea, es usado como un agente supresor de fuego por inundación total que es muy
efectivo para fuegos clases A, B y C, especialmente donde existen fuentes de reinicio. El HFC-227ea se
descarga directamente dentro de las áreas a protegerse, esparciéndose rápidamente, alcanzando la
concentración diseñada o de extinción en menos de 10 segundos.
El agente limpio HFC-227ea, se almacena dentro de contenedores que han pasado una exhaustiva prueba por
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) y Factory Mutual (FM), presurizados a 360 PSIG a 21 °C. los contenedores de
acero usan un disco de ruptura de acero inoxidable, virtualmente a prueba de fugas, no tienen partes móviles
como una válvula y son considerablemente más eficientes y confiables. Todos los cilindros son montados a nivel
del piso con un medidor de presión e indicador de nivel para facilitar la inspección del cilindro.
 Propiedades físicas
Nombre químico: Heptafluoropropane

Formula química: CF3CHFCF3
Designación ASHRAE HFC-227ea
Peso molecular: 170.03
Punto de ebullición a 1 atm, -16.4ºC
Densidad del líquido @ 25ºC 1386 kg/cm3
LAS BAMBAS
Temperatura crítica 101.6 ºC

Presión crítica 2930KPa
Presión de vapor a 25ºC 453.3KPa
Calor Especifico (Cp) @ 25°C (77°F),
kJ/kg-°C (Btu/lb-°F) 1.247
Calor de Vaporización @ B.P., kJ/kg (Btu/lb) 132.6%
Conductividad Termica, liquido @ 25°C (77°F),
W/m-°C (Btu/hr-ft-°F) 0.0533
Viscocidad Liquidad (lb/ft-hr) @ 25°C (77°F), cP (lb/ft-hr) 0.2442
Fuerza Dielectrica Relativa @ 1atm, 25°C (N2 =1) 2
Solubilidad del agua en HFC-227ea @ 20°C (68°F), ppm 600
Potencial de agotamiento del ozono 0
otencial de calentamiento global 2900
Se empleará el concepto de inundación total de cada ambiente a fin de conseguir la extinción del fuego.
El diseño del sistema automático de extinción de incendios se desarrollará siguiendo los lineamientos del
estándar NFPA 2001. Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems edición 2014 y considerando las
referencias normativas contenidas en ella, sin perjuicio de lo establecido en las normas nacionales.
8.3. FUNCIONAMIENTO DEL HFC227ea
Se necesita tres componentes para que ocurra la combustión: calor, combustible y oxígeno.
El HFC-227ea pertenece al mismo tipo de componentes que son utilizados en refrigeración, lo que hace de él un
Efectivo agente de transferencia de calor. La extinción es activa, el HFC-227ea privada al fuego de energía
calorífica a un grado tal que la combustión ya no puede ser sostenida. En otras palabras, la acción básica es a través del
enfriamiento físico del incendio en el lugar mismo donde están las llamas.
El HFC-227ea tiene muchos beneficios. Extingue incendios en forma rápida y eficiente, evita daños costosos y es limpio:
no produce ningún tipo de partículas o residuos aceitosos que puedan dañar el equipo que se está protegiendo. Otros
sistemas, tales como sistemas de agua espuma, o químicos secos pueden ocasionar tanto daño como el fuego mismo.
LAS BAMBAS
 SEGURIDAD
El HFC-227ea no reduce los niveles de oxígeno de forma significativa. Esto lo convierte en una elección segura
para la protección de zonas ocupadas. Otros sistemas pueden expulsar 50% (o más) del aire del espacio
protegido después de la descarga. Los sistemas con HFC-227ea, solamente desplazan aproximadamente un
7% del aire después de la descarga, dejando más oxígeno para respirar.
Con una base de datos de más de 70 pruebas de toxicidad, se ha probado que el HFC-227ea es seguro. La
agencia de protección ambiental de los estados unidos ha aprobado el HFC-227ea para que pueda ser utilizado
en zonas ocupadas, es más, si la concentración es menor que 9% los tiempos de evacuación establecidos NO
se aplican.
El HFC-227ea es seguro: ha sido incluso aprobado para ser utilizado como propelente para inhaladores
farmacéuticos, tales como los utilizados para suministrar medicinas para el asma.
8.4. LOS CILINDROS DE HFC-227ea
Los cilindros de Agente Limpio (HFC-227ea), Serie 70, son usados en sistemas de extinción de incendios para
almacenar el HFC-227ea hasta el desarrollo del fuego y el agente sea liberado. El HFC-227ea es retenido en el
cilindro por una válvula que contiene un disco de ruptura de rápida acción. El disco será roto, y el HFC-227ea
será liberado, por dos métodos: (1) Mediante la operación de un actuador por una señal eléctrica que es
automáticamente o manualmente controlada, ó (2) Cuando el cilindro alcanza una temperatura interna entre el
rango de 160 °F a 187 °F (71.1 °C a 86.1 °C), esto creara una suficiente presión interna para producir la ruptura
del disco y la liberación del HFC-227ea. La válvula que contiene el disco de ruptura y el actuador, es de 1”
(25.4mm). Después de la descarga la válvula es reacondicionada por el simple reemplazo de tres componentes.
Los cilindros de HFC-227ea, Serie 70, han pasado una extensa prueba por Underwriters Laboratories y por
Factory Mutual y están disponibles en un amplio rango de almacenamiento, desde 8 a 1002 libras de HFC-
227ea.
El HFC-227ea usado en estos cilindros tiene una presión de vapor natural de 66.4 psig (458 kPa) a 77 °F (25°C)
y es presurizada con nitrógeno seco a 360 psig (2482 kPa), a 70 °F (21°C), para proveer una rápida y efectiva
descarga en 10 segundos o menos.
Los cilindros de HFC-227ea, Serie 70, son suministrados con un medidor de presión que permite una rápida
inspección visual de la presión del cilindro. Accesorios opcionales incluyen un Indicador de Nivel del Líquido, y
“Switch” Supervisor de Baja Presión. El indicador de Nivel de Liquido provee la conveniencia de determinar el
peso del HFC-227ea sin la necesidad remover el cilindro de su lugar de instalación para el pesaje respectivo. El
Conmutador Supervisor de Baja Presión provee un monitoreo constante de la presión interna del cilindro. Esta
es disponible en dos estilos, contactos normalmente abierto y normalmente cerrado. En el eventual
descrecimiento de la presión interna de 360 psig a 270 psig (2482.1 kPa a 1875.4kPa), el contacto del
Conmutador Supervisor normalmente abierto/cerrado deberá cerrar/abrir. Esto causará una alarma de problema
de supervisión en el panel de control.
LAS BAMBAS
9. CARACTERISTICAS DE LA EXTINCION POR AGENTE CO2
 CILINDROS 100 Lbs. (45.4 Kg)

Los cilindros de CO2 vienen recargados totalmente a 2700PSI/21°C y de acuerdo al diseño de protección con
este agente puede ser usado un cilindro o varios unidos a través de un manifold para la descarga múltiple.
El cilindro está asegurado para el transporte y almacenamiento de acuerdo a los requerimientos de OSHA y
DOT.
Está aprobado por UL, FM, USCG. La capacidad del cilindro es de 100 lbs y el peso promedio del tanque es
330lbs. Las dimensiones del tanque son dimensiones A es 267 mm, la dimensión B es de 1550 mm y la
dimensión C es 1607 mm, véase a siguiente figura.
 VALVULA ENSAMBLADA AL CILINDRO

Esta válvula es sellada para mantener presurizada el agente contenido en el cilindro. La válvula es de bronce
forjado y consta de válvula principal, orificio de descarga, disco de alivio de presión, válvula piloto e entrada de
accionamiento de presión. La válvula piloto sirve para recargar el cilindro y como puerto para activaciones
eléctricas y manuales. En la siguiente figura, se muestran los componentes de la válvula.
LAS BAMBAS
 COMPONENTES DE ACTIVACIÓN DEL CILINDRO MAESTRO

El sistema CO2 requiere como mínimo una válvula esclava sea convertida en válvula maestra para la operación
del sistema. Depende del peligro del área de cobertura puede ser activado eléctricamente, manualmente o por
neumática. La cantidad de válvulas maestras dependen de la cantidad de cilindros a usar y de la configuración
de la distribución del manilfold, además de las recomendaciones de la NFPA12.
 ACTIVACIÓN ELÉCTRICA
El kit de activación maestra de descarga del CO2 está conectada con el módulo de descarga del panel de
control. El kit tiene las siguientes características.
Acero inoxidable, a prueba de explosión, dos entradas de solenoides y está aprobado para usar en áreas
peligrosas clase I, grupo C&D y clase II, grupo E, F & G.
Los solenoides de 24 Vdc requieren de 0.83 Amps. Para su operación.
 ACTUADOR MANUAL DE EMERGENCIA

Está instalada en cada kit maestro de activación y permite la activación manual del sistema. Consiste en
remover un anillo de seguridad y girar la palanca a posición abierta. Esta acción descarga la presión necesaria
para abrir las válvulas y descargar el contenido.
 ACTIVACIÓN MANUAL
La manija de activación manual permite descargar el sistema CO2 cuando el sistema automático de control no
ha sido iniciado. Con sólo remover el anillo de protección y girar la manija en posición abierta para permitir el
paso de la presión necesaria para abrir la válvula y descarga el contenido del cilindro.
 CADENA DE CONEXIÓN
Permite la interconexión manual de dos válvulas maestras. Esto permite que las válvulas maestras se
descarguen simultáneamente.
LAS BAMBAS
 MANGUERA CURVADA FLEXIBLE DE DESCARGA
Permite la interconexión entre el cilindro de CO2 y la tubería de distribución o el manifold de descarga. Cada
cilindro deberá contener una manguera con una válvula check interna para prevenir el retorno de flujo de CO2
del manifold. Las mangueras flexibles de descarga son probadas hidrostáticamente a 2500 psi, aprobados por al
NFPA12.
 VALVULAS CHECK
Estas válvulas son usadas para aislar el sistema principal del sistema de reserva. Previene la presurización del
banco de reservas de los cilindros bloqueando el flujo del agente desde la tubería principal del sistema de
descarga. Permite realizar configuraciones de red de tuberías en el diseño de cobertura.
En la versión más pequeña previene la despresurización cuando el actuador neumático es remoto de su base.
 VÁLVULA DE MANTENIMIENTO Y PARADA
Permite bloquear la descarga del agente CO2 para realizar mantenimiento u otros propósitos. Estas válvulas
están construidas de acero /carbón con una esfera de acero inoxidable y tiene una manija de ¼” de vuelta
(abierto/cerrado).
Las válvulas tienen incorporaciones micro-swicht (normalmente abierto o normalmente cerrado) de 5 A/ Vdc, las
cuales se conectan al panel de control para supervisar la posición de la válvula recomendada por la NFPA12.
LAS BAMBAS
 RACK PARA EL MONTAJE DE CELINDROS

El rack de una fila permite alojar cierta cantidad de cilimdros en una fila, uno tras otro. La inserción o extracción
de los equipos debe realizarse con protección para evitar caídas. Además, permite montar el manifold de
descarga.
Está fabricado de canales uni-strut y abrazaderas, además, cada cilimdro tiene una argolla de acero para
asegurarse a la estructura del rack.
 ODORIZADOR WINTERGREEN
La esencia wintergreen es inyectado en cantidades pequeñas al flujo del agente CO2 a través de la red de
tuberías y es descargado junto al agente.
El propósito de la esencia es prevenir al personal que el área contiene una concentración de CO2 para que
puedan tomar todas las precauciones a abandonar el área inmediatamente. Este equipo debe ser reemplazado
después de cada descarga.
 BOQUILLAS DE DESCARGA TIPO RADIAL

Este tipo de boquillas son usadas para la descarga del agente en sistemas de inundación total.
 SWITCH DE PRESIÓN
Es usado para confirmar que el CO2 ha sido descargado a través de una activación neumática. Esta señal
suministra la entrada de control al sistema para activar las alarmas visuales, sonoras o relés auxiliares. La carga
eléctrica al switch no debe exceder 10 A/125Vac o
LAS BAMBAS
 SIRENA OPERADORA POR NEUMÁTICA

Ante la incidencia de incendio detectada por los sensores de gas o flama, el panel de control permitirá la descarga del
CO2 en el área indicada. Además, activará las señales visuales y sonoras para el desalojo inmediato del área. Durante la
descarga del banco de tanques se activará la sirena neumática indicando el tiempo de inicio y termino de la descarga.
Adicionalmente, se ha añadido un odorizador al CO2 para que alerte al personal en caso no se alerten por las señales
sonoras y visuales.
Para el caso de las celdas eléctricas ante la incidencia de incendio detectada por los sensores de temperatura el panel
de control permitirá la descarga del agente FM-200. Además, activará las señales visuales y sonoras para el desalojo
inmediato del área.
10. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SISTEMA DE DETECCIÓN Y ALARMA CONTRA INCENDIOS

El sistema de detección y alarma de incendios está conformado por lo siguiente:
10.1. GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01

El generador eléctrico 01 cuenta con los siguientes equipos y/o dispositivos de detección y alarma de incendios:
Descripción de Área Dispositivo Cantidad

Panel de Control Inteligente Cheetah
MOTIVATOR 01 1
xi 50 (P/N 10-071)
Detector térmico 6
Sirena con luz estroboscopia 4
Modulo de control P/N 55-042 12
Módulo Relay P/N 55-043 3
Módulo de descarga P/N 55-052 3
Estación M de descarga P/N 20-1343 3
Detector de Flama 2
LAS BAMBAS
11. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SISTEMA DE EXTINCIÓN CON AGENTE LIMPIO

El sistema de extinción de incendios en la motivator 01 está conformado por lo siguiente:
Descripción de Área Dispositivo Cantidad
MOTIVATOR 01 Cilindro de Agente Limpio CO2 6
Cilindro de Agente Limpio FM-200 1

SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y EXTINCION DE INCENDIO MEMORIA DE CALCULO
GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01 FRN-030085-MAC-001
LAS BAMBAS
MEMORIA DE CALCULO
FRN-03008521-MCA-001
0 20/12/2019 EMITIDO PARA CONTRUCCION F.B.S. E.R.V. M.A.R.

A 10/12/2019 REVISION INTERNA F.B.S. E.R.V. M.A.R.
MEMORIA DE CALCULO Pág. 1 de 20
FRN-030085-MCA-001
REV. 0
GENERADOR ELECTRCICO 01 FRN-030085-MCA-001
LAS BAMBAS
TABLA DE CONTENIDO
1. ALCANCE.............................................................................................................................................................. 3
2. ANEXOS ................................................................................................................................................................ 3
2.1.-ANEXO 2: CALCULO DE BATERIAS. ............................................................................................................... 3
GENERADOR ELECTRCICO 01 FRN-030085-MCA-001
LAS BAMBAS
1. ALCANCE
La relación de documentos que son mencionados en el anexo es proporcionada por

FIRENO SAC, como son la Memoria de cálculo para el GENERADOR ELECTRICO
01.
2. ANEXO
2.1.-ANEXO
1.- Anexo 1 Cálculo de Baterías.

2.- Anexo 2 Cálculo de FM-200.
3.- Anexo 3 Cálculo de CO2
CHEETAH Xi BATTERY CALCULATION WORKSHEET Version 6.5.2.0
TOTAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Standby Current Alarm Current 1-Aug-15
1 Controller 0.275 A 0.275 A
2 DACT (Insert 1 if installed) 0.000 A 0.000 A Current included in Section 3 total
3 SLM (Insert 1 if installed) 0.000 A
4 SPS (Insert 1 if installed) 0.000 A 0.000 A
5 CRPM (Insert 1 if installed) 0.000 A
6 Network Module (Insert 1 if installed) 0.000 A
(RS-485 or Fiber)
7 CRM4 (Insert # of modules installed) 0.000 A 0.000 A
8 Signaling Line Circuits 0.012 A 0.060 A Total from Section 2

(CSC + SLM) (Note 4,8)
9 Auxiliary Power 0.063 A 0.037 A Total from Section 3

(CSC + SPS) (Note 1) (Note 2, 6)
10 Notification Circuits 0.804 A Total from Section 4
(Note 2)
Total(Stdby) 0.350 A Total (Alm) 1.176 A (Note 1 & 2)
Standby Capacity = [Total (Stdby)] X [Standby Time] + [Total ( ALM )] X [Minutes] = 50.485 AH (Note 5)
Minimum Battery Size = [Standby Capacity] X [1.2] = 60.58 AH (Note 3,5)
SECTION 2 Communication Loop Alarm Current
Addressable Device Current (# used) x (current) = total (# used) x (current) = total

63-1052/1058 Photo x 0.481 = 0 mA 0 x 2.000 = 0.000 mA
67-033/034 Ion x 0.481 = 0 mA 0 x 2.000 = 0.000 mA
63-1053/1059 Photo / Heat x 0.481 = 0 mA 0 x 2.000 = 0.000 mA
63-1057/1062 Photo / Duct x 0.481 = 0 mA 0 x 2.000 = 0.000 mA
68-140/68-302 FAAST Detector x 0.300 = 0 mA 0 x 0.300 = 0.000 mA
60-1039/1040 Heat x 0.451 = 0 mA 0 x 2.000 = 0.000 mA
55-045/050 MMM 12 x 0.485 = 5.82 mA 12 x 2.000 = 24.000 mA
55-041/046 MM x 0.485 = 0 mA 0 x 2.000 = 0.000 mA
20-1063/1064 APS 3 x 0.370 = 1.11 mA 3 x 2.000 = 6.000 mA
55-042/047 SCM 3 x 0.630 = 1.89 mA 3 x 2.000 = 6.000 mA
55-043/048 RM 3 x 0.580 = 1.74 mA 3 x 2.000 = 6.000 mA
63-1063 Relay Base x 0.170 = 0 mA 0 x 0.750 = 0.000 mA
63-1064 Sounder Base x 0.900 0 mA
55-052/053 Release Module 3 x 0.450 1.35 mA 3 x 6.000 = 18.000 mA
Number of ARMS connected to Release Module = x 10 = 0.000 mA (Note 7)
Number of IRMS connected to Release Module = 1 x 37 = 37.000 mA (Note 7)
Number of Solenoids connected to Release/Control Modules = 2 x = 0.000 A (Note 6)
(Amps)
Total Signaling Line Circuits 11.91 mA / 1000 = 0.01191 A 60.000 mA / 1000 = 0.06 A
Totals inserted in line # 7 of Section 1
SECTION 3
Standby Current Alarm Current
Auxiliary Power (# used) x (current) = total (# used) x (current) = total
10-2528 DACT 0 x 0.150 = 0.000 A 0 x 0.190 = 0.000 A (Note 8)
63-1064 Sounder Base 0 x 0.007 = 0.000 A 0 x 0.027 = 0.000 A (Note 8)
Total Standby Current of Devices from Aux Power Devices Worksheet = 0.000 A Alarm Current = 0.000 A
Total Aux. Power (Stdby) 0.063 A (Alrm) 0.037 A Total inserted in line # 8 of Section 1
SECTION 4
Notification Appliances/Devices
Total from NAC Appliances Worksheet = 0.804 A Total inserted in line # 9 of Section 1
Standby Time Desired: 144 Hours

Alarm Time Required: 5 Minutes ( 5 or 10 ) SEE NOTES ON NEXT PAGE
Voltage Drop Calculator for NAC Circuits (Circuit Nominal 24Vdc)
Circuit Ohms / Wire Length Volts at
Current 1000 ft (One Way) Total Ohms EOL % Drop
(Feet)
Wire Size 4.99 0.00 20.40 0.00% (Note 9)

Voltage drop
Wire Size 4.99 0.00 20.40 0.00% (Note 9) Should be less
Wire Size 4.99 0.00 20.40 0.00% (Note 9) than 10% Drop
NOTES:
1 Panel Auxiliary Standby Power cannot exceed 2.0A, or 4.0A w/ SPS.
2 Panel Auxiliary Alarm Power plus Notification Power cannot exceed 6.0 A, or 12.0 A w/ SPS.
If Standby current is over 2 Amps, or Alarm Current is over 6 Amps, SPS MUST be used.
If Standby current is over 4 Amps, or Alarm Current is over 12 Amps, power is NOT available even if using SPS.
3 Cheetah Xi Control Panel can support charging up to 75 AH of standby batteries. The SPS can support
charging up to an additional 75 AH of standby batteries for a system total of up to 150 AH.
4 SLC Loop power does not include current delivered to SCM output circuits during alarm conditions.
5 Standby time should be 24, 60 or 90 hours as required by the local authority having jurisdiction or
installation requirements. Factory Mutual requires 90 hour standby time for Sprinkler Systems.
0.083 hour represents 5 minutes of alarm.
1.2 represents battery derating factor.
6 Solenoid current is included in Aux Power totals in Section 3, then included in line 8 of Section 1, since
power for this feeds off the Aux Power and not from the SLC loop.
7 Release module can activate up maximum of 6 ARMs, 6 IRMs or 1 - 24Vdc solenoid or 2 - 12Vdc solenoids in series.
For battery calcs, enter the number or ARMs and the value of 10.0 mA each
This current is then included in Aux Power, and not SLC loop power.
8 DACT and Sounder base are shown in Section 1 and Section 3 both. Since these are powered by the
Aux power, Section 1 totals shown are drawn in from Section 3 and not added twice in the calculations.
9 Voltage drop calcs assume a worst-case source voltage as measured by UL with the batteries depleted to 20.4 volts.
Under AC power for most of the drain cyble of the batteries, the circuit voltages will be substantially higher and thus,
would support a greater number of devices with less higher voltage. A device's minimum operating voltage is derived
from the UL-requirement that it works down to 80% of it's rated minimum operating voltage.
If NAC circuit is wired Style Z (Class A), voltage calculations shoule be made assuming a WORST CASE break of
the circuit near the return of the circuit to the panel/module. The result will be identical to that of a Style Y circuit of
double the length of the Style Y (Class B) circuit.
Fike Clean Agent System Flow Calculation Software v4.00 (HFC-227ea)
UL: EX4623 / Component of FM Approved System
System calculated within limits of Fike's UL listing and FM approval.
FIRENO SAC
Av. San Aurelio 888-B Lima 36
Phone: +511-3750176
File Name: Anexo B.FC4
Consolidated Report
Customer Information
Company Name: FIRENO SAC
Address: CALLE SAN AURELIO 888-B
ZARATE, SJL
Phone:
Contact:
Title:
Project Data
Project Name: GRUPO ELECTROGENO
Designer: ALEX PARDO
Number:
Account:
Location: LAS BAMBAS
Description:
Enclosure Report
Elevation: 12500 ft (relative to sea level)

Atmospheric Correction Factor: 0.66 (Manual Override)
Enclosure 1 GRUPO ELECTROGENO
Enclosure Temperature: Number of Nozzles: 2
Minimum: 50 F
Calculation Date/Time: miércoles, 7 de octubre de 2020, 22:32:57

Copyright (c) Jensen Hughes, Inc. Licensed to: Fike Corporation
Key ID: 794990965
Page: 1 of 7
Consolidated Report
Minimum: 50 F Width: 0.0 ft
Maximum: 70 F Length: 0.0 ft
Max. Concentration: 0.00 % Height: 0.0 ft
Design Concentration: Volume: 0.0 ft ³
Adjusted: 10.08 % Non-permeable: 0.0 ft ³
Minimum: 7.00 % Total Volume: 400.0 ft ³
Min. Agent Required: 9.4 lb
Adjusted Agent Required: 14.0 lb
Leakage Area vs Pressure

30
Legend
E1-Pos (+)
E1-Neg (-)
25
Equivalent Leakage Area (in^2)
20
15
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
Enclosure Pressure (psf)
Agent Source Report

Key ID: 794990965
Page: 2 of 7
Consolidated Report
Agent: HFC-227ea / Propellant N2
Cylinder Name: 20 lb. Cylinder, Upright
Cylinder Part Number: 70-263
Agent Per Cylinder: 14.0 lb
Fill Density: 46.7 lb / cubic ft
Number of Main Cylinders: 1
Number of Reserve Cylinders: 0
Cylinder Empty Weight: 22.0 lb

Weight, All Cylinders + Agent: 36.0 lb
Floor Area Per Cylinder: 0.27 ft ²
Floor Loading Per Cylinder: 135 lb / ft ²

Key ID: 794990965
Page: 3 of 7
Consolidated Report
Parts Report
Total Agent Required: 14.0 lb

Cylinder Name: 20 lb. Cylinder, Upright (Part: 70-263)
Number of Cylinders: 1
Nozzle
Nozzle Type Diameter Nozzle Area Part Number
E1-N1 360 NPT - Br 3/8 in 0.0380 in ² 80-091-0635
E1-N2 360 NPT - Br 3/8 in 0.0380 in ² 80-091-0635
Pipe &
Fittings Type Diameter Length Elbows (90) Elbows (45) Tees Unions
40T 3/8 in 13.41 ft 6 0 1 0
Other
Objects Name Quantity Part Number
System Acceptance Report
System Discharge Time: 7.1 seconds

Percent Agent In Pipe: 11.1%
Percent Agent Before First Tee: 5.9%
Enclosure Number: 1
Enclosure Name: GRUPO ELECTROGENO
Minimum Design Concentration: 7.00%
Adjusted Design Concentration: 10.08%
Predicted Concentration: 10.09%
Maximum Expected Agent Concentration: 10.48% (At 70 F)

Key ID: 794990965
Page: 4 of 7
Consolidated Report
Minimum Adjusted Predicted Average

Agent Agent Agent Nozzle
Nozzle Required Required Delivered Pressure
E1-N1 4.7 lb 7.0 lb 7.0 lb 177 psig

E1-N2 4.7 lb 7.0 lb 7.0 lb 177 psig

Key ID: 794990965
Page: 5 of 7
Consolidated Report
Pipe Network Report

Total Total
Pipe Start End Pipe Pipe Pipe Elevation Equivalent Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle
Description Section Node Node Type Diameter Length Union Change Length Name Size Type Area
Cylinder - On Man./End 0 2 1 in 1.87 ft 0 1.87 ft 6.00 ft
Pipe System 2 3 40T 3/8 in 3.00 ft 0 3.00 ft 3.00 ft
Elbow (90) System 3 4 40T 3/8 in ------ 0 ------ 1.30 ft
Pipe System 4 5 40T 3/8 in 3.41 ft 0 ------ 3.40 ft
Tee System 7 8 40T 3/8 in ------ 0 ------ 2.70 ft
Pipe&Nozzle System 12 13 40T 3/8 in 0.10 ft 0 -0.10 ft 0.10 ft E1-N1 3/8 in 360 NPT - Br 0.0380 in ²
Tee System 7 14 40T 3/8 in ------ 0 ------ 2.70 ft
Pipe&Nozzle System 18 19 40T 3/8 in 0.10 ft 0 -0.10 ft 0.10 ft E1-N2 3/8 in 360 NPT - Br 0.0380 in ²
Key ID: 794990965

Page: 6 of 7
Consolidated Report
Key ID: 794990965

Page: 7 of 7
Fike Clean Agent System Flow Calculation Software v4.00 (CO2)
Component of FM Approved System
System calculated within limits of Fike's UL listing and FM approval.
FIRENO SAC
Av. San Aurelio 888-B Lima 36
Phone: +511-3750176
File Name: ANEXO A.FC4
Consolidated Report
Customer Information
Company Name: FIRENO SAC
Address: CALLE SAN AURELIO 888-B
ZARATE, SJL
Phone:
Contact:
Title:
Project Data
Project Name: GRUPO ELECTROGENO
Designer: ALEX PARDO
Number:
Account:
Location: LAS BAMBAS
Description:
Hazard Report
Type Of CO2 System: Total Flooding

Design Total Discharge: 7.0 minutes
Design Liquid Discharge: 5.0 minutes
Hazard Number: 1
Name: GRUPO ELECTROGENO
Type of Hazard: Total Flooding
Number of Nozzles: 8
Design Flow Rate: 85.7 lbs/min
Calculation Date/Time: jueves, 8 de octubre de 2020, 07:42:29
Key ID: 794990965
Page: 1 of 8
Consolidated Report
Design Flow Rate: 85.7 lbs/min
Agent Required: 600.0 lb
Agent Source Report
Agent: CO2 High Pressure

Cylinder Name: 100 lb. cylinder, upright
Cylinder Part Number: C70-100
Agent Per Cylinder: 100.0 lb
Cylinder Empty Weight: 296.0 lb

Weight, All Cylinders + Agent: 2376.0 lb
Floor Area Per Cylinder: 0.60 ft ²
Floor Loading Per Cylinder: 660 lbs / ft ²

Key ID: 794990965
Page: 2 of 8
Consolidated Report
Parts Report
Cylinder Name: 100 lb. cylinder, upright (Part: C70-100)

Number of Cylinders: 6
Nozzle Nozzle
Nozzle Type Diameter Code Nozzle Area Part Number
H1-T01 Rad 180 1/2 in 3.5 0.0156 in ² C80-042
H1-T02 Rad 180 1/2 in 3.5 0.0156 in ² C80-042
H1-T03 Rad 180 1/2 in 3.5 0.0156 in ² C80-042
H1-T04 Rad 180 1/2 in 3.5 0.0156 in ² C80-042
H1-T05 Rad 180 1/2 in 3.5 0.0156 in ² C80-042
H1-T06 Rad 180 1/2 in 3.5 0.0156 in ² C80-042
H1-T07 Rad 180 1/2 in 3.5 0.0156 in ² C80-042
H1-T08 Rad 180 1/2 in 3.5 0.0156 in ² C80-042
Pipe &
Fittings Type Diameter Length Elbows (90) Elbows (45) Tees Unions
40 TC 1/2 in 58.95 ft 6 0 7 0
40 TC 3/4 in 20.20 ft 8 0 5 0
Other
Objects Name Quantity Part Number
1/2in Flex Hose 90 Degree 6 C70-226
3/4 in. Stop Valve 1 C02-1211
System Acceptance Report
System Type: Total Flooding

Cylinder Name: 100 lb. cylinder, upright

Key ID: 794990965
Page: 3 of 8
Consolidated Report
Design Liquid Discharge Time: 5 min, 0 sec
Design Total Discharge Time: 7 min, 0 sec
Calculation based on 70 degree 0 pre-discharge pipeline temperature.
Total Flood Nozzle Summary

Predicted
Nozzle Predicted Agent Agent Predicted Agent
Code Pressure Required Delivered Total Discharge
Haz. Nozzle psig lb lb Time
1 GRUPO ELECTROGENO
H1-T01 3.5 571.7 75.0 76.4 2 min, 12 sec
H1-T02 3.5 562.7 75.0 74.8 2 min, 12 sec
H1-T03 3.5 558.7 75.0 74.0 2 min, 12 sec
H1-T04 3.5 557.7 75.0 73.8 2 min, 12 sec
H1-T05 3.5 571.7 75.0 76.4 2 min, 12 sec
H1-T06 3.5 562.7 75.0 74.8 2 min, 12 sec
H1-T07 3.5 558.7 75.0 74.0 2 min, 12 sec
H1-T08 3.5 557.7 75.0 73.8 2 min, 12 sec
Excess Mass 0.0 0.0 sec
Hazard Totals 600.0 600.0 2 min, 12 sec

Key ID: 794990965
Page: 4 of 8
Consolidated Report
Pipe Network Report

Total Total
Description Section Node Node Type Diameter Length Union Change Length Name Size Type Code
Cylinder - On Man. 0 17 1/2 in 4.83 ft 0 4.83 ft 24.00 ft
Flex Hose Man. 17 18 1/2 in 1.70 ft 0 0.61 ft 2.00 ft
Elbow (90) Man. 18 19 40 TC 3/4 in ------ 0 ------ 2.20 ft
Pipe Man. 19 20 40 TC 3/4 in 1.00 ft 0 ------ 1.00 ft
Tee Man. 20 21 40 TC 3/4 in ------ 0 ------ 1.40 ft
Tee Man. 22 23 40 TC 3/4 in ------ 0 ------ 1.40 ft
Tee Man. 24 25 40 TC 3/4 in ------ 0 ------ 1.40 ft
Tee Man. 26 27 40 TC 3/4 in ------ 0 ------ 1.40 ft
Tee Man. 28 29 40 TC 3/4 in ------ 0 ------ 1.40 ft
Pipe Man./End 29 30 40 TC 3/4 in 0.33 ft 0 ------ 0.30 ft
Elbow (90) System 30 31 40 TC 3/4 in ------ 0 ------ 2.20 ft
Pipe System 31 32 40 TC 3/4 in 1.10 ft 0 ------ 1.10 ft
Pipe System 35 36 40 TC 3/4 in 1.00 ft 0 1.00 ft 1.00 ft
Stop Valve System 44 45 3/4 in 0.30 ft 0 0.30 ft 3.46 ft
Key ID: 794990965
Page: 5 of 8
Consolidated Report
Total Total
Tee System 50 51 40 TC 1/2 in ------ 0 ------ 3.40 ft
Pipe&Nozzle System 61 62 40 TC 1/2 in 0.10 ft 0 -0.10 ft 0.10 ft H1-T08 1/2 in Rad 180 3.5
Key ID: 794990965
Page: 6 of 8
Consolidated Report
Total Total
Tee Man. 3 29 40 TC 3/4 in ------ 0 ------ 4.50 ft
Tee Man. 6 27 40 TC 3/4 in ------ 0 ------ 4.50 ft
Tee Man. 9 25 40 TC 3/4 in ------ 0 ------ 4.50 ft
Tee Man. 12 23 40 TC 3/4 in ------ 0 ------ 4.50 ft
Tee Man. 15 21 40 TC 3/4 in ------ 0 ------ 4.50 ft
Key ID: 794990965

Page: 7 of 8
Consolidated Report
Key ID: 794990965

Page: 8 of 8
SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y EXTINCION DE INCENDIO MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN
GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01 FRN-030085-MOP-001
LAS BAMBAS
MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN
FRN-030085-MOP-001
0 20/12/2019 EMITIDO PARA CONTRUCCION F.B.S. E.R.V. M.A.R.

A 10/12/2019 EMITIDO PARA REVISION INTERNA F.B.S. E.R.V. M.A.R.
MANUAL DE OPERACION Pág. 1 de 23
FRN-030085-MOP-001 REV. 0
LAS BAMBAS
TABLA DE CONTENIDO
1. INTRODUCCIÓN ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
2. OBJETIVOEL OBJETIVO DE ESTE DOCUMENTO ES: ......................................................................................... 3
3. ALCANCE................................................................................................................................................................. 3
4. DESCRIPCION DEL SISTEMA EN GENERAL ........................................................................................................ 3
5. GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01 ................................................................................................................................ 3
6. FILOSOFIA DE OPERACIÓN .................................................................................................................................. 4
7. DISPOSITIVOS DEL SISTEMA DE DETECCIÓN Y EXTINCIÓN DE INCENDIOS ................................................. 4
LAS BAMBAS
1. INTRODUCCIÓN
El presente manual de operación ha sido desarrollado por FIRENO SAC. En este se describe la filosofía de
funcionamiento que deberá cumplir el Sistema de Detección y Extinción de Incendios para la GENERADOR
ELECTRICO 01
2. El objetivo de este documento es:

Sentar los lineamientos operativos básicos que deberán cumplir el Sistema de Detección, Alarma y Extinción de
Incendios a instalarse.
3. ALCANCE
Se considera la descripción de la filosofía de funcionamiento para la implementación del Sistema de Detección y
Alarma de Incendios en la GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01
DOCUMENTOS
Los documentos consisten de la descripción de operación de los equipos que son parte del sistema de protección
de incendios, estos documentos se detallan en los anexos y son parte de este manual.
4. DESCRIPCION DEL SISTEMA EN GENERAL
- El panel de control de incendios Cheetah Xi de fike, es el sistema de control de supresión inteligente de

incendios, está ubicado dentro del contenedor.
- La comunicación directa con los módulos de control direccionable desde el panel principal de control de
incendios se desarrolla mediante las líneas de SLC (Signal Loop Circuit) circuito de línea de señalización,
que son instalados en las áreas de detección y protección de incendios.
5. GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01
- Como sistema de detección automática par extinción de incendios se considera 2 detectores de flama y 6
detectores de temperatura dentro del contenedor.
- El sistema de extinción para el generador consiste del agente CO2 (Dióxido de Carbono) y está
conformado por un banco de 6 tanques de 100lbs cada uno y el sistema de extinción para las celas
eléctricas está conformado por 1 tanque de FM-200 de 20lbs.
- Las estaciones manuales de descarga del CO2 y la estación manual de FM-200 se encuentran cerca a las
puertas del contenedor.
- Los dispositivos de notificación se encuentran instalados des dentro y dos fuera del contenedor y consiste
de sirenas con luz estroboscópica.
LAS BAMBAS
6. FILOSOFIA DE OPERACIÓN
6.1. GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01 SUPRESION CO2
- Los detectores de temperatura y los detectores de flama dentro del contenedor son los dispositivos de
inicialización automática ante un riesgo de incendios.
- Si un primer detector de temperatura del contenedor llega a su temperatura de establecimiento, este
evento iniciará el estado de ALARMA. En el panel de control se encenderá un LED común de alarma y se
activará una señal audible de alarma. Además, se activarán las 2 sirenas con luz estroboscópica con un
sonido alternante indicando el estado de ALARMA, a su vez se activarán las otras sirenas con luz
estroboscópica que está ubicada en el exterior del contenedor, para informar al personal que se encuentre
por los alrededores que ha ocurrido una alarma y se va a proceder a iniciar la descarga del CO2. Los
solenoides de descarga se energizarán después de 40 segundos de activada cualquier alarma.
- Las estaciones manuales de descarga tienen misma función que el detector de temperatura, es decir al
ser accionado se enciendo el led común de alarma y la señal audible en el panel de control, además
activaran las 2 sirenas con luz estroboscópica y se iniciara la descarga de los cilindros de CO2.
- Al cambiar de estado la valvula de mantenimiento se encenderá el led común de supervisión y una señal
audible de supervisión en el panel de control.
- Los detectores de flama tienen un tipo de señal: fuego.
- La señal de fuego en el detector de flama inicia el evento de ALARMA, el proceso es el mismo que se
describió para el detector de temperatura. Al activarse es la confirmacion de descarga 40s retardo.
- Cuando ocurre un evento de falla en el mismo panel de control, estos eventos son catalogados como
FALLA y se enciende un led y una señal audible en el panel de control.
6.2. CELDAS ELECTRICAS SUPRESION FM-200

- Los detectores de temperatura dentro del contenedor son los dispositivos de inicialización automática ante
un riesgo de incendios dentro de las celdas eléctricas. Al activarse es la confirmacion de descarga 40s
- La estación manual de descarga FM-200 tiene la misma función que el detector de humo, es decir al ser
accionado se enciende el led común de alarma y la señal audible en el panel de control, además activaran
las 2 sirenas con luz estroboscópica y se iniciara la descarga del agente FM-200
7. DISPOSITIVOS DEL SISTEMA DE DETECCIÓN Y EXTINCIÓN DE INCENDIOS
ENTRADAS PANEL DE CONTROL SALIDAS

DISPOSITIVOS DE INICIACIÓN DISPOSITIVOS DE NOTIFICACIÓN
AUTOMÁTICA
 Sirena con luz estroboscópica
 Detector Temperatura
DISPOSITIVOS DE SUPERVISIÓN,
 Detector de flama MONITOREO Y CONTROL
DISPOSITIVOS DE INICIACIÓN  Módulo de descarga
MANUAL
 Switch de Mantenimiento
 Estación manual de descarga
LAS BAMBAS
ANEXOS
ANEXO 01: Operación del Panel Cheetah Xi – Deshabilitar-Habilitar.

ANEXO 02: Operación del Panel Cheetah Xi. – ¨Programacion.
ANEXO 03: Operación del Panel Cheetah Xi – Supervision.
ANEXO 04: Operación del Panel Cheetah Xi – Password.
ANEXO 05: Operación del panel Cheetah Xi – Eventos.
ANEXO 06: Operación Sensor de Flama SS4-AS.
LAS BAMBAS
ANEXO 1
OBJETIVO
Describir la configuración del comando de deshabilitar y habilitar de zonas de operación del

panel de control Cheetah Xi:
OPERACIÓN
1.- Para ingresar al comando de deshabilitar y habilitar zonas se requiere ingresar una
contraseña de Nivel 2 (ver Operación del Panel Cheetah Xi - Password)
2.- Ingresar al menú principal del sistema de configuración presionando la tecla [ ESCAPE] y
después [ENTER].
FUNTION SWITCHES
F1-CONFIG F4-WALKTST
F2-ZONE H F5-HISTORY
F3-DAIG F 6-IR COMM
3.- Ingresar a la opción de Configuración, presionando la tecla [F1].
CONFIGURATION MENU 1
F1-DEVICE F4-LEARN
F2-NAC F5-PASSWRD
F3-SLC F6-MENU 2
4.- Ingresar a la opción de Menú 2, presionando la tecla [F6].
F1-TIME F 4-DAY SEN
F2-SILENC F5-ZONE
F3-POWER F6-MENU 3
5.- Ingresar a la opción de Zona, presionando la tecla [F5].
1 de 2
LAS BAMBAS
ZONE 001: ENABLE

(Nombre de la zona)
AUTO COUNTDOWN: 030s
MANU COUNTDOWN: 015s
001 Seleccionar el número de zona que se desea cambiar.

ENABLE Seleccionar la opción de deshabilitar o habilitar (disabled / enable).
Usar las teclas [ ] o [ ] para mover el cursor.
Usar las teclas [ +] o [ -] para cambiar el número de zona y la opción de desh. /hab.
6.- Si la acción que realizó era para deshabilitar la zona, el panel mostrara:
Estado:
- Led (TROUBLE) Encendido intermitente
- Led (SUPERVISORY) Encendido intermitente
- Led ( RELEASE-DISABLED ) Encendido intermitente
- Buzzer del panel Encendido intermitente
Acción:
- Reconocer el evento en el panel, presionando el botón [ACKNOWLEDGE].
- Observar que la zona deseada se encuentra deshabilitado, presionando la tecla
botón [STEP ALL].
7.- Para regresar al menú principal presione la tecla [ ESCAPE].
FUNTION SWITCHES
F3-DAIG F 6-IR COMM
2 de 2
LAS BAMBAS
ANEXO 2
OBJETIVO
La presente descripción describe la secuencia de operación del panel Cheetah Xi en las

diferentes formas de su programación:
1 – OPERACIÓN NORMAL
CHEETAH Xi V1.30
(Nombre Compañía)
08:15:11A 01/20/2007
AL:000 SU:000 TR:000
Estado:
- Led (AC POWER) E n c e n d i d o
2 - OPERACIÓN DE ALARMA
2.1 - Detector Activado:
ALARM TYPE #1
(Nombre del área)
08:18:21A 01/20/2007
ALARM 0001 OF 0001
Estado:
- Led (ALARM) Encendido intermitente
- Buzzer del panel E n c e n d i d o intermitente
- Sirenas del área Activado
Acción:
- Reconocer la alarma en el panel, presionando el botón [ACKNOWLEDGE].
- Silenciar las sirenas activadas presionando el botón [SILENCE].
- Observar el mensaje de ubicación del área donde se origina la alarma y la
dirección de dispositivo activado (presionando la tecla [ F1 ]).
1 de 8
LAS BAMBAS
PNL001 LOOP1 ADDR005

(Nombre Compañía)
08:18:21A 01/20/2007
ALARM 0001 OF 0001
- Seguir con el procedimiento del propietario.
2.2 - Estación manual de Alarma Activado:
MANUAL PULL ALARM

(Nombre del área)
08:29:29A 01/20/2007
ALARM 0001 OF 0001
Estado:
- Sirenas del área Activado
Acción:
dirección de dispositivo activado (presionando la tecla [ F1]).

(Nombre Compañía)
08:29:29A 01/20/2007
ALARM 0001 OF 0001
2 de 8
LAS BAMBAS
3 - OPERACIÓN DE SUPERVISIÓN
Dispositivo de Supervisión Activado:
SUPERVISORY INPUT
(Nombre del área)
08:29:29A 01/20/2007
ALARM 0001 OF 0001
Estado:
- Led (SUPERVISORY) Encendido intermitente
Acción:
- Reconocer la supervisión en el panel, presionando el botón [ACKNOWLEDGE].
- Observar el mensaje de ubicación del área donde se origina la supervisión y la

(Nombre Compañía)
08:39:25A 01/20/2007
SUPVR 0001 OF 0001
4 - OPERACIÓN DE PROBLEMA
Dispositivo o Sistema en Problema:
(Tipo de Problema)
(Nombre del área)
08:40:39A 01/20/2007
EVENT 0001 OF 0001
3 de 8
LAS BAMBAS
Estado:
- Led (TROUBLE) Encendido intermitente
- Buzzer del panel E n c e n d i d o constante
Acción:
- Reconocer el problema en el panel, presionando el botón [ACKNOWLEDGE].
- Observar el mensaje de ubicación del área donde se origina el problema y la
dirección de dispositivo en problema (presionando la tecla [ F1]).

(Nombre Compañía)
08:40:39A 01/20/2007
EVENT 0001 OF 0001
5 - OPERACIÓN DE EXTINCIÓN DE INCENDIOS
5.1 - Secuencia de Extinción automática
Detección del primer detector (Alarma inicial):
ALARM TYPE #1
(Nombre del área)
09:18:21A 01/20/2007
ALARM 0001 OF 0001
Estado:
- Sirenas del área Activado alarma de Nivel 1
Acción:
4 de 8
LAS BAMBAS

dirección de dispositivo activado (presionando la tecla [ F1 ]).

(Nombre Compañía)
09:18:21A 01/20/2007
ALARM 0001 OF 0001
Detección del segundo detector (Pre-descarga):
ZONA 001 RELEASE IN

040 SECONDS
09:19:11A 01/20/2007
ALARM 0002 OF 0002
Estado:
- Cuenta regresiva desde 30 segundos para descarga
- Led (PRE-DISCHARGE) Encendido intermitente
Acción:
Finaliza Cuenta regresiva (Descarga):
ZONA 001 RELEASE IN

000 SECONDS
(Nombre del área)
AL:002 SU:000 TR:000
5 de 8
LAS BAMBAS
Estado:
- Cuenta regresiva en 00 o 40 segundos
- Led ( ALARM ) Encendido intermitente
- Led (RELEASE) Encendido intermitente
- Luz estrobo del área Activado área con Descarga
Acción:
5.2 - Secuencia de Extinción manual
Activación de Una Estación Manual de Descarga:
MANUAL RELEASE
(Nombre del área)
10:18:21A 01/20/2007
ALARM 0001 OF 0001
Estado:
- Cuenta regresiva en 00 segundos
- Led ( ALARM ) Encendido intermitente
- Luz estrobo del área
Acción:
6 de 8
LAS BAMBAS
- Observar el mensaje de ubicación del área donde se activó la descarga manual y la


(Nombre Compañía)
10:18:21A 01/20/2007
ALARM 0001 OF 0001
5.3 - Secuencia de Parada (Aborto) de una Extinción automática
Detección del primer detector (Alarma inicial):
ALARM TYPE #1
(Nombre del área)
09:18:21A 01/20/2007
ALARM 0001 OF 0001
Estado:
Acción:
- Observar el mensaje de ubicación del área donde se origina la alarma y la dirección
de dispositivo activado (presionando la tecla [ F1]).

(Nombre Compañía)
09:18:21A 01/20/2007
ALARM 0001 OF 0001
7 de 8
LAS BAMBAS
Detección del segundo detector (Pre-descarga):
ZONA 001 RELEASE IN

028 SECONDS
09:19:11A 01/20/2007
ALARM 0002 OF 0002
Estado:
- Cuenta regresiva desde 40 segundos para descarga
Acción:
- Activar la estación de aborto en el área donde se origina la alarma
ZONA 001 RELEASE IN

040 SECONDS
(Nombre del área)
AL:002 SU:000 TR:000
Estado:
- Cuenta regresiva se queda en 30 segundos
- Led (ABORT ) Encendido fijo
Acción:
8 de 8
LAS BAMBAS
ANEXO 3
OBJETIVO
Describir la configuración del comando de tiempo para cambiar la fecha y hora de operación
del panel de control Cheetah Xi:
OPERACIÓN
1.- Para ingresar al comando de tiempo se requiere ingresar una contraseña de Nivel 2 (ver
Operación del Panel Cheetah Xi - Password)
2.- Ingresar al menú principal del sistema de configuración presionando la tecla [ ESCAPE] y
después [ENTER].
FUNTION SWITCHES
F3-DAIG F 6-IR COMM
F1-DEVICE F4-LEARN
F2-NAC F5-PASSWRD
F3-SLC F6-MENU 2
4.- Ingresar a la opción de Menú 2, presionando la tecla [F6].
F1-TIME F 4-DAY SEN
F2-SILENC F5-ZONE
F3-POWER F6-MENU 3
5.- Ingresar a la opción de Tiempo, presionando la tecla [F1].
1 de 2
LAS BAMBAS
TIME: 01:19:50PM
DATE: 01/20/2007
DAY: SUNDAY
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS: NO
01:19:50PM Seleccione la hora que desea cambiar (Hora: Minutos: Segundos).

01/20/2007 Seleccionar la fecha que desea cambiar (Mes / Día / Año).
SUNDAY Seleccionar el día indicada.
Usar las teclas [+] o [ -] para cambiar el numero digito a digito o una opción.
6.- Para regresar al menú principal presione la tecla [ESCAPE].
FUNTION SWITCHES
F3-DAIG F 6-IR COMM
2 de 2
LAS BAMBAS
ANEXO 4
OBJETIVO
Describir la configuración de la contraseña (PASSWORD) que es requerido para ingreso a los

niveles de seguridad para la operación del panel de control Cheetah Xi.:
OPERACIÓN
1.- Ingresar al menú principal del sistema de configuración presionando la tecla [ESCAPE] y
después [ENTER].
FUNTION SWITCHES
F3-DAIG F 6-IR COMM
F1-DEVICE F4-LEARN
F2-NAC F5-PASSWRD
F3-SLC F6-MENU 2
3.- Ingresar a la opción de Contraseña (PASSWORD), presionando la tecla [F5].
ENTER PASSWORD
0000
ACCESS: DENIED
CODE: 2435
0000 Seleccionar el número de la contraseña (PASSWORD) de 4 cifras.

Usar las teclas [ +] o [ -] para cambiar el número de selección, digito por digito.
1 de 2
LAS BAMBAS
4.- Si su código es correcto, el sistema admitirá el acceso al sistema de configuración

mostrando lo siguiente:
ENTER PASSWORD
XXXX
ACCESS: LEVEL 2 H
CODE: 2965
5.- Para regresar al menú principal presione la tecla [ ESCAPE].
FUNTION SWITCHES
F3-DAIG F 6-IR COMM
2 de 2
LAS BAMBAS
ANEXO 5
OBJETIVO
Describir la operación de los eventos del sistema (eventos de alarma, eventos de supervisión y
todos los eventos) que están ocurriendo y los almacenados en la memoria del sistema. Estos
eventos se explican en las siguientes instrucciones línea:
OPERACIÓN
1.- Para i n g r e s a r a ver los Eventos de Alarma que está en ocurrencia, presionar la
tecla
[STEP ALARM]:
ALARM TYPE #1
CUSTOM MENSAGE L-ADR
HH:MM: SSA
MM/DD/YYYY ALARM
0001 OF 0002
Línea 1: Muestra el tipo de evento de Alarma o Flujo de agua (Alarm / Waterflow).

Línea 2: Muestra el lugar o área donde se origina el evento
Línea 3: Muestra la hora y fecha de inicio de ocurrencia del evento
Línea 4: Muestra el número de evento / del total de eventos (0001 / 0002).
Usar la tecla [STEP ALARM] para avanzar a los siguientes eventos, ó
Usar las teclas [ +] o [ -] para avanzar a los siguientes eventos o regresar a los
eventos anteriores.
2 - Para ingresar a ver los Eventos de Supervisión que está en ocurrencia, presionar la tecla
[STEP SUPER]:
SUPERVISOY INPUT
HH:MM: SSA
MM/DD/YYYY SUPVR
1 de 3
LAS BAMBAS
Línea 1: Muestra el tipo de evento de Supervisión.

Usar la tecla [STEP SUPER] para avanzar a los siguientes eventos, ó
eventos anteriores.
3.- Para ingresar a ver todos los Eventos, presionar la tecla [STEP ALL]:
ALARM TYPE #1
HH:MM:SSA MM/DD/YYYY
EVENT 0002 OF 0006
Línea 1: Muestra el tipo de evento.

Línea 4: Muestra el número de evento / del total de eventos (0002 / 0006) que se
encuentra en la memoria después del último restablecimiento del panel.
Usar la tecla [STEP ALL] para avanzar a los siguientes eventos, ó
eventos anteriores.
Para acceder a todos los eventos del sistema, presionar la tecla [ F5]:
ALARM TYPE #1
RECORD 2628 OF 3200
2 de 3
LAS BAMBAS
Línea 1: Muestra el tipo de evento.

Línea 4: Muestra el número de evento / del total de eventos (2628 / 3200). 2628 es el
total de eventos almacenados en la memoria siendo su capacidad máxima de
3200 eventos.
Usar la tecla [STEP ALL] para avanzar a los siguientes eventos, ó
Usar las teclas [ +] o [ - ] para avanzar a los siguientes eventos o regresar a los
eventos anteriores.
4.- En todos los casos de ingresar a ver los eventos, se puede tener una mayor descripción de
la dirección del dispositivo activado, presionando la tecla [ F1]:

ALARM 0001 OF 0006
Línea 1: Muestra el del panel, el número del laso y la dirección del dispositivo.
3 de 3
SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y EXTINCION DE INCENDIO MANUAL DE OPERACION
LAS BAMBAS
ANEXO 6
OBJETIVO
El presente documento describe la operación del de flama digital.
1 – OPERACIÓN “STAND-ALONE”:
 El detector opera en el modo “Stand-Alone” después de ser conectado al panel
contra incendios.
 El detector utiliza relé FIRE, y una interface de 4 a 20mA.
2 – OPERACIÓN DEL DETECTOR:

 Los Led’s, indicadores de estado de operación, parpadearán.
 Si el sensor detecta fuego:
 Se energiza el relé FIRE.
 Un Led permanecerá encendido.
 Se enciende un Led.
 Al corregirlo el sensor retornará a su operación normal.
3 – CAMPO DE VISTA Y RANGO DE DETECCIÓN:
FUEL SIZE DISTANCIA FEET(M) TIEMPO DE RESPUESTA

n-Heptane 1 ft x 1 ft 100 (30) 5.0
Methanol 1 ft x 1 ft 85 (26) 4.9
JP5 2 ft x 2 ft 100 (30) 5.0
6 – MANTENIMIENTO Y SOPORTE:
 Falla por Entrada de Voltaje Alto: Se produce si la entrada de voltaje es demasiado alta,
por encima de 45V. Los 2 led´s parpadearán continuamente. Posible cambio de pieza.
 Falla por Entrada de Voltaje Bajo: El detector falla si la entrada de voltaje está por
debajo de 18V. Se debe verificar el voltaje entre los pines.
 Falla del Detector: Se produce si el sensor óptico tiene falla. Un led indicará la falla hasta
que se corrija. Se debe limpiar ambos lados de la rejilla montada; si no retorna a la operación
de trabajo normal se debe cambiar la pieza.
SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y EXTINCION DE INCENDIO HOJAS TECNICAS
GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01 FRN-030085-HTE-001
LAS BAMBAS
HOJAS TECNICAS
FRN-030085-HTE-001
0 20/12/2019 EMITIDO PARA CONSTRUCCION F.B.S. E.R.V. M.A.R.

A 10/12/2019 EMITIDO PARA REVISION INTERNA F.B.S. E.R.V. M.A.R.
HOJAS TECNICAS Page 1 of 42
FRN-030085-HTE-001 REV 0
SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y EXTINCION DE INCENDIO HOJAS TECNICAS
GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01 FRN-19020270-HTE-001
LAS BAMBAS
ANEXOS
TABLA DE CONTENIDO
CODIGO DESCRIPCION
ITEM
FRN-030085-HTE-002 PANEL DE CONTROL DE INCENDIOS CHEETAH XI
1
FRN-030085-HTE-003
DETECTOR TERMICO
2 FRN-030085-HTE-004
FRN-030085-HTE-005 ESTACION MANUAL DE DESCARGA INTELIGENTE

3
FRN-030085-HTE-006 ALARMA SONORA – LUZ ESTROBOSCOPICA
4
FRN-030085-HTE-007 MODULO RELEASING DE DESCARGA
5
FRN-030085-HTE-008 MINI MODULO DE MONITOREO
6
FRN-030085-HTE-009 SWITCH DE MANTENIMIENTO FIKE
7
FRN-030085-HTE-010 SWITCH DE PRESION CO2
8
FRN-030085-HTE-011 SWITCH DE ABORTO
9
FRN-030085-HTE-012 VALVULA DE MANTENIMIENTO CO2
10
FRN-030085-HTE-013 ODORIZADOR CO2
12
FRN-030085-HTE-014 VALVULA DEL CELINDRO CO2
12
FRN-030085-HTE-015 VALVULA SELENOIDE CO2
13
FRN-030085-HTE-016 MODULO DE CONTROL SUPERVISADO
14
FRN-030085-HTE-017 MODULO RELE
15
FRN-030085-HTE-018 SWITCH DE DESCARGA FM-200
16
FRN-030085-HTE-019 VALVULA ACTUADOR IVO FM-200
17
FRN-030085-HTE-020 CONTENENDOR DE CO2
18
FRN-030085-HTE-021 MANGUERA CON VALVULA CHECK DESCARGA CO2
19
FRN-030085-HTE-022 DETECTOR DE FLAMA
20
DATA SHEET
CHEETAH® XI 50 INTELLIGENT SUPPRESSION CONTROL SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
Fike’s Cheetah Xi 50 (P/N 10-071) is a state-of-the-art true intelligent digital peer-to-peer modular
suppression control system. It is ideal for all life safety and property protection applications, and is intended
for both commercial and industrial use. It is designed with extensive programmability that allows the
almost-instantaneous relay of information and the ability to perform process management tasks with ease
including HVAC shutdowns, Emergency Voice Evacuation Systems, damper control, door closure, elevator
recall, security, and CCTV/Building Management Awareness.
This cost-effective panel comes standard with one Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) that support 50 devices, with
any mix and match of sensors and modules. The Cheetah Xi 50 utilizes extreme intelligence via its Eclipse®
based sensors including photoelectric, photoelectric with heat, ionization, photoelectric duct, and heat
detectors. It also utilizes Eclipse based modules such as the monitor, mini-monitor, relay, intelligent pull
station, releasing and control modules. With Cheetah Xi 50, every device communicates as a peer on the
signaling line circuit. These peers not only communicate up-to-the-second information to the control panel,
but also communicate with each other. Each device is capable of generating accurate and highly detailed
information. Conventional suppression alarm systems give a general idea of the fire’s location, while the
Cheetah Xi 50’s intelligent sensors indicate precisely which device is in an alarm state. This intelligence
provides incredible speed with response times as little as one-quarter second between manual pull station
and notification appliance. It’s flexibility allows you to attach the intelligent devices that are required for Fike Cheetah Xi 50
your specific application.
The System is programmed with either the Windows based field configuration software C-LINX™ or through
a comprehensive password protected front-panel keypad programming option. This option allows you to APPROVALS:
quickly update and adapt to any future requirements or changes in the system such as changes in occupancy
or remodeling. The sophisticated control panel circuitry coupled with the software allows you to read • UL Listed - S2203
specific information and sensitivity levels of the different eclipse devices. The sensors also compensate for • FM Approved - 3029134
any changes due to age, contamination, or other environmental factors. • CSFM - 7165-0900:149
• City of New York -
307-05-E Vol. 2
SYSTEM OPERATION • City of Denver
The Cheetah Xi 50 Control system operates on a “Zone and State” relationship. In this design, all input and • State of CA Seismic -
output devices must be assigned to at least one zone (253 are available), each one defining an area to be OSP-007
protected. Input devices can be assigned up to 253 zones (one zone is typical) and output devices may be
configured for up to 254 zones.
These devices use the SLC signaling line circuit to exchange status information with other devices as well
as with the control panel. When an input is activated, it is configured to cause its associated zone to enter
into an operational state. Any detection device will cause the associated zone to enter into an alarm state.
The output devices are configured to activate to protect and evaluate the endangered zone. This system is
completely modular, allowing you the flexibility to design a system that is just right for your application. A
typical configuration is shown on page 2 that illustrates the communications of a Cheetah Xi 50 system.
Form No. D.1.20.01-2
704 SW 10th Street  P.O. Box 610  Blue Springs, Missouri 64013-0610 U.S.A.
Phone: 8162293405  www.fike.com
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
STANDARD FEATURES
The Cheetah Xi 50 features are designed to save lives and protect your valuable capital investments through unprecedented speed,
intelligence and flexibility. These features include:
• All Cheetah Xi 50 panels come standard with a controller, transformer and enclosure (see ordering information for details)
• 254 user defined zones
• 80 character, backlit LCD display
• Real time clock
• 3200 event history buffer
• Critical process monitoring
• One-person Walktest capability
• Disable by zone, device or circuit
• Drill function at panel and remote
• Provides solenoid releasing operation
• Alarm verification capability
• Easy to add/remove devices
• Diagnostic menus
• Local piezo with distinct event tones
• 10 Status LEDs to easily identify system status
• Optional point ID DACT Module available
• Supports up to 31 peripheral devices such as Remote Display, LED Graphic and Zone Annunciators, Ethernet Module and Multi-
Interface Module
USB Port for programming
2 of 6
CHEETAH XI 50 CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS
The Controller contains the power supply, microprocessor, hardware interface, display and keypad.
Enclosure
• Steel Enclosure 22.1” H x 14.35” W x 3.25” D (Back-box dimensions)
• Flush or surface mounting
• Removable door for ease of installation
• Available in red or grey
• Dead Front option available to isolate panel’s internal electronics and wiring
Power
• 5.25 amps useable alarm power, (2 A standby)
• Operation from 120VAC/60 Hz or 240 VAC 50/60 Hz transformer
• Two 24V DC, 1.75A continuous auxiliary power outputs
• Supports up to 75AH of batteries
• Controller consumes 0.116A @ 24VDC in normal standby mode and 0.176A @ 24 VDC in alarm
Signaling Line Circuit
• Address devices with Infrared (IR) tool, similar to remote control device
• One SLC loop, NFPA style 4, 6 or 7
• 50 devices on loop
• True peer-to-peer digital protocol for extremely fast and reliable communications
• Auto-learn function
• Automatic day/night sensitivity adjustment
• Automatic holiday sensitivity adjustment
• Acclimate operation for sensors
• IR Tool provides ability to read sensitivity levels or perform remote test of device
• Devices contain multi-color LED for quick reference of device status
• Sensors provide early warning pre-alarm detection and can also provide a summing feature. (up to eight sensors)
• Maximum Resistance: 70 ohms
• Maximum Capacitance: .60 µf
• 12,000 ft. maximum distance total from panel to last device
NAC Circuit
• Two NAC circuits standard
• Rated at 24VDC, 1.75 Amps maximum Class A or B
• Built-in synch protocol for both System Sensor® and Gentex® devices
Operating Environment
• 32 - 120°F (0 - 49°C)
• 93% relative humidity, non-condensing
OPTIONAL MODULES AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES

Point ID Dact (Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter) Module (P/N 10-2528)*
The DACT provides interface with Central Station monitoring systems. It is available with 5 contact zones of connection OR the intelligent
serial interface which provides point ID information. The Contact ID form is the preferred reporting format. It provides a four digit account
code followed by a three digit event code, a two-digit group number, and a three digit contact number, all of which are used to provide
specific point identification. This DACT can also provide an SIA or 4/2 Pulse reporting format. Note: 10-2476 is the same as 10-2528 with
enclosure for external mounting.
14 Button Remote Display Unit ( P/N 10-2646)*

The Fike fourteen button remote display (FRD), provides remote annunciation of Fike’s intelligent control panels. The FRD is provided
with a 80 character, backlit display which performs two display functions. First, it duplicates information provided by the control panel.
Additionally the FRD has the capability of viewing system conditions such as alarm, trouble, supervisory, etc. The FRD also includes
six buttons (Enter, Escape, +/-, left/right arrow) that are used for navigation through events as well as configuration of the device.
Additionally it has eight programmable buttons that can be configured for things such as reset, silence, acknowledge, drill, or process.
A key lock is included for additional security access. Dimensions: 9-1/2” L x 4” H x 2-1/4” D. Weight: 0.5 lbs.
10 Button Remote Display Unit (P/N 10-2631)*

The Fike ten button remote display (FRD), provides remote annunciation of Fike’s intelligent control panels. The FRD is provided with
a 80 character, backlit display which performs two display functions. First, it duplicates information provide d by the control panel.
Additionally the FRD has the capability of viewing system conditions such as alarm, trouble, supervisory, etc. The FRD also includes
six buttons (Enter, Escape, +/-, left/right arrow) that are used for navigation through events as well as configuration of the device.
Additionally it has four dedicated buttons that perform the following functions: drill, silence, acknowledge, and reset. A key lock is
included for additional security access. Dimensions: 7-3/4” L x 4” H x 2-1/4 D. Weight: 0.5 lbs.
2 Button Remote Display Unit (P/N 10-2630)*

The Fike two button remote display (FRD), provides remote annunciation of Fike’s intelligent control panels. The FRD is provided with an
80 character, backlit display which performs two display functions. First, it duplicates information provided on the main control panel.
Additionally, the FRD has the capability of viewing system conditions such as alarm, trouble, supervisory, etc. Dimensions: 5-3/4” L x 4”
H x 1-1/2” D. Weight: 0.5 lbs.
Fike Zone Annunciator (P/N 10-2667)*

The Fike twenty zone remote annunciator is used with Fike’s intelligent control systems to provide remote annunciation for up to twenty
zones at a location remote from the control panel. The module provides a tabular display that incorporates 20 red alarm and 20 yellow
trouble/supervisory LEDs. Each LED is programmable and can provide visual indication of alarm, trouble/supervisory conditions for zones
or individual points. Communication between the intelligent control panels and remote annunciator is via the RS485 peripheral bus. When
an event from the control panel is received the appropriate LED will illuminate based on the annunciator’s configuration. Dimensions: 4”
W x 5-3/4” H x 2 1/2”D .
* See ordering information for individual data sheet that gives additional specifications 3 of 6
Fike Ethernet Module (P/N 10-2627)*
This Module provides the ability to remote monitoring of multiple Cheetah Xi 50 panels via Ethernet/IP. This module is connected to the
Cheetah Xi 50 via the peripheral connections at P6 and will be configured as a peripheral device. In order to utilize the remote monitoring
capability, a network ID must be assigned to each panel for identification purposes. This module connects to the Panel at P6 per ± and
also requires 24 volts DC from the panel to P6 24A ±. See the 06-388 Ethernet Module manual for more details. Dimensions: 8” H x 6” W x
3-1/2” D. Note: 10-074 is the same module with enclosure.
Fike Multi-Interface (P/N 10-2583)*

The primary function of the multi-interface module is that it is used as a printer interface for the Cheetah Xi 50 control panels. It provides
specific event and point information to be communicated from the panel to the printer. It is compatible with either a Epson FX-890 or
equivalent IEEE 1284 standard printer or for UL required applications, the Keltron 90 series UL listed fire alarm printer. It is also approved
for the Precise Vision computer connection or as a Gateway to existing Cheetah Classic Network. Dimensions: 8” H x 6” W x 3-1/2” D.
Note: 10-069 is the same module with enclosure.
PROGRAMMING CONFIGURATION
Software
All configuration variables can be assigned using C-LINX software. This software provides the designer the capability to provide a pre-
engineered design. The user can review the construction plans to assign the zones. The configuration can also be set to identify the exact
device circuit operation desired along with the custom message information.
IR Configuration Tool (P/N 55-051)*

This optional hand-held infrared IR remote control is available on the Cheetah Xi 50 system. This small device can be used in the field to
simplify installation, testing and service. It operates with 2 AA batteries and can read device information such as loop, address, branch,
service dates and initiate device test. This tool:
• Communicates bi-directionally with any Cheetah Xi 50 device
• Easily addresses devices by setting the loop and address
• Quickly reads sensitivity levels, date serviced, device type, loop and address, manufacture date
• Immediately records the date serviced
• Instantly initiates walk test of any sensor or module
• Accesses and tests hard-to-reach sensor or module (such as duct detector) through any other device on loop
FIELD WIRING DIAGRAM
* See ordering information for individual data sheet that gives additional specifications 4 of 6
ORDERING INFORMATION
Individual
Fike P/N Description
Datasheet #
10-071-c-p Cheetah Xi 50 System, includes Controller, Enclosure, and Transformer
or c: (R=Red, G=Grey) p: (1=120V, 2= 240V ) D.1.20.01
10-071-c-p-d d=Deadfront
Cheetah Xi 50 System Controller
10-2622 D.1.20.01
(included with 10-071-c-p and –L)
10-2628-c Dead Front Option c: (R=Red, G=Grey)
Peripheral Devices
10-2630 2 Button Expanded Protocol Remote Display P.1.103.01
10-2667 Zone Annunciator P.1.118.01
10-2627 Ethernet Module D.1.22.01
10-2583 Multi-Interface Module P.1.85.01
10-2528 Point ID DACT (Internal Mounting) D.1.18.01
Intelligent Sensors
63-1052 Photoelectric Smoke Sensor Non-Isolator Version P.1.88.01
63-1058 Photoelectric Smoke Sensor Isolator Version P.1.88.01
63-1053 Photo/Heat Combination Sensor Non-Isolator Version P.1.89.01
63-1059 Photo/Heat Combination Sensor Isolator Version P.1.89.01
60-1039 Thermal Sensor Non-Isolator Version P.1.90.01
60-1040 Thermal Sensor Isolator Version P.1.90.01
67-033 Ion Sensor Non-Isolator Version P.1.91.01
67-034 Ion Sensor Isolator Version P.1.91.01
63-1057 Duct Sensor Non-Isolator Version P.106.01
63-1062 Duct Sensor Isolator Version P.106.01
63-1056 Duct Housing P.106.01
Intelligent Sensor Bases
63-1054 6” Sensor Base Non-Isolator Version P.1.98.01
63-1060 6” Sensor Base Isolator Version P.1.98.01
63-1055 4” Sensor Base Non-Isolator Version P.1.99.01
63-1061 4” Sensor Base Isolator Version P.1.99.01
63-1064 Sounder Base P.101.01
63-1063 Relay Base P.101.01
5 of 6
Intelligent Modules
55-045 Mini-Monitor Module Non-Isolator Version P.1.93.01
55-050 Mini-Monitor Module Isolator Version P.1.93.01
55-041 4” Monitor Module Non-Isolator Version P.1.92.01
55-046 4” Monitor Module Isolator Version P.1.92.01
20-1063 Intelligent Pull Station Non-Isolator Version (Fire) P.1.65.01
20-1064 Intelligent Pull Station Isolator Version (Fire) P.1.65.01
20-1343 Intelligent Pull Station Non-Isolator Version (Agent) P.1.104.01
55-042 Supervised Control Module Non-Isolator Version P.1.94.01
55-047 Supervised Control Module Isolator Version P.1.94.01
10-2360 Series Solenoid Diode/Resistor (Needed for solenoids)
10-2413 Masterbox Interface
55-043 Relay Module Non-Isolator Version P.1.95.01
55-048 Relay Module Isolator Version P.1.95.01
55-052 Releasing Control Module Non-Isolator Version P.1.96.01
55-053 Releasing Control Module Isolator Version P.1.96.01
10-1832 ARM III Agent Release Module C.1.04.01
10-2748 Impulse Release Module (IR) IV.1.15.01
Programming Parts
55-051 Infrared (IR) Remote Control Tool P.1.97.01
06-327 C-LINX Software
10-2629 Interface cable, USB/A Male to USB/B Male
10-2477 DACT Programmer
Copyright © Fike Corporation All Rights Reserved. 6 of 6

Form No. D.1.20.01-2, June 2011. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
12.01.7 7/11/2000 8:01 AM Page 1 CP HIRES_3:Dont Archive:•12.01.7:
12.01.7
DETECT-A-FIRE®
Detection and Release Devices
FEATURES
• Repeatable - resets itself, nothing to replace,
testable
• Rugged - withstands shock and vibration
• Versatile - offers various temperature settings
• Durable - long lasting stainless steel shell
• Economical - wide spacing, reduces
installation cost
• Factory set and the internal contact area is
hermetically sealed in stainless steel
APPLlCATlONS
• Protection of schools, factories, offices,
libraries, etc.
• Paint spray booths
• Range hoods
DESCRIPTION
DETECT-A-FIRE units are the "heart" of many Fire
Protection Systems. These highly reliable devices have
been a standard of the industry for over 45 years. Many
thousands of these units are now in use controlling the
release of extinguishants such as clean agents, C02,
water, or dry chemicals. In some systems the device is The secret of the unit's sensitivity is in the design
used as an ALARM device, to sense overheat or fire, (Figure 1). The outer shell is made of a rapidly expanding
and alert personnel. In other systems, it is used as a alloy which closely follows changes in surrounding air
RELEASE device, to sense fire and actuate fire attack temperature. The inner struts are made of a lower
systems. expanding alloy. Designed to resist thermal energy
DETECT-A-FIRE units have met with wide acceptance absorption and sealed inside the shell, the struts follow
because they are designed with RATE COMPENSATION. temperature changes more slowly.
This provides a unique advantage over both fixed tem- A slow rate fire (Figure 2) will heat the shell and struts
perature and rate-of-rise types of detectors because together. At the "set point," the unit will trigger, actuating
only the DETECT-A-FIRE unit accurately senses the the alarm or releasing the extinguishant.
surrounding air temperature regardless of the fire A transient rush of warm air up to 40F˚/min. may
growth rate. At precisely the predetermined danger expand the shell, but not enough to trigger the unit. By
point, the system is activated. ignoring transient warm air excursions, the DETECT-A-FIRE
Fixed temperature detectors must be completely unit virtually eliminates false alarms prevalent with
heated to alarm temperature and therefore a disastrous rate-of-rise devices.
lag in time may occur with a fast rate fire. Rate-of-rise If a fast rate fire (Figure 3) starts, the shell will expand
devices, on the other hand, are triggered by the rate of rapidly. The struts will close, actuating the alarm or
increase in ambient temperature and are subject to releasing the agent. The faster the fire rate of growth,
false alarms caused by harmless, transient thermal the sooner the DETECT-A-FIRE unit will react.
gradients such as the rush of warm air from process
ovens.
FIGURE 1 READY FIGURE 2 SLOW FIRE FIGURE 3 FAST FIRE
Click to view/purchase products online at Gaumer

www.gaumer.com 800.460.5200 713.460.5200
SPECIFICATIONS
HORIZONTAL DETECT-A-FIRE-UNITS HORIZONTAL DETECT-A-FIRE-UNITS
Horizontal detectors are designed for locations where
Flush Mounting Unit Surface Mounting Unit
appearance is a factor. The attractive, functional design lends for Concealed Wiring for Exposed Wiring
physical protection of the unit while making it suitable for
commercial, industrial, mercantile and public buildings,
institutions and ships in non-hazardous locations (those
classified as "ordinary" under the National Electric Code).
Flush mounted units are designed to fit standard 4" octagonal
electrical boxes and surface mounting units are designed to
mount directly on ceilings or on 4" electrical junction boxes.
Canadian Electrical Codes requires mounting only to an
electrical junction box.
VERTICAL DETECT-A-FIRE-UNITS
Vertical detectors are designed for use in both "ordinary" or
"hazardous" locations. For "ordinary" use, they may be
mounted to any approved junction box with 7/8" diameter
opening by using 1/2-14 NPT mounting nuts. The device may
be wired in or out of conduit, depending on local 12-X27020-000 12-X27020-001
preference and codes. Four leadwires are provided on 12-X27021-000 12-X27021-001
normally open vertical units (that close on temperature rise),
per UL requirement, to facilitate supervision of system wiring.
Instruments are Underwriters Laboratory and Underwriters
Laboratory of Canada listed and Factory Mutual approved for
hazardous locations, when mounted in a suitable fitting.
MOUNTING
DETECT-A-FIRE units are not position sensitive. Horizontal
and vertical detectors refer to the most common mounting
configuration for that unit. However, each type can be mount-
ed either horizontally or vertically depending on the applica-
tion and installation requirements.
CONSTRUCTION
Fitting Required for
Hazardous Detector Stainless steel shell sensing element. Cold rolled steel
UL & UCL Listings
Locations Type and FM Approval mounting facility. Off-White finish.
Class I, Groups 12-X27120-022
A, B, C and D; 12-X27121-020 Mount detector to a TEMPERATURE RATING
Class II, Groups 12-X28020-003 suitably listed fitting (Suggested setting a minimum of 100F˚ above ambient)
E, F and G; 12-X28021-005 in accordance with
National Electric
Class I, Groups SPACINGS (in feet)
12-X27120-000 Code and/or local See NOTE A
B, C and D; ˚F ˚F
12-X27121-000 authority having
Class II, Groups Setting Tolerance Color
12-X28021-000 jurisdiction. UL FM ULC
E, F and G Coding
NOTE: Only units with stainless steel shell and head are approved for Class I, Group A 140 +7/-8 50 50 25 Black
locations.
160 +7/-8 25 25 25 Black
NOTE A: Spacings shown are distances between units on smooth ceilings, the distances from 190 +7/-8 50 50 25 White
partitions or walls would be half that shown. Authority having LOCAL jurisdiction should be
consulted before installation. 225 +7/-8 25 50 25 White
275 ±10 25 50 25 Blue
NOTE B: Temperature preset at factory only. Special settings available upon request. Consult
factory or Fenwal Representative for additional information. 325 ±10 50 50 25 Red
NOTE C: In applications where corrosion is suspect, care should be taken to protect the
360 ±10 25 50 25 Red
DETECT-A-FIRE unit to realize optimum performance and maximum life. Consult factory for sug- 450 ±15 25 50 25 Green
gestions.
600 ±20 N/A 50 25 Orange
NOTE D: Up to 375˚F-#18 AWG Teflon insulated wire used on units. 725 ±25 N/A 50 25 Orange
Above 375˚F-#16 AWG TGGT insulated wire used on units.
Specifications subject to change without notice.
UL of Canada labeling available upon request.
Although incandescent lamps are considered resistive, their inrush current is 10-15 times their
steady current. Do not exceed ratings.

www.gaumer.com 800.460.5200 713.460.5200
VERTICAL DETECT-A-FIRE-UNITS VERTICAL DETECT-A-FIRE-UNITS

For Concealed and Exposed Wiring For Concealed and Exposed Wiring
(Hexagonal Head) (Coupling Head)
12-X27120-000 12-X27121-000 12-X28020-003 12-X28021-000

12-X27120-022 12-X27121-020 12-X28021-005
5.0 Amps 125 VAC

0.5 Amps 125 VDC
12-X27121-000
12-X27121-020
CONSTRUCTION CONSTRUCTION
-000 units have a stainless steel sensing shell and a -000 units have a stainless steel sensing shell and a
brass mounting head. -002 and -020 units are all brass mounting head. -003 and -005 units are all
Type 300 stainless steel. Type 300 stainless steel.
X STOCKED MODELS AND TEMPERATURE SETTINGS

Indicates a stock unit (Suggested setting a minimum of 100F˚ above ambient)
Temperature Setting (˚ F)
Model 140 160 190 225 275 325 360 450 600 725
12-X27020-000 X X
12-X27020-001 X
12-X27021-000 X X
12-X27021-001 X X
12-X27120-000 X X X X
12-X27121-000 X X X X X X X X X X
12-X28021-005 X X

www.gaumer.com 800.460.5200 713.460.5200
Figure 4. Dust Cover Application This chart shows three categories of fire detection devices
This is a typical application of DETECT-A-FIRE units and their relative response levels for reaction to three
used as a release device to actuate a complete fire different rate-of-rise conditions. Statistics indicate that 97%
suppression system. In this application DETECT-A-FIRE of all fires fall within these categories.
units are mounted in a Dust Collector to sense an overheat
condition and release a clean agent extinguishant. RATE OF RISE
Under Between Ov er
Type of Device
10F˚ /min. 10-40F˚ /min. 40F˚ /min.
Fenwal Rate
SECOND
Compensated
FIRST FIRST but at selected
DETECT-A-FIRE
protection level
Unit
Fixed
SECOND SECOND THIRD
Temperature
Rate-of-Rise Will not operate FIRST
Will not operate
unless fixed but may be a false
unless fixed
temperature alarm
temperature
supplement at
supplement at
165˚ F is
165˚ F is provided,
provided, then
then it is THIRD in
it is THIRD in
sequence
sequence
MODIFICATIONS
12-99202X-XXX, Extended lead wires, Series 12-X271XX
and Series 12-X28XXX only.
12-992012-XXX, Fluorocarbon coating, Available on
Figure 5. Typical ceiling installation of a horizontal 27120-022, 27121-020, 28020-003, 28021-005 models only
DETECT-A-FIRE model. Here it is used in combination with (500˚F max.).
a sprinkler system to detect overheat and actuate an alarm.
AGENCY LISTINGS
Fenwal DETECT-A-FIRE units are UL and ULC listed
and FM approved as fire detection thermostats (close on
temperature rise) and as releasing devices (open on
temperature rise).
AGENCY FILE NUMBER LOCATION

UL S492 Ordinary
UL E19310 Hazardous
ULC CS341-E Ordinary and Hazardous
FM J.I. OV3HO.AE Hazardous
FM 17302 Ordinary
UL S2410 Ordinary (600 & 725˚F)
UL E89599 Hazardous (600 & 725˚F)
HOW TO ORDER
1. Select the DETECT-A-FIRE model from specifications
on pages 2 and 3.
12-X27121-000-225
2. Refer to temperature rating chart on page 2, select
temperature setting required and add this number to Type Temperature Setting
base catalog number.
Example: Vertical DETECT-A-FIRE set to close at 225˚F.
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. The literature is provided for informational purposes only. KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
400 MAIN STREET, ASHLAND, MA 01721 assumes no responsibility for the products suitability for a particular application.
TEL: (508) 881-2000 FAX: (508) 881-6729 The product must be properly applied to perform as described herein.
www.fenwalcontrols.com If you need more information on this product, or if you have a question, contact
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC., Ashland, MA 01721 (508) 881-2000.
12.01.7 2/00 ©2000 Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. Click to
CP view/purchase products online at Gaumer
Printed in U.S.A.
www.gaumer.com 800.460.5200 713.460.5200

DATA SHEET
EXPLOSION PROOF THERMAL DETECTORS
THERMOTECH®
DESCRIPTION
The Thermotech thermal detectors are normally open devices designed especially
for fire detection and alarm systems. The detectors are a rate anticipation type that
operate immediately whenever the ambient area temperature reaches the preset
temperature setting of the detector, regardless of how fast or slow the temperature
rises. When the temperature drops back down below the set-point, the detector will
reset itself.
Under rapid heat increase situations, the rate anticipation feature allows the detector
to respond one to three degrees ahead of the set-point. However, the detector does
not respond to momentary fluctuations of temperatures below that of the alarm
setting, thus eliminating false alarms.
APPLICATION
The Thermotech explosion-proof thermal detectors are used to detect the
presence of heat beyond the detector’s temperature set-point for the purpose of
activating a fire alarm and/or automatic suppression system. The detectors are
explosion rated for Class I and Class II hazardous environments. The maximum
area coverage for each detector is rated at 40 ft. x 40 ft. in accordance with the APPROVALS:
manufacturer’s specified limitations.
• UL Listed
• FM Approved
• CSFM
SPECIFICATIONS • City of New York
Part Numbers: 60-008 135°F Ex-Proof Thermal

60-009 194°F Ex-Proof Thermal
Electric Rating: 6-125 VAC 5 amps
6-25 VDC 1 amp
125 VDC 0.5 amp
Area Coverage: 40 ft. x 40 ft. max.
www.Fike.com Form No. E.1.15.01-2, December, 2016

1 of 2
This document is only intended to be a guideline and is not applicable to
all situations. Information subject to full disclaimer at
http://www.fike.com/disclaimer
DETECT-A-FIRE®
DESCRIPTION
The Detect-A-Fire thermal detectors are normally open devices designed especially
for fire detection and alarm systems. The detectors come in a range of temperature
settings from 190°F to 450°F. Each is color coded to visually indicate its temperature
setting. (Refer to the table below)
The detectors are rate compensation type that operate immediately whenever the
ambient area temperature reaches the preset temperature setting of the detector,
regardless of how fast or slow the temperature rises. When the temperature drops
back down below the set-point, the detector will reset itself. However, the detector
does not respond to momentary fluctuations of temperatures below that of the
alarm setting, thus eliminating false alarms.
APPLICATION
The Detect-A-Fire explosion-proof thermal detectors are used to detect the presence
of heat beyond the detector’s set-point for the purpose of activating a fire alarm
and/or automatic suppression system. The detectors are explosion rated for Class I,
Groups B, C and D and Class II, Groups E, F and G hazardous environments. The
maximum spacing for each detector is shown in the table below.
APPROVALS:
SPECIFICATION • UL Listed
• FM Approved
Part Numbers: 60-021 190°F Ex-Proof Thermal • ULC Listed
C60-007 450°F Ex-Proof Thermal
Electric Rating: 125 VAC 5 amps
125 VDC 0.5 amp
°F Setting and Color Spacing (feet)

Tolerance Coating UL FM ULC
190 + 7/-8 White 50 50 25
225 + 7/-8 White 25 50 25
275 ±10 Blue 25 50 25
325 ±10 Red 50 50 25
450 ±15 Green 25 50 25

2 of 2
DATA SHEET
INTELLIGENT AGENT RELEASE PULL STATION
DESCRIPTION
The Intelligent Agent Release Pull Station, P/N 20-1343, is a state-of-the-art, dual-action (i.e., requires two
motions to activate the station) pull station that includes an addressable interface (mounted inside) for
Fike’s intelligent Cheetah Xi fire alarm control panels. This device provides a manual means of discharging an
automatic fire extinguishing system. Because the 20-1343 is addressable, the control panel can display the
exact location of the activated manual pull station. This leads fire service personnel quickly to the location of
the alarm.
FEATURES
• Aesthetically pleasing, highly visible, dual-action design.
• Meets ADA 5 lb. maximum pull force.
• Easily operated (dual-action).
• Attractive shape and textured finish.
• When the handle latches in down position, the word “ACTIVATED” appears at the top of the handle in
bright yellow to clearly indicate the station has been operated. Intelligent Agent
• Key/lock reset; needs only a 1/4-turn to lock/unlock. Release Pull Station
• Includes Braille text on station handle.
• Captive screw terminals wire-ready for easy connection to SLC loop (accepts up to 12 AWG/3.1 mm²
wire).
• Meets UL 38, Standard for Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. APPROVALS:
• Maintenance personnel can open station (for inspection and testing) without causing an alarm condition.
• Built-in multi color LED, which is visible through the handle of the station, flashes green in normal • UL Listed - S6239
operation and latches on steady red when in alarm. • FM
• City of New York -
490-04-E & 307-05-E
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS • CSFM - 7150-0900:0144
Normal Operating Voltage: 15-30 VDC
Standby Current: 370 µA. max. Average (continuous broadcasts)
Maximum Alarm Current: 2 mA (red LED on)
Temperature Range: 32 - 120°F (0 - 49°C)
Relative Humidity Range: 10% - 93% non-condensing
INSTALLATION
The 20-1343 can be semi-flush mounted onto a single-gang, double-gang, or standard 4.0” (10.16 cm)
square electrical outlet box, or surface mounted.
CONSTRUCTION
Shell, door, and handle are molded of durable LEXAN® (or polycarbonate equivalent) with a textured finish.
Form No. P.1.104.01-3
OPERATION
Pushing in, then pulling down on the handle causes it to latch in the down/activated position. Once latched, the word “ACTIVATED” (in
bright yellow) appears at the top of the handle, while a portion of the handle protrudes from the bottom of the station. To reset the
station, simply unlock the station with the key and pull the door open. This action resets the handle; closing the door automatically resets
the switch.
Manual stations connect with two wires to one of the control panel SLC loops. Each manual station, on command from the control panel,
sends data to the panel representing the state of the pull station switch. IR tool allows address setting (01-254).
PRODUCT LINE INFORMATION

20-1343 Dual-action addressable pull station. Includes key lock/reset feature.
Copyright © Fike Corporation All Rights Reserved. Specifications are subject to change without notice. 2 of 2
Form No. P.1.104.01-3, May 2014. This document shall not be used for installation purposes. Please refer to installation instructions applicable for each product.
SELECTABLE OUTPUT HORNS, STROBES, AND HORN/STROBES
DESCRIPTION
The SpectrAlert Advance series of notification appliances is
designed to simplify installations, with features such as plug in
designs, instant feedback messages to ensure correct installation
of individual devices, and 11 field-selectable candela settings
for wall and ceiling strobes and horn/strobes.
When installing Advance products, first attach a universal

mounting plate to a four-inch square, four-inch octagon or
double-gang junction box. The two-wire mounting plate
attaches to a single-gang junction box.
Next, connect the notification appliance circuit wiring to the

SEMS terminals on the mounting plate.
Finally, attach the horn, strobe or horn/strobe tot he mounting

plate by inserting the product’s tabs in the mounting plate’s
grooves. The device will rotate into position, locking the APPROVALS
product’s pins into the mounting plate’s terminals. The device • UL Listed
will temporarily hold in place with a catch until it is secured • FM
with a captured mounting screw. • MEA
• CSFM
The SpectrAlert Advance series includes outdoor notification
appliances. Outdoor strobes and horn/strobes (two wire and
four wire) are available for wall or ceiling. Outdoor horns are available for wall only. All System Sensor outdoor
products are rated between minus 40 degree Fahrenheit and 151 degrees Fahrenheit in wet or dry applications.
FEATURES
• Electrically compatible with existing SpectrAlert products
• Automatic selection of 12- or 24-volt operation at 15 and 15/75 candela
• Plug-in design
• Field selectable candela settings on wall and ceiling units: 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, 185
• Same mounting plate for wall- and ceiling-mount units
• Shorting spring on mounting plate for continuity check before installation
• Tamper resistant construction
• Outdoor wall and ceiling products rated from -40°F to 151°F
• Design allows minimal intrusion into the back box
• Horn rated at 88+ dbA at 16 volts
• Rotary switch for horn tone and three volume selections
• Outdoor products UL listed to UL 1638 (strobe) and UL 464 (horn) outdoor requirements
• Outdoor products rainproof per UL 50 (NEMA 3R)
• Compatible with MDL sync module
Form No. P.1.102.01
704 S. 10th Street · P.O. Box 610 · Blue Springs, Missouri 64013-0610 U.S.A. · (816) 229-3405 · (816) 229-4615 · www.fike.com
ARCHITECTURAL/ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS
SpectrAlert Advance horns, strobes and horn/strobes shall mount to a standard 4 x 4 x 1 1/2 inch back box, 4-inch
octagon back box or double-gang back box. Two-wire products shall also mount to a single-gang 2 x 4 x 1 7/8 inch
back box. A universal mounting plate shall be used for mounting ceiling and wall products. The notification appliance
circuit wiring shall terminate at the universal mounting plate. Also, SpectrAlert Advance products, when used with the
Sync Circuit™ Module accessory, shall be powered from a non-coded notification appliance circuit output and shall
operate on a nominal 12 or 24 volts. When used with the Sync Circuit module, 12-volt rated notification appliances
circuit outputs shall operate between nine and 17.5 volts; 24-volt rated notification appliance circuit outputs shall
operate between 17 and 33 volts. Indoor SpectrAlert Advance products shall operate between 32 and 120 degrees
Fahrenheit from a regulated DC, or full-wave rectified, unfiltered power supply. Strobes and horn/strobes shall have
field-selectable candela settings, including 15, 15/75, 30, 75, 95, 110, 115, 135, 150, 177, 185.
Strobe
The strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance Model ____ listed to UL 1971 and shall be approved for fire
protective services. The strobe shall be wired as a primary-signaling notification appliance and comply with the
Americans with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz over the strobes entire
operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system.
Horn/Strobe Combination
The horn/strobe shall be a System Sensor SpectrAlert Advance Model ____ listed to UL 1971 and UL 464 and shall
be approved for fire protective service. The horn/strobe shall be wired as a primary-signaling notification appliance
and comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act requirements for visible signaling appliances, flashing at 1 Hz
over the strobe’s entire operating voltage range. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated
lens/reflector system. The horn shall have three audibility options and option to switch between a temporal three-
pattern and a non-temporal (continuous) pattern. These options are set by a multiple position switch. On four-wire
products, the strobe shall be powered independently on the sounder. The horn on horn/strobe models shall operate
on a coded or non-coded power supply.
Outdoor Products
SpectrAlert Advance outdoor horns, strobes and horn/strobes shall be listed for outdoor use by Ul and shall operate
between minus 40 degrees and 151 degrees Fahrenheit. The products shall be listed for use with a System Sensor
outdoor/weatherproof back box with half inch and three-fourths inch conduit entries.
Synchronization Module
The module shall be a System Sensor Sync Circuit model MDL listed to UL 464 and shall be approved for fire
protective service. The module shall synchronize SpectrAlert strobes at 1 Hz and horns at temporal three. Also, while
operating the strobes, the module shall silence the horns on horn/strobe models over a single pair of wires. The
module shall mount to a 4 11/16 x 4 11/16 x 2 1/8-inch back box. The model shall also control two Style Y (class B)
circuits or one Style Z (class A) circuit. The module shall synchronize multiple zones. Daisy chaining two or more
synchronization modules together will synchronize all the zones they control. The module shall not operate on a coded
power supply
SPECIFICATIONS
Standard Operating Temperature 32°F to 120°F (0°C to 49°C)
K Series Operating Temperature -40°F to 151°F (-40°C to 66°C)
Humidity Range 10 to 93% non-condensing (indoor products)
Strobe Flash Rate 1 flash per second
Nominal Voltage Regulated 12DC/FWR or regulated 24DC/FWR1
Operating Voltage Range2 8 to 17.5V (12V nominal) or 16 to 33V (24 nominal)
Input Terminal Wire Gauge 12 to 18 AWG
Ceiling Mount Dimensions (including lens) 6.8” diameter x 2.5” high (173 mm diameter x 64 mm high)
Wall Mount Dimensions (including lens) 5.6”L x 4.7”W x 2.5”D (142 mm L x 119 mm W x 64 mm D)
Horn Dimensions 5.6”L x 4.7”W x 1.3”D (142 mm L x 119 mm W x 33 mm D)
Wall Mount Back Box Skirt Dimensions 5.9”L x 5.0”W x 2.2”D (151 mm L x 128 mm W x 56 mm D)
Ceiling Mount Back Box Skirt Dimensions 7.1” diameter x 2.25” high (180 mm diameter x 57 mm high)
Wall Mount Weatherproof Back Box Dimensions 5.7”L x 5.1”W x 2.0”D (145 mm L x 130 mm W x 51 mm D)
Ceiling Mount Weatherproof Back Box Dimensions 7.1” diameter x 2.0” high (180 mm diameter x 51 mm high)
Notes:
1. Full Wave Rectified (FWR) voltage is a non-regulated, time varying power source that is used on some power supply and panel outputs.
2. P, S, PC, and SC products will operate at 12 V nominal only for 15 and 15/75 cd.
UL CURRENT DRAW DATA
UL Max. Strobe Current Draw (mA RMS) UL Max. Horn Current Draw (mA RMS)
8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts
Candela Sound Pattern dB
DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR
15* 123 128 66 71
Temporal High 57 55 69 75
15/75* 142 148 77 81
30* NA NA 94 96 Temporal Medium 44 49 58 69
Standard
Candela 75* NA NA 158 153 Temporal Low 38 44 44 48
Range 95* NA NA 181 176 Non-temporal High 57 56 69 75
110 NA NA 202 195 Non-temporal Medium 42 50 60 69
115 NA NA 210 205 Non-temporal Low 41 44 50 50
135 NA NA 228 207
High Coded High 57 55 69 75
150 NA NA 246 220
Candela Coded Medium 44 51 56 69
Ranges 177 NA NA 281 251
185 NA NA 286 258 Coded Low 40 46 52 50
UL Max. Current Draw (mA RMS), 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard Candela Range (15-115 cd)
8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts
DC Input
15 15/75 15 15/75 30 75 95 110 115
Temporal High 137 147 79 90 107 176 194 212 218
Temporal Medium 13 144 69 80 97 157 182 201 210
Temporal Low 132 143 66 77 93 154 179 198 207
Non-temporal High 141 152 91 100 116 176 201 221 229
Non-temporal Medium 133 145 75 85 102 163 187 207 216
Non-temporal Low 131 144 68 79 96 156 182 201 210
FWR Input
Temporal High 136 155 88 97 112 168 190 210 218
Temporal Medium 129 152 78 88 103 160 184 202 206
Temporal Low 129 151 76 86 101 160 184 194 201
Temporal High 142 161 103 112 126 181 203 221 229
Temporal Medium 134 155 85 95 110 166 189 208 216
Temporal Low 132 154 80 90 105 161 184 202 211
UL Max. Current Draw (mA RMS), 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High Candela Range (135-185 cd)
16-33 Volts 16-33 Volts
DC Input FWR Input
135 150 177 185 135 150 177 185
Temporal High 245 259 290 297 Temporal High 215 231 258 265
Temporal Medium 235 253 288 297 Temporal Medium 209 224 250 258
Temporal Low 232 251 282 292 Temporal Low 207 221 48 256
Temporal High 255 270 303 309 Temporal High 233 248 275 281
Temporal Medium 242 259 293 299 Temporal Medium 219 232 262 267
Temporal Low 238 254 291 295 Temporal Low 214 229 256 262
CANDELA DERATING HORN TONES AND SOUND OUTPUT DATA

For K series products used at low temperatures, * Settings 7, 8, and 9 are not available on 2-wire horn/strobe
listed candela ratings must be reduced in
Horn and Horn/Strobe Output (dBA)
accordance with this table
Switch 24 Volt Nominal
Strobe Output (cd) Sound 8-17.5 Volts 16-33 Volts
Listed Candela Candela rating at -40°F Positio dB Reverberant Anechoic
Pattern
n DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR DC FWR
15
15/75 Do not use below 32°F 1 temporal High 78 78 84 84 88 88 99 98
30 2 temporal Medium 74 74 80 80 86 86 96 96
75 44 3 Temporal Low 71 73 76 76 83 80 94 89
95 70 4 Non-temporal High 82 82 88 88 93 92 100 100
110 110
5 Non-temporal Medium 78 78 85 85 90 90 98 98
115 115
6 Non-temporal Low 75 75 81 81 88 84 96 92
135 135
150 150 7* Coded High 82 82 88 88 93 92 101 101
177 177 8* Coded Medium 78 78 85 85 90 90 97 98
185 185 9* Coded Low 75 75 81 81 88 85 96 92
FIke P/N Mfg. P/N Description FIke P/N Mfg. P/N Description
Wall Horn/Strobes Ceiling Horn/Strobes (continued)
20-1345 P2R 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red 20-1306 PC2R-P 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red
20-1269 P2RH 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, Red 20-1308 PC2W 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, White
20-1271 P2RHK 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, Red, Outdoor 20-1309 PC2WH 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, White
20-1349 P2RHK-P 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd Red, Outdoor, No Lettering 20-1311 PC2WH-P 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, White, No Lettering
20-1273 P2RH-P 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, Red, No Lettering 20-1313 PC2WH-SP 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, White, Spanish
20-1275 P2RH-SP 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, Red, Spanish 20-1310 PC2W-P 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, White, No Lettering
20-1270 P2RK 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor 20-1312 PC2W-SP 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, White, Spanish
20-1348 P2RK-P 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor, No Lettering 20-1314 PC4R 4-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red
20-1272 P2R-P 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red No Lettering 20-1315 PC4RH 4-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, Red
20-1274 P2R-SP 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Spanish 20-1317 PC4RHK 4-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, Red, Outdoor
20-1276 P2W 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, White 20-1316 PC4RK 4-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor
20-1277 P2WH 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, White 20-1318 PC4W 4-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, White
20-1279 P2WH-P 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, White, No Lettering 20-1319 PC4WH 4-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, White
20-1278 P2W-P 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, White, No Lettering Ceiling Strobes
20-1280 P4R 4-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red 20-1320 SCR Strobe, Standard cd, Red
20-1281 P4RH 4-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, Red 20-1321 SCRH Strobe, High cd, Red
20-1283 P4RHK 4-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, Red, Outdoor 20-1323 SCRHK Strobe, High cd, Red, Outdoor
20-1351 P4RHK-P 4-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, Red, Outdoor No Lettering 20-1325 SCRHK-P Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor, No Lettering
20-1285 P4RH-P 4-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, Red, No Lettering 20-1322 SCRK Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor
20-1282 P4RK 4-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor 20-1324 SCR-P Strobe, High cd, Red, No Lettering
20-1350 P4RK-P 4-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor No Lettering 20-1326 SCW Strobe, Standard cd, White
20-1284 P4R-P 4-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red, No Lettering 20-1327 SCWH Strobe, High cd, White
20-1286 P4W 4-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, White 20-1329 SCWH-P Strobe, High cd, White, No Lettering
20-1287 P4WH 4-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, White 20-1331 SCWH-SP Strobe, High cd, White, Spanish
Wall Strobes 20-1328 SCW-P Strobe, Standard cd, White, No Lettering
20-1290 SR Strobe, Standard cd, Red 20-1330 SCW-SP Strobe, Standard cd, White, Spanish
20-1291 SRH Strobe, High cd, Red Horns
20-1293 SRHK Strobe, High cd, Red, Outdoor 20-1334 HR Horn, Red
20-1295 SRH-P Strobe, High cd, Red, No Lettering 20-1335 HRK Horn, Red, Outdoor
20-1297 SRH-SP Strobe, High cd, Red, Spanish 20-1336 HW Horn, White
20-1292 SRK Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor Accessories
20-1294 SR-P Strobe, Standard cd, Red, No Lettering 20-1339 BBS-2 Back Box Skirt, Wall, Red
20-1296 SR-SP Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Spanish 20-1341 BBSC-2 Back Box Skirt, Ceiling, Red
20-1298 SW* Strobe, Standard cd, White 20-1342 BBSCW-2 Back Box Skirt, Ceiling, White
20-1299 SWH* Strobe, High cd, White 20-1340 BBSW-2 Back Box Skirt, Wall, White
Ceiling Horn/Strobes Electronic Chime/Sounder
20-1302 PC2R 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red 20-1337 CHR Chime, Red
20-1303 PC2RH 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, Red 20-1338 CHW Chime, White
20-1305 PC2RHK 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, Red, Outdoor Chime/Strobe
20-1307 PC2RH-P 2-wire Horn/Strobe, High cd, Red, No Lettering 20-1332 CHSR 2-wire Chime/Strobe, Standard cd, Red
20-1304 PC2RK 2-wire Horn/Strobe, Standard cd, Red, Outdoor 20-1333 CHSW 2-wire Chime/Strobe, Standard cd, White
Copyright © Fike Corporation All Rights Reserved.

Form No. P.1.102.01 July, 2007 Specifications are subject to change without notice.
DATA SHEET
RELEASING CONTROL MODULE
DESCRIPTION
The Releasing Control Module, P/N 55–052/55-053, provides a means to supervise and control either an
agent/impulse release module(s) or a solenoid compatible with the Cheetah Xi. It can only be used for one
type of application at one time (either supervising up to six agent/impulse release modules or one solenoid,
but never both simultaneously). This module also monitors the external power input for loss of power.
The module has a tri-color LED that will flash a unique color for instant status indication (Green for normal
operation, Red for module active, Yellow for device trouble). The isolator version of the module, P/N 55-053,
provides complete short circuit isolation for installations requiring NFPA 72, Class X wiring.
The module is compatible with Fike’s Cheetah Xi intelligent control panels. Its operating parameters are
configured using the panel’s programming software and are stored within non-volatile RAM in the module. APPROVALS:
This on-board intelligence allows each module to communicate its status directly to other devices connected • UL Listed - S3217
to the panel. This peer-to-peer digital protocol result in less information that needs to be sent between the • FM
module and the host control panel, resulting in faster, more reliable communication. • City of New York -
376-06-E
SPECIFICATIONS • CSFM - 7300-0900:0143
SLC Normal Operating Voltage: 24 VDC Nominal
Standby Current: 450 uA maximum average (continuous broadcasts)
Activation Current: 6 mA (red LED on)
External Supply Normal Operating Voltages: 24 VDC Nominal
Standby Current: 6.4 mA
Activation Current: 10 mA
Agent Releasing Module Supervisory Loop Voltage: 20 to 28 V
Supervisory Loop Current (Normal): 13 mA
Solenoid Supervisory Loop Voltage: 3.3 V
Supervisory Loop Current (Normal): 30 mA
Temperature Range: 32 to 120°F (0 to 49°C)
Humidity: 10 to 93% RH Noncondensing
Dimensions: 4.17”H x 4.26”W x 1.22D (106 mm H x 108 mm W x 31 mm D)
Accessories: 2.7 kW End of Line Resistor P/N 10-2165 (included)
Wall cover plate (included)
Surface Mount Electrical Box P/N 20-1072
Mounting: Mounts on a 4” x 4” x 2 1/8” J-Box
Fike P/N Mfg. Mode Description
55-052 Releasing Module (Cheetah Xi Only) - Non-isolator
55-053 Releasing Module (Cheetah Xi Only) - Isolator
Accessories
20-346 CB500 Control Module Barrier
20-347 SMB500 Surface Mount Box
55-051 Configuration IR Tool
13-0192 COVERPLATE
10-2165 2.7K ohm End of Line
Note: Refer to the Fike document P/N 06-186 for listing of compatible releasing devices that can be connected
to the releasing control module.
Form No. P.1.96.01-2
Module Dimensions
Terminal Definitions
T1 (+) SLC in/out T8 (+) external power line in/out
T2 (-) SLC in/out T9 (-) external power line in/out
T3 (+) SLC in/out T10 (+) external power line in/out
T4 (-) SLC in/out T11 (+) ARM supervisory/(-) ARM activation
T5 No Connection T12 (-) ARM supervisory/(+) ARM activation
T6 No Connection T13 (-) Solenoid
T7 (-) external power line in/out T14 (+) Solenoid
Form No. P.1.96.01-2, May 2014. This document shall not be used for installation purposes. Please refer to installation instructions applicable for each product.
DATA SHEET
MINI MONITOR MODULE
DESCRIPTION
The Mini Monitor Module, P/N 55-045 & 55-050, provides a single, Class B initiating device circuit (IDC)
capable of monitoring normally open contact fire alarm and supervisory devices or normally open
supervisory/process devices. In addition to monitoring the connected contacts, the module will monitor the
wiring to the device for open circuits via an end of line resistor (Class B only). The module has a single tri-
color LED to indicate device status. The isolator version of the module, P/N 55-050, provides complete short
circuit isolation for installations requiring NFPA, Class X wiring.
The module is compatible with Fike’s CyberCat® and Cheetah® Xi intelligent control panels. Its operating
parameters are configured using the panel’s programming software and are stored within non-volatile RAM
in the module. This on-board intelligence allows each module to communicate its status directly to other
devices connected to the panel. This peer-to-peer digital protocol results in less information that needs to APPROVALS:
be sent between the module and the host control panel, resulting in faster, more reliable communication. • UL - S3217
• FM
SPECIFICATIONS • City of New York - 376-06-E
• CSFM - 7300-2010:0101
Normal Operating Voltage: 15 to 30 VDC
Standby Current: 485 µA max. (continuous broadcasts)
IDC Voltage: 5.4 VDC max.
Alarm Current: 2 mA (red LED on)
Maximum IDC Wiring Resistance: 100 Ω
Dimensions: 1.31” H x 2.73” W x 0.61” D
(33 mm H × 69 mm W × 15 mm D)
Wire Length: 6.5 inches (165 mm)
Accessories: 39 kΩ End of Line Resistor P/N 10-2625 included
Mounting: Inside standard electrical box behind monitored device
Fike P/N Mfg P/N Description
55-045 EM-1MM Mini Monitor Module - Non-isolator
55-050 EM-1MMI Mini Monitor Module - Isolator
Accessories
55-051 EA-CT IR Tool
10-2625 39Kohm end of line assembly
10-2530 14K short detect resistor
Form No. P.1.93.01-4
MODULE DIMENSIONS
WIRE COLOR DEFINITIONS

Red (+) SLC in/out
Red (+) SLC in/out
Black (-) SLC in
Purple (+) Supervised Input
Yellow (-) Supervised Input/(-) SLC out
Form No. P.1.93.01-4, April 2014. This document shall not be used for installation purposes. Please refer to installation instructions applicable for each product.
DATA SHEET
SUPPRESSION DISCONNECT SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
The Suppression Disconnect is a keyed switch that enables the operator to put the suppression release
circuit that the switch is connected to in a “DISARMED” condition. It electrically isolates the connected
release device from the associated control panel’s releasing circuit and provides a supervisory contact
to allow monitoring by a control panel. This allows the operator to work in the area protected by the
suppression system without accidentally releasing the system. The switch can be ordered with or without
status LEDs (Green – ARMED and Red – DISARMED). The LEDs provide positive indication of the status of the
releasing circuit. LEDs require 24 VDC auxiliary power from the associated control panel for operation.
COMPATIBILITY
Switch with LEDs
The Suppression Disconnect switch is compatible with all Fike intelligent control panels. The disconnect
switch is compatible with “Class B” style releasing circuits only. Do NOT attempt to install this product on
“Class A” style wiring. The switch can be used in conjunction with Fike’s Agent Release Module (ARM),
Impulse Release Module (IRM), or standard releasing solenoids used for sprinkler or carbon dioxide
suppression systems. APPROVALS:
• UL Listed - S3217
OPERATION • FM Approved - 3044246
Armed Mode • CSFM - 7300-0900:0155
With the key switch in the ARMED (normal) position, the release device is connected to the associated • City of New York - 6079
control panel’s releasing circuit. In this position, the switch does not interfere with panel supervision of the
releasing circuit or releasing operations. The green LED on the faceplate illuminates steady to indicate the
ARMED status of the circuit
Note: The key can only be removed in the ARMED position.
Disarmed Mode
With the key switch in the DISARMED (maintenance) position, the connected release device is electrically
isolated from the releasing circuit and will not activate when the associated control panel enters the Release
State. A trouble and supervisory event will be displayed on the associated control panel to indicate the open
circuit. The green LED on the faceplate will turn off and the red LED will turn on to indicate the DISARMED
status of the circuit.
Warning: Both the ARM and IRM modules utilize capacitors to store a charge for releasing the suppression system. Before
servicing the system, wait 10 minutes for the capacitor’s charge to dissipate.
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Voltage: 15 – 30 VDC
Current Consumption: 13.1 mA (LED active)
Circuit Limitations: Class B only
Dimensions (LxWxD): 4.5 in. x 4.5 in. x 2.125 in.
(11.5cm x 11.5cm x 5.4cm)
Weight: 0.55 lb. (0.25 kg)
Operating Temp: 0 to 49°C (32 to 120°F)
Operating Humidity: 93% RH
Contact Ratings: 8A @ 24 VDC Resistive
4A @ 24 VDC Inductive
Mounting: Two-gang masonry box (Raco 691 or equal)
Form No. P.1.124.01-3
10-2698 Suppression Disconnect Switch, no LEDs
10-2699 Suppression Disconnect Switch, with LEDs
Spare Parts
02-12294 Double contact block (2 NC) 02-12316 Single contact block (NC)
02-12295 Double contact block (2 NO) 02-12317 Double contact block (1 NC/1 NO)
02-12296 Replacement keys 02-12318 Locking ring wrench
02-12297 4 block switch 02-3013 Green LED
02-12298 5 block switch 02-3009 Red LED
02-12300 Single contact (NO) 02-1553 2.2K, .5W, 5% resistor
02-12314 2 block switch 10-2714 Cover plate w/o LED holes
02-12315 3 block switch 10-2713 Cover plate with LED holes
WIRING DIAGRAMS
12 1&
6:,7&+7(50,1$/%/2&.6

%$&.6,'(2))$&(3/$7(
72$50,5025
1& 5(/($6,1*62/(12,'
683(59,625<&,5&8,7
721(;7',6&211(&7
)520&21752/3$1(/
6:,7&+25(1'2)/,1(
25$''5(66$%/(
5(6,6725
021,72502'8/(
5(/($6(&,5&8,7)520
&21752/3$1(/25
5(/($6,1*02'8/(
127(6
:,5,1*',$*5$06+2:66:,7&+,1$50('326,7,21
$//:,5,1*6+2:1,6683(59,6('$1'32:(5/,0,7('
Switch without LEDs
12 1&
6:,7&+7(50,1$/%/2&.6

%$&.6,'(2))$&(3/$7(
72$50,5025
1& 5(/($6,1*62/(12,'
683(59,625<&,5&8,7
721(;7',6&211(&7
)520&21752/3$1(/
6:,7&+25(1'2)/,1(
25$''5(66$%/(
5(6,6725
021,72502'8/(
5(/($6(&,5&8,7)520
&21752/3$1(/25
5(/($6,1*02'8/(
127(6
:,5,1*',$*5$06+2:66:,7&+,1$50('326,7,21
$//:,5,1*6+2:1,6683(59,6('$1'32:(5/,0,7('
Switch with LEDs

Form No. P.1.124.01-3, October 2013. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
DATA SHEET
CO2 PRESSURE SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
The Pressure Switch (P/N C70-202) is used to provide an electrical tie-in to the control panel that indicates
the system has been activated. The pressure switch can also be used to open, or close, electrical circuits
from various functions such as equipment shutdown and alarm activation.
Note:
1. The pressure switch will not transfer during the pre-discharge period. Therefore, the switch is not suitable for an
evacuation alarm signal.
2. After operation, the pressure switch must be reset prior to resetting the control panel.
3. The pressure switch should be placed before the time delay in the discharge manifold.
The pressure switch is a double pole, single throw switch housed in a weather-proof backbox. When the
system is activated, the switch is operated by the agent pressure from the discharge piping.
INSTALLATION
The switch should be mounted on a suitable mounting surface, in the vertical position. Connection is made APPROVALS:
using 1/4” (8mm) piping in accordance with NFPA 12 requirements. • UL Listed - Ex 4447
• FM Approved -
SPECIFICATIONS 3002238/0D8A9.AF
• CEx - 1312
Part Number: C70-202 • USCG - 162.161/2/0
Switch: Double pole, single throw (HFC-227ea)
Ratings: 15A - 120 VAC • USCG - 162.038/12/0
8A - 240 VAC (CO2)
Operating Pressure: 100 psig (690 kpa) (Activation Pressure)
3-1/8"
3-1/8" (79mm)
(79mm)
PRESSURE
SWITCH
PRESSURE D.P.S.T. TYPE
SWITCH C70-202
D.P.S.T. TYPE
C70-202 5-5/16"
5-5/16" 15A - 120VAC PER POLE
8A - 240VAC PER POLE (135mm)
15A - 120VAC PER POLE
8A - 240VAC PER POLE (135mm)
CO2-1074 REV.
CO2-1074 REV.
3/4" (20mm) NPT 1/4" (6mm) NPT 2-1/8" 19/64" (7mm) Dia.
1/4" (6mm) NPT 2-1/8" 19/64" (7mm) Dia. Electrical Entrance Inlet (54mm) (Typ. 2 Places)
Inlet (54mm) (Typ. 2 Places)
RESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY PRESSURE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Form No. E.1.11.01-2
(This page is left blank intentionally)

Form No. E.1.11.01-2, December 2007. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
DATA SHEET
ABORT SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
The abort switch assembly, P/N 10-1639, consists of a momentary-contact, push button switch, normally-
open contact block, normally-closed contact block, and stainless steel switch plate with adhesive label. The
assembly can be recessed or surface mounted using a standard two-gang masonry box, minimum 2.5” (63.5
mm) deep (RACO 691), or equivalent. Masonry box not included.
FEATURES
• Stackable, screw-terminal, contact blocks Abort Switch
• Compatible with Fike suppression control panels
• Surface or flush mount
• Components mounted on a stainless steel face plate APPROVALS:
• NFPA 72 initiating device
• UL - 3217
• FM
APPLICATIONS • CSFM - 6760-0900:0103
The abort switch assembly is used to momentarily interrupt the release circuit signal when the control panel
is in the alarm condition. As long as the push button is held in, the suppression system will not release
unless it is overridden by a manual release input. Upon release of the abort push button, the release circuit
is activated, unless the control panel has been reset to the non-alarm condition.
Operation of the control unit during abort activation varies depending upon panel programming. Refer to
the associated control unit manual for detailed description of available abort operating modes (types).
SPECIFICATIONS
Weight: 0.45 lb (204 grams)
Operating Temperature: 0° to 49°C (32° to 120°F)
Wire Size: Min. 1 x 22 AWG, Max. 2 x 14 AWG or 1 x 12 AWG
10-1430 Abort Switch Assembly
02-2130 Extra Contact Block, N.C.
02-2150 Extra Contact Block, N.O.
02-2137 Abort Adhesive Label
10-104 Stainless Steel Face Plate w/ mounting screws
10-1419 Stainless Steel Face Plate (1)
02-2316 Mounting Screws (4 required)
02-2153 Back Box, 4 x 4, 2 gang, RACO 691
Form No. P.1.190.01
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS

Form No. P.1.190.01, February 2014. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
DATA SHEET
CO2 STOP/MAINTENANCE VALVES
DESCRIPTION
Fike stop/maintenance valves are available in sizes ranging from 1/2” (15 mm) to 1 1/2” (40 mm). Stop
valves are used for lock-out purposes to prevent the discharge of CO2 from the nozzles during system
maintenance. The valves are equipped with lockable handles that can be locked in either the open or closed
position for added security. Lock and key are not included.
The valve is equipped with two direct-drive micro switches which can be tied into the system control panel
for the purpose of providing a trouble indication when the valve is closed. A visual indicator is also included
to provide a visual reference as to the position of the valve.
The ball valve is a high pressure valve with a stainless steel body and ball, lubetal seats and a Buna-N body APPROVALS:
seal. The valves are equipped with female NPT connections on each end for piping connections.
• FM Approved - 0D8A9.AF
The two micro switches are UL listed and hazardous rated for Class I, Group C, D and Class II, Group E, F and • ULC Listed - CEx 1312
G installations. Both micro switches are direct driven and can annunciate a trouble condition to the control • USCG - 162.038/12/0
panel when the valve is closed. The micro switches are rated for 5 amps @ 24 Vdc.
INSTALLATION
Fike stop/maintenance valves are provided with female NPT connections on each end for installation onto
threaded piping in accordance with NFPA 12. The valve can be installed in either the horizontal or vertical
position, with horizontal being the preferred position.
SPECIFICATIONS
The stop/maintenance valve provided shall be a high pressure ball valve with a lockable handle, two micro
switches and position indicator. The ball valve, locking handle and associated hardware shall be made of
stainless steel materials. The valve seat shall be made of lubetal or equal, to withstand pressures of up to
5,000 psig.
Note: pressure rating varies with size
The micro switches shall be an integral part of the stop valve assembly, constructed of stainless steel and
anodized aluminum materials. The micro switches shall be UL listed and hazardous rated for Class I, Group C,
D and Class II, Group E, F, G installations.
A visual indicator shall be included as part of the overall assembly, to visually indicate the position of the
valve.
Part Number: C02-1210 1/2” Stop Valve Assembly

C02-1211 3/4” Stop Valve Assembly
C02-1212 1” Stop Valve Assembly
C02-1213 1 1/2” Stop Valve Assembly
Materials: Body - 316 SST
Ball - 316 SST
Locking Kit - 300 SST
Micro Switch Housing - Anodized
Aluminum, NEMA 4, 4X
Switch Rating: 5 amps @ 24 Vdc
Pressure Rating: 5,000 psig - 1/2” and 3/4”
4,000 psig - 1”
4,000 psig - 1 1/2”
Form No. E.1.09.01-1

DATA SHEET
CO2 ODORIZER
DESCRIPTION
The odorizer is used to inject a small amount of wintergreen scent into the carbon
dioxide while flowing through the piping network. When the carbon dioxide
discharges into the hazard area, it will carry a scent of wintergreen with it. This
wintergreen scent is a warning to personnel entering the hazard area that the area
contains a concentration of carbon dioxide and precautions must be taken, either
leave the area immediately or secure proper breathing apparatus. The internal
ampule containing the oil of wintergreen must be replaced after each system
discharge.
SPECIFICATIONS
Part Number: 02-9868
Replacement Cartridge Part Number: 02-9876
Material: Steel
Thread Size/Type: ¾” NPT Male
APPROVALS:
• UL Listed
• FM Approved
• USCG

1 of 1
DATA SHEET
CO2 VALVE ASSEMBLY
DESCRIPTION
Fike Carbon Dioxide cylinders are equipped with a cylinder valve assembly to hold the CO2 agent in the
cylinder until actuated.
The cylinder valve assembly is a forged brass body. The actuation pressure required to open the pneumatic
valve is 100 to 110 psi (689 to 758 kPa). All valves are equipped with a safety relief disc that will rupture if
the cylinder pressure exceeds 2750 psi (18,960 kPa) and a pilot port that is utilized for two purposes:
• Recharging the CO2 cylinder
• Installation of solenoid
The Valve can be installed as a master valve by removing two plugs and installing either the 12 Vdc or 24 Vdc
actuation kit. For Marine applications, the slave configuration is converted to a master valve by installing the
local lever actuator assembly. (Refer to Master valve sketches for details).
SPECIFICATIONS
Part Number: C85-010
Valve Materials: Brass APPROVALS:
Operating Pressure: 100 to 110 psi (689 to 758 kPa) • UL Listed - Ex 4447
• ULC Listed - CEx 1312
• FM Approved - 0D8A9.AF
• USCG - 162.038/12/0
• CE
• LPCB
Form No. E.1.02.01-1

DATA SHEET
CO2 MASTER CYLINDER ACTUATION PACKAGE
DESCRIPTION
The Fike Carbon Dioxide Master Cylinder Valve can be actuated by three methods of operation:
• Manual/Mechanical Actuator
• Electric Solenoid Actuator (24 Vdc)
The 24 Vdc Master Cylinder actuation package contains the following items:
• 24 Vdc electric solenoid
• Manual actuator
The 24 Vdc solenoids meet the requirements of N.E.C. Class I, Group C & D and Class II Group E, F & G
applications.
APPROVALS:
The solenoids are compatible with the Fike SHP PRO® and Cheetah® Xi multi-area control panels. • UL Listed - Ex 4447
• ULC Listed - CEx - 1312
A manual actuator is provided for local “override” purposes. For manifold cylinder applications, the manual • FM Approved
actuators can be connected together to provide simultaneous discharge of the master cylinders. • CE
• LPCB
No “special” tools are required to reset the electric or manual actuators after operation. • USCG
SPECIFICATIONS
Part Number: C85-113 12 Vdc Master Cylinder Actuation Package
C85-114 24 Vdc Master Cylinder Actuation Package
C85-115 12 Vdc Master Cylinder Actuation Package with Pressure Gauge
C85-123 24 Vdc Master Cylinder Actuation Package with Pressure Gauge
Materials: Brass and Stainless Steel
Temperature Range: 0 to 130°F (-18 to 54°C)
Form No. E.1.04.01-2

Form No. E.1.04.01-2, October 2010. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
DATA SHEET
CONTROL MODULE
DESCRIPTION
The Control Module, P/N 55-042 & 55-047, provides a means to switch an external power supply to
notification appliances or release solenoids used for sprinkler operation, or to activate Fike’s Masterbox
Interface module, P/N 10-2413, which is used on a Local Energy Type Auxiliary Fire Alarm System. The
module is capable of Class A or Class B wiring. The device will monitor the wiring (while external power
is not switched to the auxiliary devices) to the connected device for open and short circuits via an end of
line resistor (Class B only). The module will monitor the external power input for loss of power (DC voltage
supplies only). The isolator version of the module, P/N 55-047, provides complete short circuit isolation for
installations requiring NFPA, Class X wiring.
in the module. This on-board intelligence allows each module to communicate its status directly to other APPROVALS:
devices connected to the panel. This peer-to-peer digital protocol results in less information that needs to be
sent between the module and the host control panel, resulting in faster, more reliable communication. • UL - S2203
• FM
• City of New York - 8-05-E
SPECIFICATIONS • CSFM - 7165-0900:0137
Normal Operating Voltage: 15 to 30 VDC
Standby Current: 630 uA max. average (continuous broadcasts)
Maximum NAC Circuit Line Loss: 4 VDC
Power Supply Monitor: Regulated 24 VDC
Trouble Range: 0 to 2 VDC
Humidity: 10 to 93% RH Non-condensing
Dimensions: 4.675”H x 4.275”W x 1.4”D
(119 mm H x 109 mm W x 36 mm D)
Accessories: 39kΩ End of Line Resistor P/N 10-2625 (included)
Wall cover plate (included)
Surface Mount Electrical Box: P/N 20-1347
Control Module Barrier: P/N 20-1346
Series Solenoid Diode/Resistor: P/N 10-2360
Mounting: Mounts directly on a 4-inch square electrical box with a
minimum depth of 2 1/8 inches. For surface mounting, use
20-1347 surface mount box.
OUTPUT RATING
Current Rating Maximum Voltage Load Description Application
2A 25 VAC PF=0.35 Non-Coded
3A 30 VDC Resistive Non-Coded
2A 30 VDC Resistive Coded
0.46A 30 VDC (L/R=20 ms) Non-Coded
0.7A 70.7 VAC PF=0.35 Non-Coded
0.9A 125 VDC Resistive Non-Coded
0.5A 125 VAC PF=0.75 Non-Coded
Form No. P.1.94.01-4
55-042 Supervised Control Module - Non-isolator
55-047 Supervised Control Module - Isolator
Accessories
20-1346 Control Module Barrier
20-1347 Surface Mount Box
55-051 IR Tool
10-2360 Series Solenoid Diode/Resistor
10-2625 39K EOL
13-0192 COVERPLATE
MODULE DIMENSIONS
TERMINAL DEFINITIONS
T1 (+) SLC in/out T8 (+) 24 VDC External Power in/out
T2 (-) SLC in/out T9 (-) 24 VDC External Power in/out
T3 (+) SLC in/out T10 (+) 24 VDC External Power in/out
T4 (-) SLC in/out T11 NAC (+) Class A/B
T5 No Connection T12 NAC (-) Class A/B
T6 No Connection T13 NAC (-) Class A
T7 (-) 24 VDC External Power in/out T14 NAC (+) Class A
Form No. P.1.94.01-4, March 2014. This document shall not be used for installation purposes. Please refer to installation instructions applicable for each product.
DATA SHEET
RELAY MODULE
DESCRIPTION
The Relay Module, P/N 55-043 & 55-048, provides two sets of Form “C” dry relay contacts that switch
together (DPDT). These contacts can be used to initiate emergency control functions (i.e., damper closure,
fan control, door holder interface, elevator recall, etc.). There is also an input that is capable of monitoring
a dry set of contacts for open or closed conditions. The module has a multi-color LED that will illuminate a
unique color for instant status indication (Green for normal operation, Red for device active, and Yellow for
device trouble). The isolator version of the module, P/N 55-048, provides complete short circuit isolation for
installations requiring NFPA, Class X wiring.
in the module. This on-board intelligence allows each module to communicate its status directly to other
devices connected to the panel. This peer-to-peer digital protocol results in less information that needs to be APPROVALS:
sent between the module and the host control panel, resulting in faster, more reliable communication.
• UL - S3217
• FM
SPECIFICATIONS • City of New York - 8-05-E
Normal Operating Voltage: 15 to 30 VDC • CSFM - 7300-2010:0101
Standby Current: 580 µA max. average (continuous broadcasts)
Short Circuit Current: Dry Control Input: 30 mA max. Avg. (5 VDC)
Maximum Resistance: Dry Contact Input: 100 W
Dimensions: 4.675” H x 4.275” W x 1.4” D
(119 mm H x 109 mm W x 36 mm D)
Accessories: Wall cover plate (included)
Surface Mount Electrical Box: P/N 20-1347
Control Module Barrier: P/N 20-1346
Mounting: Mounts on a 4” square x 2 1/8” Junction Box for flush
mounting or on a surface mount box (P/N 20-1347) for
surface mounting
RELAY CONTACT RATINGS:
Current Rating Maximum Voltage Load Description Application
2A 25 VAC PF=0.35 Non-Coded
3A 30 VDC Resistive Non-coded
2A 30 VDC Resistive Coded
0.46A 30 VDC (L/R=20ms) Non-coded
0.7A 70.7 VAC PF=0.35 Non-Coded
0.9A 125 VDC Resistive Non-Coded
Fike P/N Mfg. Model Description
55-043 EM-1R Relay Module - Non-isolator
55-048 EM-1RI Relay Module - Isolator
Accessories
55-051 EA-CT IR Tool
13-0192 C58-004-000 Cover Plate
Form No. P.1.95.01-5
MODULE DIMENSIONS
TERMINAL DEFINITIONS
T1 (+) SLC in/out T7 Normally Closed #1
T2 (-) SLC in/out T8 Common #1
T3 (+) SLC in/out T9 Normally Open #1
T4 (-) SLC in/out T10 Normally Closed #2
T5 (+) Dry Contact Input T11 Common #2
T6 (-) Dry Contact Input T12 Normally Open #2
Form No. P.1.95.01-5, April 2014. This document shall not be used for installation purposes. Please refer to installation instructions applicable for each product.
DATA SHEET
DISCHARGE PRESSURE SWITCH
DESCRIPTION
Discharge Pressure Switch (DPS) is used to provide a positive pneumatic
confirmation to the control system that the Fike Fire Suppression system has
been discharged.
When a system is discharged manually (by Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) with
Strike Button), the discharge pressure switch is required to provide the input to
the control system needed to activate various audio/visual warning devices
and auxiliary relays. APPROVALS:
 FM
The switch is operated pneumatically using the agent pressure in the discharge
 UL
piping network.
 ULC
SPECIFICATIONS
Part Number 02-12534
Temperature Limits +32 to +130°F (0 to 54°C)
Enclosure Classification NEMA 4
Single pole, double throw; 5 amps resistive @ 30 VDC (can

Contact Rating
be wired for normally open or normally closed operation)
Body Material Aluminum
Pressure Connection 1/4" NPT (6 mm)
DPS Length 4-1/8" (105 mm) long (including both connectors)

(approximate)
Electrical Connection 1/2" NPT (15 mm)
Wire Leads (3) 18 gauge x 20" (508 mm) long

Violet (Common), Blue (N.O.), Black (N.C.)
Pressure Setting 40 psig (3 bar) (Increasing)
www.Fike.com Form No. IV.1.12.01, May, 2017

1 of 1
DATA SHEET
IMPULSE VALVE OPERATOR (IVO) KIT
DESCRIPTION
The Impulse Valve Operator (IVO) provides means to electrically or manually

activate the Fike Impulse Valve clean agent container by providing the force
required to extend a piston that will open the rupture disc, allowing the agent
to be released from the container.
The IVO can be activated electrically via a signal from Fike control panel or
manually by depressing red strike buttom.
Fike Clean Agent Containers with Impulse Valve must use an Impulse
Releasing Module (IRM) to supervise the agent release circuit wiring (for open
and ground fault conditions) from the container to the control panel. The
Impulse Valve Operator Supervisor (IVOS) is used to monitor the presence of
the Impulse Valve Operator (IVO). When installed between the Impulse Valve APPROVALS:
and the IVO, this supervises the presence of the actuation device; when the
IVO is removed from the container this will cause a “supervisory event” at the  FM
system control panel.  UL
The IVOS can also be used to monitor the presence of the Impulse Valve  ULC
Pneumatic Operator (IVPO).

1 of 2
SPECIFICATIONS
IMPULSE VALVE OPERATOR (IVO) KIT (P/N 70-279)

Item No. Part Number Description
1 02-12728 Impulse Valve Operator (IVO)
2 10-2748 Impulse Releasing Module Assembly (IRM)
3 02-14263 Impulse Valve Operator Supervisor(IVOS)
4 02-13130 Safety Cotter Pin
5 02-2213 Security Tie Item No. 1
6 02-12925 Plastic Cap (Black)

Temperature Range 32 to 130°F (0 to 54.4°C)
Listings & Approvals UL / ULC Listed and FM Approved
SPECIFICATIONS – IMPULSE VALVE OPERATOR (IVO) (P/N 02-12728)
Normal Supply Voltage 24 VDC
Current Consumption 0 Amps (for Battery Calculation)
Electrical Connection 1/2" NPT for conduit connection Item No. 2
IVO Material Stainless Steel (Body) / Brass (End Cap)
SPECIFICATIONS – IMPULSE VALVE OPERATOR SUPERVISOR (IVOS) (P/N 02-14263)
Normally Closed (Black) / Normally Open (White) /
Switch
Common (Red)
1/4" ID SST Flexible Conduit 33.5" lg. with 1/2" Knockout
Conduit
Connector Item No. 3
Wire Leads 22 AWG, 44" lg.

2 of 2
Industrial Carbon Dioxide
Extinguishing Systems
Design, Installation, and
Maintenance Manual
P/N C06-018
Revision: 2
April, 2008
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Number Page Number

1.0 Equipment ..................................................................................................................Section 1 – 29 Pages
1.1 General Information................................................................................................................ Page 1
1.2 Agent ...................................................................................................................................... Page 1
1.2.1 Storage and Pressure................................................................................................ Page 1
1.2.2 Temperature .............................................................................................................. Page 1
1.2.3 Visibility...................................................................................................................... Page 1
1.2.4 Noise.......................................................................................................................... Page 1
1.2.5 Cleanup ..................................................................................................................... Page 1
1.3 Use and Limitations ................................................................................................................ Page 2
1.3.1 Areas of Use.............................................................................................................. Page 2
1.3.2 Areas of Non-Use ...................................................................................................... Page 2
1.3.3 Static Electricity ......................................................................................................... Page 2
1.4 Personnel Safety .................................................................................................................... Page 3
1.4.1 Exposure.................................................................................................................... Page 3
1.4.2 Agent Migration ......................................................................................................... Page 3
1.4.3 Safety Recommandations ......................................................................................... Page 4
1.5 Cylinder Assembly.................................................................................................................. Page 5
1.6 Cylinder Valve Assembly........................................................................................................ Page 6
1.7 Master Cylinder Actuation Components................................................................................. Page 7
1.7.1 Electric Actuation ...................................................................................................... Page 7
1.7.1.1 Emergency Manual Level Actuator ............................................................... Page 7
1.7.2 Manual Actuation....................................................................................................... Page 8
1.7.3 Connecting Link Assembly ........................................................................................ Page 8
1.7.4 Pneumatic Actuation.................................................................................................. Page 8
1.7.5 Latch Door Pull Box................................................................................................... Page 9
1.7.6 Corner Pulley........................................................................................................... Page 10
1.7.7 Stainless Cable........................................................................................................ Page 10
1.7.7.1 Stainless Steel Cable Accessories.............................................................. Page 10
1.7.8 Cable Junction Box Assembly................................................................................. Page 10
1.8 Flexible Discharge Bend....................................................................................................... Page 11
1.9 Cylinder Mounting................................................................................................................. Page 12
1.9.1 Cylinder Strap.......................................................................................................... Page 12
1.9.2 Cylinder Racking ..................................................................................................... Page 12
1.9.2.1 Single Row Racking.................................................................................. Page 12
1.9.2.2 Double Row Racking ................................................................................ Page 13
1.9.2.3 Double Row – Back-to-Back Racking....................................................... Page 13
1.10 Check Valves........................................................................................................................ Page 14
1.11 Stop / Maintenance Valve..................................................................................................... Page 15
1.12 Pressure Relief Devices ....................................................................................................... Page 16
1.12.1 Header Safety Relief ............................................................................................... Page 16
1.12.2 Header Vent Plug .................................................................................................... Page 16
1.13 Wintergreen Odorizer ........................................................................................................... Page 17
1.14 Weigh Beam Scale Assembly .............................................................................................. Page 17
1.15 Discharge Nozzles................................................................................................................ Page 18
1.15.1 Baffle Nozzle ........................................................................................................... Page 18
1.15.2 Radial Nozzle .......................................................................................................... Page 18
1.15.3 Vent Nozzle ............................................................................................................. Page 19
1.15.3.1 Vent Nozzle Flange Mounting Kit ............................................................. Page 19
1.15.4 “S” Type Nozzle....................................................................................................... Page 20
1.15.4.1 “S” Type Nozzle Flange Mounting Kit ....................................................... Page 20
1.16 Pneumatic Operated Accessories ........................................................................................ Page 21
1.16.1 Pressure Trip Assembly ......................................................................................... Page 21
1.16.2 Pressure Switch....................................................................................................... Page 22
1.16.3 Pneumatic Time Delay ............................................................................................ Page 23
Carbon Dioxide Page: 1 of 6
Manual P/N: C06-018 Revision: 2
Revision Date: April, 2008
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.16.4 Pneumatically Operated Siren................................................................................. Page 24

1.17 Instructional Signs ................................................................................................................ Page 25
1.17.1 Warning Sign – Vacate Immediately ....................................................................... Page 25
1.17.2 Warning Sign – Do Not Enter Until Ventilated......................................................... Page 25
1.17.3 Warning Sign – When Alarm Operates ................................................................... Page 25
1.17.4 Caution Sign – Nearby Space Collection ................................................................ Page 26
1.17.5 Caution Sign – Ventilate Before Entering................................................................ Page 26
1.17.6 Warning Sign – Manual Actuator............................................................................. Page 26
1.18 Selector Valve Systems........................................................................................................ Page 27
1.18.1 Selector Valves........................................................................................................ Page 27
1.18.2 Solenoid Actuator Kit ............................................................................................... Page 28
1.19 Listing and Approvals ........................................................................................................... Page 29
2.0 System Design ...........................................................................................................Section 2 – 32 Pages

2.1 General Requirements ........................................................................................................... Page 1
2.1.1 Use and Limitations ................................................................................................... Page 2
2.1.1.1 Areas of Use ............................................................................................... Page 2
2.1.1.2 Areas of Non-Use ....................................................................................... Page 2
2.1.1.3 Use Restrictions per NFPA 12.................................................................... Page 2
2.1.1.3.1 Existing Installations .................................................................... Page 3
2.1.1.3.2 Typical Installation ....................................................................... Page 3
2.2 Total Flood Systems............................................................................................................... Page 4
2.2.1 Total Flood – Surface Fire Systems .......................................................................... Page 4
2.2.1.1 Hazard Volume............................................................................................. Page 5
2.2.1.2 Flooding Factors for Surface Fires ............................................................... Page 5
2.2.1.3 Agent Adjustments for Special Conditions ................................................... Page 5
2.2.1.3.1 Ventilation .................................................................................... Page 5
2.2.1.3.2 Uncloseable Openings................................................................. Page 6
2.2.1.3.3 Concentration Adjustment for Special Materials.......................... Page 7
2.2.1.3.4 Temperature Considerations ....................................................... Page 8
2.2.1.3.4.1 High Temperatures .................................................... Page 8
2.2.1.3.4.2 Low Temperatures ..................................................... Page 8
2.2.1.3.4.3 Cylinder Storage Temperatures ................................. Page 9
2.2.1.4 Power / Fuel Source Consideration.............................................................. Page 9
2.2.1.5 Pressure Operated Sirens............................................................................ Page 9
2.2.1.6 Minimum Discharge Time / Surface Fire Application ................................... Page 9
2.2.1.7 Special Liquids ............................................................................................. Page 9
2.2.2 Total Flood / Deep-Seated Systems ....................................................................... Page 10
2.2.2.1 Hazard Volume........................................................................................... Page 10
2.2.2.2 Flooding Factors for Deep-Seated Fires .................................................... Page 11
2.2.2.3 Agent Adjustments for Special Conditions ................................................. Page 11
2.2.2.3.1 Ventilation.................................................................................... Page 11
2.2.2.3.2 Uncloseable Openings ................................................................ Page 12
2.2.2.3.3 Temperature Considerations....................................................... Page 13
2.2.2.3.3.1 High Temperatures .................................................. Page 13
2.2.2.3.3.2 Low Temperatures ................................................... Page 13
2.2.2.3.3.3 Cylinder Storage Temperatures............................... Page 13
2.2.2.4 Power / Fuel Source Consideration............................................................ Page 13
2.2.2.5 Pressure Operated Sirens.......................................................................... Page 13
2.2.2.6 Discharge Duration / Flow Rate ................................................................. Page 13
2.2.2.7 Pressure Relief Venting.............................................................................. Page 13
2.2.3 Combined Surface Fire & Deep-Seated Hazards ................................................... Page 14
2.2.4 Nozzle Selection...................................................................................................... Page 14
2.2.4.1 Radial Nozzles............................................................................................ Page 14
2.2.4.2 Baffle Nozzles............................................................................................. Page 14
Page: 2 of 6 Carbon Dioxide

Revision: 2 Manual P/N: C06-018
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.2.4.3 Vent Nozzle ................................................................................................ Page 15

2.2.4.4 “S”-Type Nozzle.......................................................................................... Page 15
2.2.4.5 Nozzle Strainer ........................................................................................... Page 15
2.3 Local Application Systems.................................................................................................... Page 16
2.3.1 General Requirements ............................................................................................ Page 16
2.3.2 Safety Requirements ............................................................................................... Page 16
2.3.3 Discharge Duration Requirements .......................................................................... Page 16
2.3.4 Radiant Heating....................................................................................................... Page 16
2.3.5 Storage Requirements............................................................................................. Page 16
2.3.6 Local Application / Rate-By-Area Design Method ................................................... Page 17
2.3.6.1 Nozzle Determination ................................................................................. Page 17
2.3.6.2 Number and Location of Nozzles ............................................................... Page 17
2.3.6.3 Nozzle / Application Flow Rate................................................................... Page 20
2.3.6.4 Nozzle Placement....................................................................................... Page 21
2.3.6.4.1 Nozzle Aiming Factors ................................................................ Page 21
2.3.6.5 Determine System Flow Rate & Agent Quantity Required......................... Page 21
2.3.7 Local Application / Rate-By-Volume Design Method .............................................. Page 22
2.3.7.1 Design Steps – Local Application Rate-by-Volume System....................... Page 22
2.3.7.1.1 Local Application Design – General ............................................ Page 22
2.3.7.1.1.1 Define the Hazard .................................................... Page 22
2.3.7.1.1.2 Determine Method of Protection .............................. Page 22
2.3.7.1.2 Local Application Design – Rate-by-Volume............................... Page 23
2.3.7.1.2.1 Determine the Assumed Volume ............................. Page 23
2.3.7.1.2.2 System Flow Rate .................................................... Page 23
2.3.7.1.2.3 Determine Assumed Volume w/ Perimeter Walls .... Page 24
2.3.7.1.2.4 Calculate the Total Surface Area of Assumed
Volume w/ Perimeter Walls..................................... Page 24
2.3.7.1.2.5 Total “Open Area” .................................................... Page 24
2.3.7.1.2.6 “Enclosed” Area Percentage.................................... Page 25
2.3.7.1.2.7 Flow Rate per Unit Volume ...................................... Page 25
2.3.7.1.2.8 Reduced System Flow Rate .................................... Page 25
2.3.7.1.2.9 Number of Nozzles Required................................... Page 25
2.3.7.1.2.10 Final System Design Flow Rate............................. Page 28
2.3.7.1.2.11 Quantity Agent Required........................................ Page 28
2.3.7.1.2.12 Quantity Agent Supply ........................................... Page 28
2.3.7.1.2.13 Layout Pipe Network and Run Hydraulic Calc....... Page 28
2.4 Combination Total Flood and Local Application Systems .................................................... Page 28
2.5 Piping Distribution System.................................................................................................... Page 29
2.5.1 General .................................................................................................................... Page 29
2.5.2 Pipe.......................................................................................................................... Page 29
2.5.3 Fittings ..................................................................................................................... Page 29
2.5.3.1 Other Approved Fittings.............................................................................. Page 29
2.5.4 Piping Support ......................................................................................................... Page 30
2.5.5 Valves ...................................................................................................................... Page 30
2.5.5.1 Selector valves ........................................................................................... Page 30
2.5.6 Pressure Relief Provisions ...................................................................................... Page 31
2.5.7 Estimating Pipe Sizes.............................................................................................. Page 31
2.6 Equivalent Lengths ............................................................................................................... Page 32
2.6.1 Check Valves........................................................................................................... Page 32
2.6.2 Stop / Maintenance Valves...................................................................................... Page 32
2.6.3 Pneumatic Time Delay ............................................................................................ Page 32
2.6.4 Selector Valves........................................................................................................ Page 32

TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.0 Sample Problems ......................................................................................................... Section 3 – 31 Pages

3.1 Total Flood Application Samples ............................................................................................ Page 1
3.1.1 Surface Fire Hazards................................................................................................. Page 1
3.1.1.2 Required Flooding Factor ............................................................................. Page 1
3.1.1.3 Minimum Extinguishing Quantity (34% Conc.) Required ............................. Page 1
3.1.1.4 Ventilation..................................................................................................... Page 2
3.1.1.5 Uncloseable Opening(s) ............................................................................... Page 2
3.1.1.6 Special Materials Adjustment ....................................................................... Page 4
3.1.1.7 Temperature Adjustment .............................................................................. Page 5
3.1.1.8 Discharge Duration / Flow Rate ................................................................... Page 5
3.1.1.9 Nozzle Selection........................................................................................... Page 6
3.1.2 Deep Seated Fire Hazards (No Leakage or Ventilation Compensation) .................. Page 7
3.1.2.2 Minimum CO2 Concentration and Flooding Factor....................................... Page 7
3.1.2.3 Minimum Extinguishing Quantity Required .................................................. Page 7
3.1.2.4 Temperature Adjustment .............................................................................. Page 7
3.1.2.5 Required Flow Rate...................................................................................... Page 8
3.1.2.6 Nozzle Selection........................................................................................... Page 9
3.1.3 Deep Seated Fire Hazards (With Leakage & Ventilation Compensation)............... Page 10
3.1.3.2 Minimum CO2 Concentration and Flooding Factor..................................... Page 10
3.1.3.3 Minimum Extinguishing Quantity Required ................................................ Page 10
3.1.3.4 Ventilation................................................................................................... Page 10
3.1.3.5 Uncloseable Openings ............................................................................... Page 11
3.1.3.6 Temperature Adjustment ............................................................................ Page 13
3.1.3.7 Required Flow Rate.................................................................................... Page 13
3.1.3.8 Nozzle Selection......................................................................................... Page 14
3.1.4 Deep Seated Fire Hazards (With Leakage & Ventilation Compensation)............... Page 15
3.1.4.2 Minimum CO2 Concentration and Flooding Factor..................................... Page 15
3.1.4.3 Minimum Extinguishing Quantity Required ................................................ Page 15
3.1.4.5 Nozzle Selection......................................................................................... Page 16
3.2 Local Application Samples ................................................................................................... Page 17
3.2.1 Rate-By-Area Method – Nozzles Perpendicular to Surface .................................... Page 17
3.2.1.1 Nozzle Type and Number Required ........................................................... Page 17
3.2.1.3 Minimum Required Storage Quantity of Carbon Dioxide ........................... Page 18
3.2.2 Rate-By-Area Method– Nozzles at Angle to Surface .............................................. Page 19
3.2.2.1 Nozzle Type and Number Required ........................................................... Page 19
3.2.2.3 Minimum Required Quantity of Carbon Dioxide......................................... Page 20
3.2.2.4 Nozzle Aiming Factors................................................................................ Page 20
3.2.3 Rate-By-Volume Method ......................................................................................... Page 21
3.2.3.1 Example Problem 1 – Three Dimensional Hazard without an
Enclosure or Permanent Perimeter Walls .................................................. Page 21
1-1 Determine Assumed Volume ............................................................... Page 21
1-2 Determine System Flow Rate .............................................................. Page 21
1-3 Determine Quantity of Nozzle(s) Required .......................................... Page 21
1-4 Revised System Flow Rate .................................................................. Page 22
1-5 Quantity of Agent Required.................................................................. Page 22
1-6 Quantity of Agent Supplied .................................................................. Page 22
1-7 Layout Pipe Network and Run Hydraulic Calculation .......................... Page 22

TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.2.3.2 Example Problem 2 – Three Dimensional Hazard in Large Room

with Permanent Perimeter Wall(s).............................................................. Page 23
2-2 Determine Total Surface Area of Assumed Volume Perimeter Walls.. Page 23
2-3 Determine Total Open Area ................................................................. Page 24
2-4 Determine Open Area Percentage....................................................... Page 24
2-5 Calculate Percent Closed Area ............................................................ Page 24
2-6 Determine Flow Rate per Unit Volume................................................. Page 24
2-7 Determine Reduced Flow Rate ............................................................ Page 24
2-9 Determine Revised System Flow Rate ................................................ Page 25
2-10 Determine Quantity of Agent Required .............................................. Page 25
2-11 Determine Quantity of Agent Supplied............................................... Page 25
2-12 Layout Pipe Network and Run Hydraulic Calculation ........................ Page 26
3.2.3.3 Example Problem 3 – Enclosure with Leakage.......................................... Page 26
3.2.3.4 Example Problem 4 – Enclosure with Multiple Openings........................... Page 29
4.0 Installation Procedures.............................................................................................Section 4 – 20 Pages

4.1 General Requirements ........................................................................................................... Page 1
4.2 Cylinder Assemblies and Storage .......................................................................................... Page 1
4.2.1 Cylinder Bracketing ................................................................................................... Page 2
4.2.1.1 Cylinder Mounting Strap ............................................................................. Page 2
4.2.1.2 Cylinder Racking Assembly ........................................................................ Page 3
4.3 Pipe and Fittings..................................................................................................................... Page 3
4.3.1 Ferrous Pipe .............................................................................................................. Page 3
4.3.2 Fittings ....................................................................................................................... Page 3
4.3.3 Flanged, Welded and Miscellaneous Fittings............................................................ Page 3
4.4 Piping Distribution System...................................................................................................... Page 3
4.4.1 Threaded Connections .............................................................................................. Page 3
4.4.2 Welded Pipe Connections ......................................................................................... Page 4
4.4.3 Tube and Brazed Connections.................................................................................. Page 4
4.5 Hangers and Bracing.............................................................................................................. Page 4

TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.6 Closed Pipe Sections ............................................................................................................. Page 5

4.7 Pipe and Nozzle Installation ................................................................................................... Page 5
4.7.1 Piping Instalation ....................................................................................................... Page 5
4.7.2 Discharge Bend Installation....................................................................................... Page 6
4.7.3 Manifold Piping Installation........................................................................................ Page 6
4.7.4 Pneumatic Time Delay Installation ............................................................................ Page 6
4.7.5 Stop / Maintenance Valve Installation ....................................................................... Page 7
4.7.6 Main & Reserve Check Valve Installation ................................................................. Page 8
4.7.7 Low & High Pressure Relief Devices Installation ...................................................... Page 8
4.7.8 Pressure Switch Installation ...................................................................................... Page 9
4.7.9 Pressure Trip Installation........................................................................................... Page 9
4.7.10 Pressure Operated Siren Installation ...................................................................... Page 10
4.7.11 Selector Valve Installation ....................................................................................... Page 10
4.7.11.1 Solenoid Actuator Kit Installation............................................................... Page 11
4.7.11.1.1 Solenoid Actuator Mounting ...................................................... Page 11
4.7.11.1.2 Solenoid Installation .................................................................. Page 12
4.7.12 Wintergreen Odorizer Installation............................................................................ Page 12
4.8 Nozzle Installation ................................................................................................................ Page 12
4.9 System Installation ............................................................................................................... Page 13
4.9.1 Cylinder Instalation .................................................................................................. Page 13
4.10 Actuation Components Installation....................................................................................... Page 14
4.10.1 Master Valve Solenoid Installation .......................................................................... Page 14
4.10.2 Local Lever Actuator Installation ............................................................................. Page 16
4.10.3 Connecting Link Assembly & Installation ................................................................ Page 17
4.10.4 Electrical Installation................................................................................................ Page 17
4.10.5 Pneumatic Actuator Installation............................................................................... Page 18
4.10.5.1 Pneumatic Actuation Line Limitations ....................................................... Page 19
4.10.5.2 Master Cylinder Adapter Kit Installation .................................................... Page 19
4.10.6 Remote Pull Cable Components ............................................................................. Page 20
4.11 Disassembly Procedures...................................................................................................... Page 20
5.0 Verification and Test ...................................................................................................Section 5 – 4 Pages

5.1 Discharge Test ....................................................................................................................... Page 1
5.2 Pipe and Fittings..................................................................................................................... Page 1
5.3 Cylinders and Racking............................................................................................................ Page 1
5.4 Nozzles ................................................................................................................................... Page 1
5.5 Solenoid Actuator ................................................................................................................... Page 2
5.6 Auxiliary Devices .................................................................................................................... Page 2
5.6.1 Stop / Maintenance Valves........................................................................................ Page 2
5.6.2 Pressure Trips ........................................................................................................... Page 2
5.6.3 Pressure Switches..................................................................................................... Page 3
5.7 Training of Personnel ............................................................................................................. Page 3
5.8 Carbon Dioxide System Discharge Test ................................................................................ Page 3
5.8.1 Total Flood System Test............................................................................................ Page 4
5.8.2 Local Application System Test .................................................................................. Page 4
6.0 Maintenance and Inspection ......................................................................................Section 6 – 2 Pages

6.1 Monthly Inspections................................................................................................................ Page 1
6.2 Semi-Annual Inspections........................................................................................................ Page 1
6.3 Operation – After A Fire.......................................................................................................... Page 2
6.4 Recharging and Refurbishing The System............................................................................. Page 2
Appendix Material ........................................................................................................................................... 2 Pages

Introduction
Fike is pleased to present a Design, Installation, and Maintenance manual for our Industrial Carbon Dioxide
(hereinafter referred to as CO2) fire suppression systems. This document has been revised to incorporate the
latest design requirements found in the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard 12, “Carbon
Dioxide Extinguishing Systems”, as well as the most up-to-date information available for Fike products.
Who should read this manual?

This manual is intended for those individuals who are responsible for the design, installation, and/or
maintenance of Fike CO2 systems. Others such as architects, engineers, sales and marketing personnel, etc.
will find the information useful as well. It also allows those parties responsible for verifying the system design
to determine if the design parameters have been met.
How this manual is organized?

A Table of Contents is provided at the beginning of this manual to help the reader find information. The Table
of Contents shows the “big picture,” or “road map”; skim it to see how this manual is organized.
Section 1 - “Equipment” serves two purposes; first it describes the characteristics of CO2 and its uses and
limitations as a fire suppression agent. Second it details the equipment used in a Fike CO 2
system.
Section 2 – “Design” guides the reader step by step through the process of designing a Fike CO2 suppression
system.
Section 3 – “Sample Problems” offers real-world scenarios that demonstrate the design criteria presented in
section 2.
Section 4 – “Installation” provides in depth details on how to install the components presented in section 1. In
addition, this section covers the materials and installation standards that are approved for use
with Fike CO2 systems.
Section 5 – “Verification and Test” stipulates the items that must be inspected and tested prior to placing the
system into service.
Section 6 – “Maintenance and Inspection” identifies the minimum inspection and testing requirements to
ensure that the CO2 system is fully operational at all times.
Warranty Information
Fike provides a one-year limited manufacturer’s warranty on the product identified in this manual. Copies of
the warranty can be obtained from authorized Fike Distributors, or by contacting Fike’s Marketing Department
at (816) 229-4615. An authorized Fike Distributor using the MRA procedure must return warranty items, and
Fike must approve all returns. Contact Fike for further information regarding the MRA procedure.
Limitation of Liability
Fike Corporation cannot be held liable for any damages resulting from the use or misuse of this product.
Carbon Dioxide -i-

Manual P/N C06-018 Revision: 2
Copyright, Trademark, and Licensing Notice
All Fike documentation and hardware are copyright with all rights reserved. No part of this product may be
copied, reproduced or transmitted by any mechanical, photographic, electronic, or other method without
Fike’s prior written consent. Fike product names are trademarked; other product names, as applicable, are
trademarks of their respective holders.
Disclaimer
The information contained in this manual is as accurate as possible. This manual is intended to be an aid to
Fike authorized sales outlets charged with the installation and maintenance of Fike carbon dioxide
suppression systems, and as a operation manual for end users. Fike does not warrant that this manual is
technically correct, complete, or the product referenced herein is free from minor flaws. Fike reserves the
right to change the information contained in this manual without notice.
Quality Notice
Fike Corporation has maintained ISO 9001 certification since 1994. Prior to shipment, we thoroughly test our
products and review our documentation to assure the highest quality in all respects. In a spirit of continuous
improvement, Fike welcomes your suggestions. Please direct all suggestions or comments to Fike’s Product
Support at (800) 979-FIKE(3453). Any suggestions or comments become the property of Fike Corporation.
Warnings, Cautions, Notes, and Tips

This symbol is used in this manual to warn of possible injury or death from improper use or
application of the product under noted conditions.
This symbol warns of possible personal injury or equipment damage under noted conditions. Follow
all safety standards of professional practice and the recommendations in this manual. Using
equipment in ways other than described in this manual can present serious safety hazards or cause
equipment damage.
Tips provide advice that may save time during a procedure, or help to clarify an issue. Tips may
include additional reference.
This symbol indicates the message is important, but is not of a Warning or Caution category. These
notes can be of great benefit to the user, and should be read.
- ii - Carbon Dioxide
Revision: 2 Manual P/N C06-018
Section 1
Equipment
Carbon Dioxide
Manual P/N C06-018
SECTION 1 – EQUIPMENT
1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION

This section serves two purposes: First, it describes the characteristics of CO2 and its uses and limitations as a
fire suppression agent. In addition, it details the equipment used in a Fike CO2 system. Specific control panels,
initiating devices, and peripheral devices that would be used to actuate the system are NOT covered in this
manual. Consult the appropriate manual(s) and/or data sheets for the device(s) used for further information.
1.2 AGENT
CO2 is an odorless, colorless, electrically non-conductive, non-corrosive, and non-deteriorating inert suppression
agent. It is approximately 50% heavier than air, and is normally present in the atmosphere at about 0.03% by
volume. CO2 is instrumental in controlling respiration and other vital responses in animals and humans, but it
WILL NOT support life.
See Sections 1.3 and 1.4 for Usage Limitations and Personnel Safety Recommendations.
CO2 is a standard commercial product commonly used for carbonating beverages, fast-freezing food products,
purging pipes and tanks, medical purposes, and a multitude of additional tasks. It is also used for fire fighting
purposes: i.e. hose reels, portable hand extinguishers, and engineered fixed pipe systems. CO2 is available in
most large cities and seaports throughout the world.
CO2 extinguishes fire by reducing the oxygen content of the protected space and/or local flame front to a point
where it will not support combustion. Oxygen reduction below 16% by volume will extinguish most fires. Surface
or “flash” type fires (oils, paints, etc.) are quickly extinguished. Deep-seated or “smoldering” type fires (paper,
baled cotton, clothing, etc.) are extinguished by the prolonged action of a high concentration of CO2. Retaining
the agent within the protected space reduces the fire’s ability to re-ignite. In addition, CO2 has a cooling effect on
the surrounding atmosphere that has been found to be a benefit to fire extinguishment.
1.2.1 STORAGE AND PRESSURE
When used as a fire-fighting agent, CO2 is stored under pressure in a liquid/vapor state. There are two forms of
CO2 storage: Low Pressure, using a refrigerated storage tank, and High Pressure, using spun-steel cylinders of
smaller capacities. Fike systems utilize high-pressure storage cylinders containing CO2 at an internal pressure of
850 psig (5861 kPa) when stored at an ambient temperature of 70ºF (21ºC).
1.2.2 TEMPERATURE
The temperature of liquid CO2 is approximately –110ºF. (-78.8ºC.) as it is discharged from a nozzle. Direct
contact with the liquid agent being discharged from the nozzle(s) will have a freezing effect on objects within the
hazard and can cause frostbite and/or freezing if contact is made with the skin. The liquid phase of the agent
vaporizes quite rapidly when coming into contact with the atmosphere, thus limiting this hazard to the immediate
vicinity of the nozzle.
1.2.3 VISIBILITY
The discharge of CO2 resembles a cloud as liquid agent vaporizes. The low temperature of the agent chilling the
moisture in the atmosphere causes this cloud effect, or fogging. The fine “snow” accompanying the discharged
liquid is remnant particles of “dry ice”.
1.2.4 NOISE
The high pressure/velocity discharge from the system nozzles(s) can cause noise loud enough to be startling, but
is ordinarily insufficient to cause traumatic injury.
1.2.5 CLEANUP
CO2 vaporizes completely after discharge; whereas the cost of clean-up and peripheral damage associated with
water sprinkler systems, foam systems, and dry chemical agents can exceed the cost of the actual fire damage
itself. Therefore, the cleanup costs and downtime associated with a CO2 system discharge are negligible.
CO2 is an inert gas and most materials or equipment are totally unaffected by exposure to the agent. It is stable,
even at high temperatures, and does not decompose when subjected to open flame or extreme temperatures;
therefore, CO2 does not cause metals to deteriorate or corrode.

1.3 USE AND LIMITATIONS

CO2 systems can be used on Class “A” fires involving wood, paper, cloth, or any product that leaves a carbon ash
when it burns. Class “B” fires involving flammable liquids or vapors, and Class “C” fires involving live electrical
equipment can be protected with CO2.
1.3.1 AREAS OF USE
CO2 is particularly useful for extinguishing fires in specific hazard areas or equipment where:
1. An inert, electrically non-conductive medium is essential or desirable.
2. The cleanup or downtime of another medium would be detrimental or costly.
3. Other mediums might contaminate solvents, coolants, or other products associated with the hazard
being protected.
Some of the hazard types and equipment that can be satisfactorily protected with CO2 include:
Battery Rooms Electric Generators Ovens

Flammable Liquids Storage Coating Machines Dip Tanks & Drain Boards
Engine Test Cells Underfloor Areas Motors
Printing Presses Fur Storage Vaults Switchgear Equipment
Solvent Recovery Equipment Dust Collectors Transformer Vaults
Record Storage Wave Solder Machines Ducts
Wet Benches Spray Booths Hydraulic Pump Units
1.3.2 AREAS OF NON-USE

CO2 should NOT be used on fires involving the following materials:
a) Chemicals that contain their own oxygen supply such as: cellulose nitrate (old movie film) and
gunpowder, which are capable of rapid oxidation in the absence of air.
b) Reactive metals such as: Lithium, Sodium, Potassium, Magnesium, Titanium, Uranium, or Plutonium.
c) Metal Hydrides such as: Sodium Hydride, Lithium Hydride, Calcium Hydride, Lithium Aluminum
Hydride, and Sodium Borohydride.
While CO2 will not extinguish fires involving these products, it will not react dangerously with them or increase
their burning rate. A CO2 system designed for Total Flooding will provide protection of adjacent combustibles
when used in these situations. Local Application systems with their attendant high velocity and directed discharge
should NOT be used for these applications.
1.3.3 STATIC ELECTRICITY

CAUTION: Where CO2 may be discharged into potentially explosive atmospheres. Electrostatic charging
of non-grounded conductors may occur during the discharge of liquefied gases. These conductors may
discharge to another object causing an electric spark of sufficient energy to initiate
an explosion.

1.4 PERSONNEL SAFETY

Extinguishing concentrations of CO2 create a health hazard to area personnel. High concentrations of CO2 will
cause suffocation. In addition, fogging during and after discharge can limit visibility in protected areas. CO2 does
not contain oxygen in any form or quantity and WILL NOT sustain life.
The following human reactions to CO2 have been documented:
a) At concentrations of 3 to 4% by volume in the atmosphere, the breathing rate increases and headaches
may occur.
b) At concentrations exceeding 9% by volume, personnel can lose consciousness within minutes. This is
generally preceded by disorientation, visual disturbance, ringing in the ears, tremors, etc.
c) At concentrations greater than 20% by volume, death is likely.
The above effects are important to note as inexperienced personnel may fail to think clearly and take proper
action if suddenly exposed to relatively low concentrations of CO2.
Any person overcome by CO2 should be moved immediately to a location where plenty of fresh air is available
and artificial respiration applied, as in a case of drowning. DO NOT use CO2 as a stimulant. Call a physician or
take the patient to a hospital for examination. Persons rendered unconscious by exposure to CO2 can usually be
revived without any permanent ill effects when promptly removed from a CO2 atmosphere.
1.4.1 EXPOSURE
Direct contact with liquid CO2 or the dry ice particles associated with the agent discharge will cause severe
frostbite burns to the skin. CO2 vaporizes quite rapidly; therefore, the hazard is generally limited to the immediate
vicinity of the discharge nozzle(s).
1.4.2 AGENT MIGRATION
CO2 can drift into, and settle in adjacent spaces unless specific precautions are taken to prevent leakage from the
protected space, and/or leakage into nearby areas. Such leakage can accumulate into dangerous concentration
levels if left unattended. Consideration must be given to warning all personnel in the area of possible agent
migration. A means of ventilating the CO2 from enclosed areas, pits, etc., shall be considered when designing a
CO2 suppression system. Consult NFPA 12 for additional personnel safety guidelines.
Typically, flooded hazards and low-lying areas must be well ventilated before personnel are allowed to re-enter
the protected space(s). Under some circumstances, it may be necessary to provide self-contained breathing
apparatus (SCBA) to all persons responsible for investigating the event. When all traces of the fire have been
extinguished and the possibility of re-ignition eliminated, thoroughly ventilate the hazard to ensure that only fresh
air is remaining in the protected space. When there is a question as to the presence of CO2 after a discharge, DO
NOT ENTER. Rely on the fire department or other responsible authorities to determine when it is safe to re-enter.

1.4.3 SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS

Safeguards MUST be provided to ensure the safety of personnel occupying areas in which the atmosphere could
be made hazardous from the discharge of CO2. The following list taken from NFPA 12 contains safety
recommendations that we urge the installer to follow with each installation.
a) Provide open aisle ways and exit routes. Keep them clear and well marked at all times.
b) Provide emergency lighting and directional signs to ensure quick and safe evacuation.
c) Provide audible/visual alarms inside and outside all protected areas that operate immediately upon the
detection of a fire condition. Delay the CO2 discharge and the actuation of door closing devices for a
sufficient time period to allow evacuation of the affected area(s).
d) Provide ONLY outward swinging, self-closing doors at all exit points from the hazard area(s). Where such
doors could be latched or secured, provide “panic” hardware.
e) Provide continuous alarms at the entrances to all protected spaces that will operate until the atmosphere
has been returned to normal and the control panel has been reset.
f) Provide warning and instructional signs at all entrances to, and inside of, each protected space. These
signs should inform persons inside, or entering into the protected space, that a CO2 system is protecting
the area. These signs may also contain additional information or instructions pertinent to the conditions
of the specific hazard.
g) Provide for the prompt discovery and rescue of any person(s) trapped or rendered unconscious in all
protected areas. This is accomplished by having all affected areas searched by trained personnel
equipped with the proper breathing and rescue equipment. Only personnel trained in its use and in
rescue techniques including artificial respiration should perform this task.
h) Provide instructions and drills for all personnel within, or in the near vicinity of the protected area. This
instruction should include all maintenance and construction personnel who may be brought into the area.
This training will ensure that the area personnel will respond correctly, should the CO2 system operate.
i) Provide a means of prompt ventilation of the protected area(s). Forced ventilation will often be
necessary. Care must be taken to ensure that the CO2 atmosphere is dissipated and not merely moved
to another location.
j) CO2 is much heavier than air and can collect in pits, cellars, and other areas that lie below the floor level
of the protected space. Care must be taken when entering these areas after a discharge.
k) Provide all other steps and safeguards that a careful study of each CO2 system application indicates are
necessary to prevent injury or death.

1.5 CYLINDER ASSEMBLY

The factory filled cylinders contain the agent used in a Fike CO2 fire suppression system. A
single cylinder may be used or multiple cylinders can be manifolded together to obtain
the required quantity of agent for total flooding or local application methods.
The cylinders are of spun steel construction manufactured in accordance with DOT
specifications. They are available in three different capacities - 50 lb. (22.7 kg), 75 lb.
(34 kg), and 100 lb. (45.4 kg) sizes. Each cylinder is factory filled to capacity with CO2 to
a pressure of 850 psig at 70ºF (5861 kPa at 21ºC). Partial fills of cylinders are not
allowed.
The cylinders are equipped with a shipping cap attached to the threaded collar on the
neck of each cylinder in accordance with DOT and OSHA requirements. This cap
entirely encloses and protects the valve while in transit. The cap must only be removed
after the cylinder(s) is secured. After removal, caps must be retained for reuse. Cylinder
straps and racking used to secure the container(s) must be ordered separately.
See Sections 4.2 and 4.9.1 for cylinder handling and installation procedures.
WARNING: Never handle, move, weigh, or transport a cylinder (full or empty)

without the shipping cap firmly in place. Serious injury and/or damage can
result.
Each cylinder is equipped with a pressure seat-type cylinder valve (p/n C85-010)
designed to hold the agent in the cylinder until actuated. The valve can be actuated
electrically, manually, and/or pneumatically with approved valve actuation components
(See Section 1.7). A siphon is provided with each valve to ensure complete discharge of
the cylinder contents.
Ambient temperature limitations for cylinder storage ranges from 0º to 130ºF (-18º to 54ºC) for total
flooding applications and 32º to 120ºF (0º to 49ºC) for local applications.
CYLINDER DATA
Assembly P/N C70-050 C70-075 C70-100

Fill Capacity 50 75 100
lb. (kg) (22.7) (34.0) (45.4)
Dimension A* 8.50 9.25 10.50
in. (cm) (21.6) (23.5) (26.7)
Dimension B* 51.0 56.0 58.0
in. (cm) (129.5) (142.2) (147.3)
Dimension C* 56.625 61.625 63.625
in. (cm) (143.8) (156.5) (161.6)
Approx. Wt, 165 225 300
lbs. (kg) (72.6) (99.8) (149.7)
DOT Spec. 3AA2015 3AA2300 3AA2300
* All dimensions are approximate

1.6 CYLINDER VALVE ASSEMBLY

The cylinder valve (p/n C85-010) is a pressure seat type where the valve is held
closed by the pressure of the agent contained in the cylinder. The valve body is of
forged brass and consists of a main valve seat, discharge outlet, pressure relief disc,
pilot valve, and pressure actuation ports. A cross section of the valve is shown
below.
The discharge outlet provides the connection point for the flexible discharge bend,
and serves as the actuation port for slave valves. A pressure relief disc is
incorporated into the valve assembly and provides pressure relief at 2,650 - 3,000
psi (18271 – 20684 kPa). The relief disc directs the escaping pressure to avoid
damage or movement of the cylinder. A stainless steel pilot valve serves as the fill
port for charging of the cylinder, and serves as the actuator port for the electrical and
manual actuation functions. Two separate pressure ports are machined into the
valve (internal pressure port and top pressure port). The pressure ports are used to
route CO2 pressure to the top of the valve piston for valve actuation.
Each valve is shipped from the factory in a slave configuration. The pressure
generated within the distribution manifold by the discharge of the master valve(s)
actuates the slave valves. The minimum pressure required to open the valve is 100-110
psig (689-758 kPa) at 70oF (21oC). A minimum of one slave valve must be converted to
a master valve in order for the system to operate.
See Section 1.7 for valve actuation components.
Valve Cross Section

1.7 MASTER CYLINDER ACTUATION COMPONENTS

Fike CO2 systems require that a minimum of one slave valve be converted to a master valve in order for the
system to operate. Depending upon the hazard characteristics, the cylinders can be actuated electrically,
manually, and/or pneumatically. Installing one of the following actuation components onto a slave valve creates a
master valve. These components are field assembled to the cylinder valve prior to placing the system into
service.
The number of master valves required for a system varies depending upon the total number of cylinders used,
and the distribution manifold configuration. In general, a single master valve is required for a system of one or
two cylinders; two master valves (minimum) are required for systems with three or more cylinders per NFPA 12.
For complex systems, consult with Fike for recommendations on the number of master valves.
1.7.1 ELECTRIC ACTUATION
The master actuation package provides an automatic means of
discharging the CO2 system when interfaced through a Fike releasing
control panel. The master actuator package is available in two operating
voltages: 12 VDC (p/n C85-113) and 24 VDC (p/n C85-114). Each
package consists of the following components:
x Stainless steel, explosion-proof, two port solenoid valve
approved for use in Class I, Group C & D, and Class II, Group
E, F, & G hazardous locations
x Emergency manual lever actuator (See 1.7.1.1)
x (2) braided steel flexible hoses
x Solenoid valve connector, SST
x (2) ¼” NPT x 90o brass elbows
x ¼” NPT brass tee
The 12 VDC solenoid actuator requires a minimum of 0.83 amps for its operation. The 24 VDC solenoid actuator
requires a minimum of 0.42 amps for its operation. Both actuator packages contain a standard ½ inch threaded
female straight connection for electrical conduit hookup.
Systems with two cylinders or less require one 24 VDC solenoid actuator. Systems with three or more
cylinders require two 12 VDC solenoid actuators.
See Section 4.10 for actuator package assembly and installation procedures.
1.7.1.1 EMERGENCY MANUAL LEVER ACTUATOR

The emergency manual lever actuator is provided with each master
actuation package, and provides a means to manually actuate the control
valve per NFPA 12. Manual discharge is accomplished by removal of a
standard “pull-pin” with safety seal and operating the lever actuator ¼ turn
to the OPEN position. This action releases the pressure necessary to open
the valve(s) and discharge the contents of all the system cylinders.
Systems having two manual lever actuators must be interconnected

with a connecting link assembly to allow both master valves to be
discharged concurrently with a single operation of the manual
actuators (See Section 1.7.3).

1.7.2 MANUAL ACTUATION

The local lever actuator (p/n C85-119) provides a manual means
of discharging the CO2 system when an automatic detection and
control system is not desired. Manual discharge is accomplished
by removing the “ring-pin”; thus breaking the plastic seal and
operating the lever ¼ turn to the OPEN position. This action
releases the pressure necessary to open the valve(s) and
discharge the contents of all the system cylinders.
Systems having two local lever actuators must be Local Lever Actuator
interconnected with a connecting link assembly to allow
both master valves to be discharged concurrently with a
single operation of the local lever actuators (See Section
1.7.3).
See Section 4.10.2 for lever actuator installation procedures.
1.7.3 CONNECTING LINK ASSEMBLY

The connecting link assembly (p/n C70-228) provides a
means to interconnect manual lever actuators where two
master valves are provided. This allows the master valves to
be discharged concurrently.
See Section 4.10.3 for connecting link installation
procedures.
Connecting Link Assembly
1.7.4 PNEUMATIC ACTUATION

The pneumatic actuator assembly (p/n C70-233) provides a pneumatic means of
discharging the CO2 system when an automatic detection and control system is not
desired. The assembly consists of a machined brass valve, stainless steel lever
mechanism, and a spun steel container finished with red gloss, baked enamel
paint. The pneumatic actuator includes a pressure gauge to monitor the nitrogen
pressure in the cylinder, and a safety relief device that will rupture if the pressure in
the cylinder rises to 2,650 – 3,000 psi (18,270 – 20,685 kPa) per NFPA 12.

1.7.4 PNEUMATIC ACTUATION - CONTINUED

Manual discharge is accomplished by first removing the pull pin, followed
by operation of the manual lever on top of the valve. This action releases
the pressure necessary to open the valve(s) and discharge the contents of
all the system cylinders. The pressure is routed to the cylinder valve
through stainless steel tubing or galvanized pipe.
See Section 4.10.5 for actuator installation procedures.
1.7.5 LATCH DOOR PULL BOX (P/N C70-242)

The Latch Door Pull Box is used to provide mechanical operation of the
Local Lever Actuator from a remote location. The Latch Door Pull Box has
a solid cast brass door that must be opened in order to access the pull
handle. The pull handle is attached to a 1/16” (2 mm) diameter stainless
steel actuation cable. A 3/8” NPT female opening is provided in the back Pneumatic Actuator
of the enclosure for connection of the cable and piping system. The Pull
Box is coated with a red, corrosion-resistant, polyurethane paint.
A Corner Pulley may be attached directly to the back of the Pull Box if an immediate change of direction is
necessary. Up to 100 ft. (30.5 m) of cable and a maximum of fifteen (15) Corner Pulleys may be used for each
cable run. No more than four Pull Boxes may be used to operate any system.
NOTE: Do not locate a Pull Box where it will can be cut off or made inaccessible in the event of a fire.
FOR FIRE
OPEN DOOR
PULL HANDLE HARD

1.7.6 CORNER PULLEY (P/N C70-241)

Corner Pulleys are required on Fike Carbon Dioxide systems whenever a
remote Latch Door Pull Box cable requires a change in direction. Corner
Pulleys are installed as part of the stainless steel cable system to provide 90o
directional changes with minimal loss of force and elimination of induced cable
kinking.
The Corner Pulley is made of brass and threaded for 3/8” NPT pipe
connections. Up to fifteen (15) Corner Pulleys may be used per Pull Box.
1.7.7 STAINLESS STEEL CABLE (P/N C02-1344 = 50 ft.) (P/N C02-1343 = 250 ft.)
The Stainless Steel Cable is used to mechanically connect the Latch Door Pull Box to the Local Lever Manual
Actuator. The cable is a woven wire rope, 1/16” (2 mm) diameter, constructed of many individual wire threads
woven into a 7 x 7 matrix for added strength and flexibility. The Stainless Steel Cable should be enclosed in 3/8”
NPT piping.
1.7.7.1 STAINLESS STEEL CABLE ACCESSORIES

The Stainless Steel Cable is attached to the various devices (Pull Box, Cable Junction Box, Stop/Selector Valve,
etc.) using Oval Crimps (P/N C02-1345) that are compression fit devices which are installed using a Cable Crimp
Tool (P/N C02-1348). A removable Cable Clamp (P/N C02-1347) is also available.
1.7.8 CABLE JUNCTION BOX ASSEMBLY (P/N C70-239)

The Cable Junction Box Assembly allows manual activation of the Local Level Actuator from up to four (4)
locations. The inlet side has four 3/8” NPT connections, and the outlet side has a single 3/8” NPT connection.
20.75"
(527 mm)
WIRE LOOP (REQUIRES OVAL CRIMP)
DIRECTION OF PULL
5.00"
(127 mm)
(COVER NOT SHOWN)
5.00" OVAL CABLE CRIMP (C02-1345)

(127 mm)
The cables from each Latch Door Pull Box are routed through the inlet of the Multiple Pull Control Box, while the
outlet cable is routed to the Local Lever Actuator as required. Each inlet and outlet cable is fitted with an Oval
Crimp/Sleeve (P/N C02-1345), and the connection is crimped as shown above using a wire loop fed back through
the Oval Crimp (Sleeve). Care must be taken to attach the inlet and outlet cables no more than five (5) inches
(127 mm) from the outlet end of the Control Box. This will ensure that the cable is free to move through its full
range of travel.
The Multiple Pull Control Box is equipped with an easily removable cover that allows easy access to the cable
assembly. The body and cover are made of carbon steel and painted with a corrosion-resistant, red polyurethane
paint.

1.8 FLEXIBLE DISCHARGE BEND

The flexible discharge bend (p/n C70-226) is used to provide the
interconnection between the CO2 cylinder and the distribution piping
and/or discharge manifold. A discharge bend must be supplied for each
CO2 cylinder. The discharge bend is equipped with an internal check
valve. When connected to a cylinder valve, the check valve is held open
and allows the cylinder contents to be discharged. When disconnected
from the cylinder, the check valve is not restrained and will prevent the
back-flow of agent from the manifold should a discharge occur. All
discharge bends are hydrostatically tested to 2,500 psi (17,239 kPa) per
NFPA 12.
See Section 4.7.2 and 4.9.1 for discharge bend installation procedures.
CAUTION: The discharge bend MUST be connected to the cylinder valve for the system to be
operational. Bends should be minimized and without kinks which could damage the hose.
Flexible Discharge Bend

1.9 CYLINDER MOUNTING

CO2 cylinders must be adequately mounted and suitably supported in order to comply with the requirements of
NFPA, OSHA, DOT, etc. Fike offers cylinder straps and cylinder racking components to comply with these
requirements.
1.9.1 CYLINDER STRAP
Cylinder straps are used to secure single cylinders in place per the
requirements stated above. The cylinder straps may be secured to any
structurally solid surface. However, anchoring into plaster or any other
facing material IS NOT acceptable. The straps are made of steel with a red
gloss, baked enamel finish.
See Section 4.2.1.1 for cylinder strap installation procedures.
Part
Description Dim. “A”
Number
C70-211 Strap, 50 lb. (22.7kg) Cylinder 10” (254 mm)
C70-212 Strap, 75 lb. (34.0kg) Cylinder 10-3/4” (273 mm)
C70-213 Strap, 100 lb. (45.4kg) Cylinder 12” (305 mm)
1.9.2 CYLINDER RACKING

Fike offers three standard cylinder racking configurations: Single-Row, Double-Row, and Double-Row / Back-to-
Back. The racking is designed to restrain the cylinders, provide for cylinder weighing, and offer a place for the
discharge manifold piping to be installed and securely fastened. The racking components are fabricated from
Uni-Strut channel and galvanized brackets. Cylinder saddles, fabricated from cold-rolled steel with a galvanized
finish, are provided to secure the cylinders to the racking. All racking configurations must be field assembled.
Complete assembly drawings for each of the basic racking assemblies are provided in
Appendix A.
See Section 4.2.1.2 for racking assembly and installation procedures.

1.9.2.1 SINGLE-ROW RACKING

The single-row rack will secure the allotted number of
cylinders in a single row, which allows access to each
cylinder in the system from the front only. Single-row racks C70-040-30A
are available in 2-to-6 cylinder capacities, with rack (Shown)
extensions of 2-to-6 cylinders available for each. The
cylinders are mounted on 12” (305 mm) centers with a
C70-040-40
maximum overall rack height of 86” (2184 mm).
(Shown)
Single-Row Racking
Basic Rack Description Add-on Rack
P/N P/N
C70-040-20 2-Cylinder Rack C70-040-20A
C70-040-60 6-Cylinder Rack C70-040-60A Single Row
Racking Assembly

1.9.2.2 DOUBLE-ROW RACKING C70-040-33A

The double-row rack will secure the allotted number of
(Shown)
cylinders in two rows, one row behind the other, which allows
for storage of a large number of cylinders in a relatively small
space. Access to the rear cylinder row requires the removal of C70-044-40
the front cylinder row. Care must be exercised to protect (Shown)
removed cylinders from falling or tipping over during handling.
Double-row racks are available in 4-to-12 cylinder capacities,
with rack extensions of 4-to-12 cylinders available for each.
The cylinders are mounted on 12” (305 mm) centers with a
maximum overall rack height of 86” (2184 mm).
For Main & Reserve supply applications, it is

recommended that the main bank be located on the
front row to allow easier access after a discharge.
Double Row
Racking Assembly
Double-Row Racking
P/N P/N
1.9.2.3 DOUBLE-ROW / BACK-TO-BACK RACKING

The double-row / back-to-back rack will secure the allotted
number of cylinders in two rows, but requires access from C70-040-44A
both sides of the rack. This is a free-standing rack (Shown)
configuration that has the benefit of allowing free access to
both rows of cylinders. Back-to-back racks are available in C70-040-B33
4-to-12 cylinder capacities, with rack extensions of 4-to-12 (Shown)
cylinders available for each. The cylinders are mounted on
12” (305 mm) centers with a maximum overall rack height of
86” (2184 mm).
Double-Row / Back-to-Back Racking

P/N P/N
C70-040-B22 4-Cylinder Rack C70-040-B22A
C70-040-B55 10-Cylinder Rack C70-040-B55A Back to Back
C70-040-B66 12-Cylinder Rack C70-040-B66A Racking Assembly

1.10 CHECK VALVES

Two types of check valves are used on a Fike CO2 system. The larger
size check valves (1/2” through 2” NPT) are used to isolate the main
and reserve cylinders in a system with a connected reserve. The valve
prevents pressurization of the reserve bank of cylinders by blocking the
flow of agent from the main system discharge piping. This allows a
common discharge manifold and piping network to be used.
English Metric
Nom. Dim. Dim. Nom. Dim. Dim.
Part
Size “A” “B” Size “A” “B”
Number
(NPT) (in) (in) (NPT) (cm) (cm)
C02-1204 1/2” 2.75 1.00 1/2” 7.0 2.5
C02-1205 3/4” 2.98 1.25 3/4” 7.6 3.2
C02-1206 1” 3.64 1.63 1” 9.2 4.1
Main/Reserve
C02-1207 1-1/2” 4.63 2.50 1-1/2” 11.8 3.4 Check Valve
C02-1240 2” 5.85 3.00 2” 14.9 7.6
The smaller check valves (1/4”) are used in the pneumatic

actuation piping/tubing system to prevent backpressure from
discharging out of the open piping/tubing if the pneumatic actuator Pneumatic Actuator
is removed for service. If multiple remote pneumatic actuators are Check Valves
utilized, one check valve is required for each. The working
pressure rating for these check valves is 3,000 psi (20,685 kPa),
and the cracking pressure is 10 psi (69 kPa).
The check valves have a brass body with female pipe threads; with the exception of the ¼” tube version, which
has a stainless steel body. The valve has a Buna-N seat with a working pressure rating of 3,000 psi at 100oF.
(20,685 kPa at 37.7oC), and a cracking pressure is 10 psi (69 kPa). The maximum recommended service
temperature is 400oF (204oC).
See Section 4.7.6 and 4.10.5 for check valve installation procedures.

1.11 STOP/MAINTENANCE VALVE

The stop/maintenance valve is used to prevent discharge of CO2 from
the system discharge nozzles while the system is “locked out” for
maintenance or other purposes. The Stop Valves are constructed of
carbon steel with a stainless steel ball, Lubetal¥ seats and a Buna-N
body seal. The ¼ turn valve handle can be locked in either the “Open”
or “Closed” positions. Locks and keys are not provided with the stop
valves.
The stop valves are provided with a direct-drive microswitch (normally
open or normally closed) rated 5 amps @ 24 VDC that should be
connected to the system control panel to supervise the valve’s position
per NFPA 12. The micro switch is U.L. listed and hazardous rated for
Class I, Group C & D, and Class II, Groups E, F & G. This switch is not
F.M. approved for hazardous locations. The switch housing is
constructed of anodized aluminum, and a visual position indicator shows
the current position of the valve at all times.
The valves are available in nominal pipe sizes ½” through 1-1/2”, and
can be mounted in either the horizontal or vertical position. However,
the recommended mounting configuration is in the horizontal position.
To meet the requirements of NFPA 12, all systems that are installed in Normally Occupied, Occupiable or
Local Application hazards that can expose personnel to concentrations exceeding 4% for more than 1
minute must install a stop/maintenance valve.
See Section 4.7.5 for valve installation procedures.
Stop/Maintenance Valve
Stop / Maintenance Valve Specifications

Part Nominal Dim. “A” Dim. “B” Dim. “C”
Number Size (NPT) In. (mm) In. (mm) In. (mm)
C02-1210 ½” 7.50 (191) 4.71 (120) 2.98 (76)
C02-1211 ¾” 7.59 (193) 4.71 (120) 3.05 (77)
C02-1212 1” 8.19 (208) 7.28 (185) 3.56 (90)
C02-1213 1-1/2” 8.88 (226) 9.53 (242) 3.74 (95)

1.12 PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES

The following pressure relief devices must be used to avoid pressure build-up or over pressurization in the piping
network where a closed section of piping may exist due to use of:
x Stop Maintenance Valves
x Pneumatic Time Delays
x Check Valves
x Selector Valves
1.12.1 HEADER SAFETY RELIEF

The header safety relief (p/n C70-231) is a pressure relief device designed to
prevent the entrapment of liquid CO2 in sections of closed piping per NFPA 12.
The header safety relief is fabricated from brass stock and is installed in a ½” NPT
tee or coupling. A pressure increase to 2,400 – 2,800 psi (16,457 – 19,305 kPa)
will cause the internal disc to rupture, thus venting the pressure to atmosphere.
See Sections 4.6 and 4.7.7 for header safety installation procedure.
Header Safety
1.12.2 HEADER VENT PLUG

The header vent plug (p/n C02-1363) is a pressure relief device designed to vent small amounts of leakage from
a closed manifold and piping configuration per NFPA 12. This prevents pressure from building within the closed
manifold and pipe section that could subsequently provide enough backpressure to open the cylinder valves.
The header vent plug is a ½” NPT brass pipe plug with a 0.031” (0.8 mm) diameter bleed hole drilled through. An
insignificant amount of CO2 leakage will occur during a system discharge.
See Section 4.7.7 for header vent installation procedure.
Header Vent

1.13 WINTERGREEN ODORIZER

The wintergreen odorizer (p/n 02-9868) is used to inject a small amount of wintergreen scent into the
carbon dioxide agent as it flows through the piping network, discharging into the hazard area
carrying a scent of wintergreen.
The purpose of the wintergreen scent is to warn personnel that the area contains a concentration of
carbon dioxide and precautions must be taken, either to leave the area immediately or secure proper
breathing apparatus. The internal ampoule containing the oil of wintergreen must be replaced and
the broken glass in the device must be cleaned out after each system discharge.
This device is made of carbon steel, painted red with a 1” NPT male thread.
minute must install 1 of the following: an olfactory device (wintergreen odorizer), carbon dioxide detectors
or oxygen detectors or have an established and enforceable confined space entry procedure for the space
being protected.
1.14 WEIGH BEAM SCALE ASSEMBLY

The weigh beam scale assembly (p/n C70-229) allows the weight of the
CO2 in a cylinder to be determined without removing it from the rack.
The assembly is a one-piece device that includes a lifting yoke, weigh
beam, and dial scale.
To use the weigh beam scale assembly, the CO2 cylinders must be
located in a cylinder rack that has a weigh rail attached. In addition, the
flexible discharge bend(s) must be removed from the valve(s), and the
cylinder clamps must be loosened to allow the cylinders to move
vertically.
The weigh beam scale assembly is readied for use by placing the eye-
hook over the weigh rail and installing the lifting yoke under the cylinder
valve. The operator then lifts the cylinder by pulling down on the eye ring
attached to the scale. When the weigh bar is in the horizontal position
and the cylinder has been stabilized, the cylinder weight is obtained
directly from the dial scale.
Scale Range: 20 to 600 lbs. (9.1 to 272.2 kg.)
J-HOOK WEIGH BAR
CYLINDER 56
0
580
600 20 40
60
80
LIFTING YOLK
0
54
10
0
0
52
12
0
Protection Systems
500
Division Fike Corporation

140
480
160
460
180
440
200
1 Graduation = 2.5lbs.
420
Capacity: 615lbs. x 2.5lbs.

22
40
0
0
24
38
0 NOT LEGAL 0
360 FOR TRADE 26
340 280
320 300
LIFTING RING
SCALE FACE
Weigh Beam Scale Assembly

1.15 DISCHARGE NOZZLES

Fike CO2 systems have a series of discharge nozzles designed to deliver the agent into the hazard. Nozzle
selection depends on the hazard and location to be protected.
See Section 4.8 for nozzle installation procedures.
1.15.1 BAFFLE NOZZLE
The Baffle Nozzle (p/n C80-030) is used for total flooding applications. Each nozzle
provides a 180o discharge pattern that makes them suitable for location around the
perimeter of the hazard.
The nozzle is made of brass and is available in a ½” NPT size with discharge orifice
codes ranging from 1 through 13.5. Nozzle Strainers (p/n C02-1181) are required on any
nozzle with an orifice code of 3 or smaller.
See Section 2.5.2 for nozzle flow rates, spacing, etc.
1/2" NPT
DISCHARGE ORIFICE
2.3125" REF.
(59 mm)
1.75" 2.125" REF.

(45 mm) (54 mm)
Baffle Nozzle
1.15.2 RADIAL NOZZLE
The Radial Nozzle (p/n C80-041 through C80-046) is used for Total Flooding
applications. The 180o nozzles can be located around perimeter of the hazard, and 360o
nozzles can be located in the center.
The nozzle is machined from brass and is available in ½”, ¾”, and 1” NPT sizes. Nozzle
discharge orifice codes range from 3.5 through 25 depending upon the nozzle size and
flow rate required. Nozzle Strainers (p/n C02-1181) are required for any nozzle with a
discharge orifice of 7 or smaller.
Nozzle Dimensions
1/2” NPT 3/4” NPT 1” NPT
1.88 2.19 2.50
Dim. “A”
(48 mm) (56 mm) (64 mm)
1.00 1.25 1.50
Dim. “B”
(25 mm) (32 mm) (38 mm)
1.00 1.25 1.50
Dim. “C”
Radial Nozzle (25 mm) (32 mm) (38 mm)

1.15.3 VENT NOZZLE

The Vent Nozzle (p/n C80-020-B or C80-020-S) is used for total flooding
applications protecting ductwork, electrical compartments, collecting bins, or any
other application that requires direct mounting of the nozzle and a narrow discharge
pattern. The Vent Nozzle is made of brass or stainless steel, and is available in ½”
NPT size with discharge orifice codes ranging from 1 through 13.5. Nozzle
Strainers (p/n C02-1181) are required for any nozzle with a discharge orifice of 3 or
smaller.
1/2" NPT
SUPPLY END 1/2" NPT
1.69"
(43 mm)
Vent Nozzle
1.15.3.1 VENT NOZZLE FLANGE MOUNTING KIT

The Vent Nozzle Flange Mounting Kit (p/n C80-1013) is available as an option for
mounting a Vent Nozzle directly to the surface of an enclosure, hood, ductwork, etc.
A Teflon sealing disc (p/n C80-1011) is provided to prevent the discharge orifice
from becoming plugged when the nozzle is used in a dirty environment. A new
sealing disc is required after each system discharge.
MOUNTING SURFACE
9/72" DIA. (7 mm)
MOUNTING HOLE
3/16" SHEET METAL SCREW DISCHARGE CUTOUT
TYP. OF 3 #8 LOCKWASHER 1.5" (38 mm) MINIMUM
VENT NOZZLE TYP. OF 3 2.0" (51 mm) MAXIMUM
BODY
#8-32 X 1/4" SCREW
TYP. OF 3
SEALING DISC
3.00"
"O"-RING
MTG. FLANGE 2.5" (64 mm) BOLT CIRCLE
2.188"
(56 mm)
Flange Mounting Kit

1.15.4 ”S” TYPE NOZZLE

The “S” type nozzle (p/n C80-010-B or C80-010-S) can be used for Local Application
and Total Flooding systems. The nozzle is made of zinc-plated steel and a brass or
stainless steel nozzle orifice insert. The nozzle is available in a ½” NPT size with
orifice codes ranging from 1 through 11. Nozzle Strainers (p/n C02-1181) are
required for any nozzle with a discharge orifice of 3 or smaller.
1/2" NPT
5.25"
(133 mm)
3.875" DIA
(95 mm)
“S” Nozzle
1.15.4.1 ”S” TYPE NOZZLE FLANGE MOUNTING KIT

The “S” type nozzle flange mounting kit (p/n C80-1018) is available as an
option for mounting a “S” Type Nozzle directly to the surface of an
enclosure, hood, ductwork, etc. A Teflon sealing disc (p/n C80-1007) is
provided for the purpose of preventing the discharge orifice from becoming
plugged when the nozzle is used in a dirty environment. A new sealing disc
is required after each system discharge.
“S” Nozzle
Flange Mounting Kit

1.16 PNEUMATIC OPERATED ACCESSORIES

This Section identifies the pneumatically operated accessories that can be used on Fike CO2 systems.
1.16.1 PRESSURE TRIP ASSEMBLY

The pressure trip assembly (p/n C70-230) is used to provide a pneumatic release
function for operation of mechanical closer on doors, ductwork, valves, etc. The
pressure trip assembly is operated pneumatically using the CO2 pressure from the
piping network. Pulling the manual release ring can be used to manually actuate the
pressure trip.
The pressure trip assembly is attached to the CO2 piping network via the two ¼” NPT
connections located on either side of the body, and will operate properly, regardless
of which side is chosen as the inlet. The outlet port is connected to the next pressure
trip, or plugged with a ¼” NPT pipe plug if another pressure trip is not necessary.
The minimum operating pressure required is 75 psi (517.1 kPa) with a maximum
load rating of 100 lbs. (45.4 kg) on the retaining pin.
See Section 4.7.9 for pressure trip installation procedure.
Pressure Trip

1.16.2 PRESSURE SWITCH

The pressure switch (p/n C70-202) is used to provide a positive pneumatic
confirmation to the control system that the CO2 has been discharged. When a CO2
system is discharged manually, the pressure switch provides the input to the control
system needed to activate various audio/visual warning devices and auxiliary relays,
which would not be activated otherwise. The switch is operated pneumatically using
the CO2 pressure in the piping network through a ¼” NPT connection. The switch is a
double-pole, single-throw unit rated for 15 amps @ 125VAC, or 8 amps @ 240VAC.
The conduit inlet is a ½” NPT connection.
The explosion-proof version (p/n C02-1231) is a double-pole, double-throw device
housed in an explosion rated housing. Any electrical load connected to this switch
must not exceed the switch rating of 10 amps @125VAC or 5 amps @ 240VAC. The
conduit inlet is ¾” NPT. This switch is not F.M. approved for hazardous locations.
The minimum activation pressure for the pressure switch is 100 psi (690 kPa).
The pressure switch MUST be reset prior to resetting the control panel.
See Section 4.7.8 for pressure switch installation procedure.
C70-202
RAINTIGHT
Approved
PUSH PLUNGER IN
C02-1074
Pressure Switch

1.16.3 PNEUMATIC TIME DELAY

The purpose of the pneumatic time delay is to pneumatically retard the discharge of
CO2 for a specific period of time. This delay is primarily intended to allow personnel
time to leave the discharge area; even if the system is discharged manually. It also
allows additional time for ventilation and equipment shutdown.
The actual time delay period is pre-set at the factory. Fike offers both 30 second
(p/n C70-235), and 60 second (p/n C70-237) pneumatic time delays. Each time
delay is equipped with a manual override lever that allows the user to manually
bypass the time delay; thus resulting in the immediate discharge of CO2. The inlet
and outlet ports of the pneumatic time delay are both ¾” NPT connections.
The pneumatic time delay operates at temperatures ranging from 0oF to
+130oF (18oC to 54.4oC), and the actual delay times may vary with the
ambient temperature.
To meet the requirements of NFPA 12, all systems that are installed in
Normally Occupied, Occupiable or Local Application hazards that can expose
personnel to concentrations exceeding 4% for more than 1 minute must
install a pneumatic time delay.
See Section 4.7.4 for time delay installation procedure.
MATERIALS:
Valve – Brass
Lever – Stainless Steel
Cylinder – Spun Steel
M A N U A L O V E R R ID E L E V E R
3 .5 0 " M A X
(8 9 m m )
3 /4 " N P T
3 /4 " N P T
2 2 .2 5 "
(5 6 5 m m )
4 .2 5 " D IA .
(1 0 8 m m )
Pneumatic Time Delay

1.16.4 PNEUMATICALLY OPERATED SIREN

The pneumatically operated siren (p/n C02-1230) is used to warn personnel
of a CO2 system discharge. The CO2 pressure from the system operates the
siren, which is connected to the system piping using the ½” NPT connection
located at the base of the siren. The CO2 spins the turbine and sounds the
siren throughout the duration of the discharge.
The siren operates at an approximate decibel level of 90 dB @ 10 ft
(3.3 m). The flow rate of CO2 necessary to drive the siren is 6.0 lbs
(2.7 kg) per minute and may need to be accounted for when
determining the system flow rate and overall storage quantity required
(See Section 2). The siren is constructed of brass and finished with
red, gloss paint.
minute must install a pneumatic operated siren.
See Section 4.7.10 for siren installation procedure.
3.875" DIA. 2.75" DIA.

(98 mm) (70 mm)
13/64" DIA (5 mm) MTG. HOLE
1/2" NPT
3.563"
(90 mm)
7.50"
(191 mm)
Pneumatic Siren

1.17 INSTRUCTIONAL SIGNS

Instructional signs shall be provided to inform personnel of potential hazards they may face when operating
certain devices or working within areas protected by the CO2 system per NFPA 12. The signs are made from
flame retardant, Lexan polycarbonate material. Each sign has an adhesive backing for mounting purposes. The
warning / caution lettering and backgrounds meet the requirements of ANSI Z535.
minute must install the proper warning and caution signs.
1.17.1 WARNING SIGN – VACATE

IMMEDIATELY
This sign (p/n 02-11397) shall be used in every
protected space. The sign warns all personnel
WARNING
working within the space that the room is
protected by a CO2 system, and that they should Carbon dioxide gas
evacuate the area immediately when the alarm
operates. The sign is 14.0” (356 mm) wide by 7.8”
can cause injury or death.
(198 mm) tall, with black lettering on an orange When alarm operates,
background. vacate immediately.
1.17.2 WARNING SIGN – DO NOT ENTER UNTIL

VENTILATED
This sign (p/n 02-11398) shall be used at every WARNING
entrance into protected space. The sign warns all
personnel that if the alarm has been activated the
CO2 system serving the space has discharged, Carbon dioxide gas
and that they should not enter the space until it can cause injury or death.
has been ventilated. The sign is 14.0” (356 mm) When alarm operates,
wide by 7.8” (198 mm) tall, with black lettering on do not enter
an orange background. until ventilated.
WARNING
1.17.3 WARNING SIGN – WHEN ALARM
OPERATES
This sign (p/n 02-11399) shall be used at every
entrance to protected space for systems provided
with a wintergreen odorizer. The sign warns all Carbon dioxide gas
personnel not to enter the space until area has can cause injury or death.
been properly ventilated. The sign is 14” (356 When alarm operates or
mm) wide by 7.8” (198 mm) tall, with black lettering wintergreen scent is
on an orange background. detected, do not enter
until ventilated.
.

1.17.4 WARNING SIGN – NEARBY SPACE COLLECTION

This sign (p/n 02-11400) shall be used in
every nearby space where carbon dioxide
could accumulate to hazardous levels. The
sign cautions personnel that CO2 from a
WARNING
discharge in a nearby space may accumulate in
this area, and the area should be evacuated
immediately when the alarm operates. The sign Carbon dioxide gas discharge
is 14” (356 mm) wide by 7.8” (198 mm) tall, with into nearby space can collect
black letting on a orange background. here. When alarm operates,
vacate immediately.
Carbon dioxide gas
1.17.5 WARNING SIGN – VENTILATE BEFORE ENTERING

This sign (p/n 02-11401) shall be used outside
WARNING
each entrance to carbon dioxide storage rooms.
The sign cautions personnel not to enter the
storage room before the area has been
ventilated. The sign is 14” (356 mm) wide by 7.8”
(198 mm) tall, with black letting on a orange
background. Carbon dioxide gas
Ventilate the area before
entering. A high carbon
dioxide gas concentration
can occur in this area and
can cause suffocation.
1.17.6 WARNING SIGN – MANUAL ACTUAT0R

This sign (p/n 02-11402) shall be placed at every
location where manual operation of the system
can occur (electric, mechanical and/or
pneumatic). The sign warns personnel that
WARNING
activation of the device will cause the carbon
dioxide system to discharge, and that all Carbon dioxide gas
personnel must be evacuated prior to its can cause injury or death.
operation. The sign is 14” (356 mm) wide by 7.8” Actuation of this device
(198 mm) tall, with black lettering on an orange causes carbon dioxide to
background. discharge. Before actuating,
be sure personnel are clear
of the area.

1.18 SELECTOR VALVE SYSTEMS

Selector valves allow a single agent supply to be utilized for protection of multiple hazards,
reducing the amount of agent required. Selector valves are used in conjunction with
Solenoid Actuators to direct the flow of agent into one specific hazard of a multiple hazard
application.
Selector Valves are Factory Mutual approved only.
1.18.1 SELECTOR VALVES

The selector valve body is available in either carbon steel or stainless steel. It is a ball
valve that blocks the flow of agent through the piping network until the valve is activated.
Valve actuation is accomplished either manually or electrically.
Manual actuation is accomplished by removing a ring pin and pushing a manual actuation button down. Electric
actuation is accomplished when an electrical signal is received by the 24V DC electric solenoid. Both of these
actuation methods result in the opening of a nitrogen cartridge that pneumatically opens the selector valve. Each
selector valve is equipped with a valve position monitor that gives a visual indication if the valve is open or closed.
Once opened, the pressure must be relieved using the relief/pop-off valve to allow the Selector Valve to spring-
return to the closed position.
A typical selector valve assembly is made-up of the following items:
x Selector valve with Actuator and relief /pop-off valve
x Solenoid Actuator Kit
x ¼” check valve and ¼”-90 Degree Elbow Reducing bushings can be utilized when connecting
x ¼” SST Flexible Hose x 3’-0” lg. to a ½”, ¾”, 1¼” and 2½” piping network.
Part Number Description Mounting

70-1899-10-XX Selector Valve–1” 1” (25mm) NPT Female
70-1899-15-XX Selector Valve–1½” 1½” (40mm) NPT Female
Ordering Options
70-1899-XX-XX
B CD
A 1899 – Threaded Valve
10 – 1”
15 – 1 ½”
B
20 – 2”
30 – 3”
C – Carbon Steel Body
C
S – Stainless Steel Body
D D – DOT Nitrogen Cylinder
Allow 18” of clearance from the center line

of the piping to the top of the indicator.
Part Number Size A B C D

70-1899-10-XX 1” (25 mm) 3.37 1.68 7.95 3.34
70-1899-15-XX 1½” (40 mm) 4.37 2.18 9.05 3.85
70-1899-20-XX 2” (50 mm) 5.50 2.75 10.66 4.33
70-1899-30-XX 3” (80 mm) 6.75 3.37 14.17 5.51

1.18.2 SOLENOID ACTUATOR KIT

The Solenoid Actuator Kit (70-202) is used to operate / open the Selector Valve. The actuation
package utilizes a 24 VDC electric solenoid with manual strike button that is connected to a
small cylinder filled with nitrogen.
Operation of the actuator can occur by one of two methods

(1) Electrical input from a fire control panel
(2) Operation of a mechanical manual actuator.
The kit also includes a combination pressure gauge and low pressure supervisory switch that
allows visual and control panel monitoring of the nitrogen cylinder pressure.
One Solenoid Actuator Kit is required per selector valve.
SPECIFICATIONS
Electric Solenoid Actuator:
Supply Voltage 24 VDC
Maximum Signal Duration 2 seconds
Maximum Supervision Current 10mA 5.79"
Minimum Fire Current 0.6 Amp [147mm]
Electrical Connection DIN 43650
Operating Temperature Range -4oF to +122oF (-20oC to +50oC)
Nitrogen Cylinder:
4.06"
Filling Pressure 1800 psi @ 72ºF (124 bar @ 22ºC) [103mm]
Volume 28 in3 / 460 ml
Maximum Exposure Temp. 149 oF / 65oC
Classification 2.2
Shipping Number UN1066 2.76"
[70mm]
Pressure Gauge / Switch:
Temperature Limits -40ºF to +140ºF (-40ºC to +60ºC)
Housing Classification IP65
Normally Closed > 1740 psi / 120 bar
Contact Rating 5-100 mA
Electrical Connection DIN 43650 compact 6.89"
Supplied w/ 1’ (.3m) cable [175mm]
Pressure Setting 1740 psi / 120 bar
(decreasing)
16.71"
[424mm]
Ø0.40"
[Ø10mm] THRU
2.00"
[51mm]

1.19 LISTINGS AND APPROVALS

Fike CO2 systems are Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed, and Factory Mutual (FM) approved when designed in
accordance with the latest revision of NFPA 12, and this manual. The following listing and approval numbers
pertain solely to the CO2 system components.
Part Number Description UL Number ULC Number FM Number

C70-050 50 lb. Cylinder Ex 4447 CEx 1312 OD8A9.AF
C85-010 Valve Assembly Ex 4447 CEx 1312 OD8A9.AF
C85-113 Master Actuation Package, 12VDC Ex 4447 CEx 1312 OD8A9.AF
C85-114 Master Actuation Package, 24VDC Ex 4447 CEx 1312 OD8A9.AF
C85-119 Local Lever Actuator Ex 4447 OD8A9.AF
C70-226 Flexible Discharge Bend Ex 4447 CEx 1312 OD8A9.AF
C70-211 50 lb. Cylinder Strap Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3002238
C02-1204 Main-Reserve Check Valve, ½” NPT Ex 4447 OD8A9.AF
C02-1205 Main-Reserve Check Valve, ¾” NPT Ex 4447 OD8A9.AF
C02-1206 Main-Reserve Check Valve, 1” NPT Ex 4447 OD8A9.AF
C02-1207 Main-Reserve Check Valve, 1-1/2” NPT Ex 4447 OD8A9.AF
C02-1240 Main-Reserve Check Valve, 2” NPT Ex 4447 OD8A9.AF
C02-1340 Pneumatic Check Valve, ¼” NPT Ex 4447 3002238
C02-1355 Pneumatic Check Valve, ¼” Tube Ex 4447 3002238
C70-231 Header Safety Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3002238
C02-1363 Header Vent Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3002238
C80-030 Baffle Nozzle Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3003886
C80-041 thru 046 Radial Nozzles Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3003886
C80-020 Vent Nozzle Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3003886
C80-1013 Vent Nozzle Flange Mounting Kit Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3003886
C80-010 “S” Nozzle Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3003886
C80-1018 “S” Nozzle Flange Mounting Kit Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3003886
C70-230 Pressure Trip Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3002238
C70-202 Pressure Switch Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3002238
C70-235 Pneumatic Time Delay, 30 second Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3002238
C70-237 Pneumatic Time Delay, 60 second Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3002238
C70-233 Pneumatic Actuator Ex 4447 3002238
C02-1230 Pneumatic Siren Ex 4447 CEx 1312 3002238
70-1899-10 Selector Valve-1” 3015909
70-1899-15 Selector Valve-1½” 3015909
70-1899-20 Selector Valve-2” 3015909
70-1899-30 Selector Valve-3” 3015909

Section 2
Design
Carbon Dioxide
Manual P/N C06-018
SECTION 2 – DESIGN
2.0 SYSTEM DESIGN

CO2 is effective in areas where flammable solids, liquids, and vapors are present. Fires in these hazards spread
very rapidly. Deep-seated fires associated with hazards such as electrical equipment, bulk record storage, dust
collectors, and ductwork are equally well protected with CO2. A fixed-pipe system that is engineered specifically
for a particular hazard, and actuated automatically, assures the early detection and rapid extinguishment
necessary to prevent major losses and downtime.
Fike CO2 Systems are custom designed to protect a specific hazard or application. The quantity of CO 2 and the
method of application required for the protection of a specific hazard are determined by the system designer, but
the final design must be based on the materials or product involved. NFPA 12 and this design manual are used
as guides to determine the appropriate design parameters.
Fike CO2 systems can be actuated automatically, pneumatically or manually. Automatic systems incorporate fire
detectors and system control panels, along with electric and mechanical/manual releases that are located in the
hazard area. When activated, they send a signal to the control panel to release the CO2 into the hazard.
Mechanical/manual actuator(s) are generally located at, or near, the CO2 cylinder storage area. Automatically
actuated systems are electrically operated and always incorporate an emergency manual override feature and
standby power supply.
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Fike CO2 systems consist of one or more cylinders connected to a fixed-piping system that delivers the CO2 to the
protected hazard through one or more discharge nozzles selected for the specific application. These systems are
designed to comply with specific design criteria in accordance with NFPA 12 and are separated into the following
design categories:
1) Total Flood Application 2) Local Application 3) Combination Systems
a) Surface Fires a) Rate-by-Area a) Total Flood – Surface & Deep Seated
b) Deep Seated Hazards b) Rate-by-Volume b) Total Flood & Local Application
Each design has requirements and limitations that MUST be adhered to in order to produce an approved system
that complies with the requirements of Fike Protection Systems, NFPA 12, and the Authority Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ).
The following paragraphs will provide the necessary information, guidelines, and examples to allow the system
designer to produce a system designed to provide quality CO2 fire protection acceptable to all associated with the
project.
This manual is prepared to assist the design engineer in preparing an approved CO2 fire suppression
system. However, this manual does not cover all aspects of system design and hazard analysis. It shall
be the responsibility of the system design engineer to read, and thoroughly understand, NFPA No. 12,
CO2 Extinguishing Systems, before attempting to design any Fike CO2 Suppression System.

2.1.1 USE AND LIMITATIONS

CO2 systems can be used on Class “A” fires involving wood, paper, cloth, or any product that leaves a carbon
ash; Class “B” fires involving flammable liquids or vapors; and Class “C” fires involving live electrical equipment.
2.1.1.1 AREAS OF USE

CO2 is particularly useful for extinguishing fires in specific hazard areas or equipment:
x Where an inert, electrically non-conductive, medium is essential or desirable.
x Where cleanup or production downtime caused by another suppression medium would present a problem
or high cost.
x Where other mediums might contaminate solvents, coolants, or other products associated with the
hazard being protected.
Some of the more important types of hazards or equipment that CO2 systems may satisfactorily protect include:
Automated Information Storage Electric Generators Ovens
Flammable Liquids Storage Coating Machines Dip Tanks & Drain Boards
Engine Test Cells Sub-floors Motors
Printing Presses Switchgear Rooms Solvent Recovery
Dust Collectors / Bag House Transformer Vaults Wave Solder Machines
Ducts / Exhaust Plenums Wet Benches Spray Booths
Hydraulic Pump Units Cable Spreading Rooms Turbine Enclosures
Electrical Cabinets Anechoic Chambers Coating Lines
2.1.1.2 AREAS OF NON-USE
CO2 should not be used on fires involving the following materials:
x Chemicals that contain their own Oxygen supply such as: Cellulose Nitrate (old movie film) and
gunpowder that are capable of rapid oxidation in the absence of air.
x Reactive metals such as Lithium, Sodium, Potassium, Magnesium, Titanium, Uranium, Plutonium.
x Metal Hydrides such as Sodium Hydride (NaH), Lithium Hydride (LiH), Calcium Hydride (CaH 2), Lithium
Aluminum Hydride (LiAlH4) and Sodium Borohydride (NaBH).
While CO2 will not extinguish fires involving these products, it will not react dangerously with them or increase
their burning rate. A CO2 system designed for Total Flooding will provide protection of adjacent combustibles
when used in these situations. Local Application designed systems, with their attendant high velocity and
directed discharge, should not be used for these applications.
2.1.1.3 USE RESTRICTIONS PER NFPA 12

As a continuing effect to improve / enhance “Life Safety”, NFPA 12 has added use restrictions to the 2005 edition,
these restrictions affect both new and existing installations as to how and when a CO2 system can be applied.
Some examples of normally occupied enclosures with surface fire hazards that should be considered for other
types of clean fire-extinguishing agents are:
Offices Computer Rooms Control Rooms
Data Centers Libraries Museums
According to NFPA 12, CO2 systems are not intended as an acceptable substitute for Halon 1301 total flood
systems for normally occupied enclosures and shall not be installed in normally occupied enclosures except
where there are no suitable fire-extinguishing agents that can be used to provide an equivalent level of fire
protection to that of CO2.

Revision: B Manual P/N C06-018
When verifying equivalent levels of fire protection, the following items that should be considered are:
x Fast-growth fires
x High-energy output fires
x Deep-seated fires
x Agent storage temperature limits
x Ambient temperature of hazard
x Design capabilities for unclosable openings
x Design capabilities for extended discharge systems
x Contamination to product, surrounding area, or environment
x Requirements for continued operations in areas where persistent ignition sources may be present
x Undefined reaction of fire suppression agent to the hazard
If it is determined that CO2 is to be used for a given application, the designer / installer shall provide supporting
documentation to the AHJ to verify that CO2 is the most appropriate fire suppression agent for the application.
2.1.1.3.1 EXISTING INSTALLATIONS
All existing CO2 systems that are installed in the following type areas:
x Normally Occupied – defined as an enclosure where, under normal circumstances, people are present
x Occupiable – defined as an area or space not normally occupied by people but could be entered for brief
periods.
x Local Application
x Any system where the discharge of CO2 agent will expose personnel to hazardous concentrations of CO2.
shall be upgraded to meet the requirements for:
x Safety Signs
x Lock-out Valves
x Pneumatic Time Delays
x Pneumatic Pre-Discharge Alarms
In addition, provisions shall be made to prohibit entry of unprotected personnel to spaces made unsafe by a CO 2
discharge until the space is ventilated and made safe to enter. Such provisions shall include one or more of the
following:
x Addition of a distinctive odor (oil of wintergreen) to the discharge of CO2 agent (olfactory device)
x Provide automatic alarms, at the entry to and within enclosures, which are activated by CO2 or O2
detectors
x Establishment and enforcement of confined space entry procedure for such areas.
These upgrades shall be completed by August 7, 2006.
2.1.1.3.2 TYPICAL INSTALLATION
Discharge
Safety
Pressure Pneumatic Siren
Signs
Switch
Olfactory
Stop / Maintenance Device
(lock-out) Valve
Piping to CO2 Pneumatic
Discharge Nozzle(s) Time Delay

2.2 TOTAL FLOOD SYSTEMS

A Total Flood CO2 system design can be defined as follows: A fixed supply of CO2 agent discharging through
piping and nozzles into a permanent enclosure that is capable of containing the agent. An extinguishing
concentration of CO2 can be established and maintained for a specific period of time. Fires that can be
extinguished by total flooding methods can be divided into two categories:
1) Surface fires involving Class B flammable liquids, gases, and solids.
2) Deep-seated fires involving Class A and/or C materials subject to smoldering.
2.2.1 TOTAL FLOOD – SURFACE FIRE SYSTEMS

Surface fires involving flammable liquids, gases, and solids are extinguished by introducing CO2 into the
enclosure quickly, and in a sufficient quantity to reduce the oxygen concentration to a point where the fire can no
longer exist.
In some applications, CO2 agent loss through uncloseable openings is anticipated and can be compensated for in
the system design calculations. In general, it is preferable to close all openings, shutdown all ventilation, and seal
the protected enclosure to insure the CO2 concentration will be maintained for the appropriate time period.
The following flow chart identifies the necessary steps that need to be taken into consideration when designing a
total flood / surface fire system:
TOTAL FLOOD – SURFACE FIRE SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW CHART
Determine Hazard
Flooding
Special Condition
Adjustments
Ventilation
Uncloseable Openings
Concentration Adjustment
Below 0° F 0° to 200° F Above 200° F
+1% per No Correction +1% per 5

Required
Nozzles Required
Agent Required – Bill of Material

2.2.1.1 HAZARD VOLUME

Determine the volume of the hazard by multiplying (length) x (width) x (height). For total-flood applications, the
volume can be reduced to exclude any permanent, non-removable, or impermeable structures from the overall
volume of the protected space.
2.2.1.2 FLOODING FACTORS FOR SURFACE FIRES

The minimum extinguishing concentration required for Surface fires is 34% by volume. To determine the base
CO2 agent requirement, multiply the hazard volume by the flooding factors in the following tables.
FLOODING FACTORS FOR SURFACE FIRES

English Values
Vol. of Space Vol. Factor Vol. Factor Min. Qty. CO2
ft3. ft3 / lb. CO2 lb. CO2 / ft3. lbs.
Up to 140 14 0.072 ***
141 – 500 15 0.067 10
501 – 1,600 16 0.063 35
1,601 – 4,500 18 0.056 100
4,501 – 50,000 20 0.050 250
Over 50,000 22 0.046 2500
[NFPA 12, Table 2-3.3(a)]
FLOODING FACTORS FOR SURFACE FIRES

Metric Values
Vol. of Space Vol. Factor Vol. Factor Min. Qty. CO2
m3. m3 / kg. CO2 kg. CO2 / m3. kg.
Up to 3.96 0.86 1.15 ***
3.97 – 14.15 0.93 1.07 4.5
14.16 – 45.28 0.99 1.01 15.1
45.29 – 127.35 1.11 0.90 45.4
127.36 – 1,415.0 1.25 0.80 113.5
Over 1,415.0 1.38 0.77 1135.0
[NFPA 12, Table 2-3.3(b)]
2.2.1.3 AGENT ADJUSTMENTS FOR SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Additional CO2 must be supplied to compensate for specific material types, ventilation, hazard temperature, and
enclosure leakage. The determination of these adjustments is explained in the following paragraphs.
See Section 3 for Sample Problems.
2.2.1.3.1 VENTILATION
Where forced-air-ventilating systems are involved, they preferably shall be shutdown and/or closed before or
simultaneously with the start of the CO2 system discharge. When a ventilation system cannot be shutdown prior
to the CO2 system discharge, additional agent must be added to compensate for the volume expressed as cubic
feet per minute (cfm) leaving the enclosure. This information is variable and will depend upon the type and
capacity of the air handling system(s) present.
The additional agent required is determined by multiplying the volume moved (cfm) during the required holding
period by the flooding factor used to determine the base quantity required. This amount must also be multiplied
by the material conversion factor (See Section 2.2.3.3) when the design concentration for the protected space is
greater than 34%. The additional agent is supplied through the regular piping distribution system.

2.2.1.3.2 UNCLOSEABLE OPENINGS

Uncloseable openings in a protected hazard must be compensated for by providing additional CO2. The
additional quantity of CO2 must equal the total anticipated quantity of CO2 agent that will be lost through the
openings during the required agent hold time.
Use the Leakage Compensation Chart below to determine the leak rate for the area due to the uncloseable
openings. Multiply that leak rate by the total area of the opening(s) and the discharge time to determine the
amount of additional CO2 agent required. If the quantity of CO2 agent required for loss compensation exceeds the
base agent quantity requirement for a surface-type hazard, the system can be designed for Local Application.
Consult NFPA 12 for further clarification.
Leakage Rate (lbs/ft2/min)
Center of Opening to Ceiling (ft)

[NFPA 12, Figure A-2-3 (b)]
To determine the additional amount of CO2 required compensating for the leakage, proceed as follows:
x Find the intersection of the vertical line (representing the distance from the center of an opening to the top
of the enclosure) in feet and the diagonal line (representing the design concentration of CO2).
x Follow a horizontal line left to the “Leakage Rate” axis to determine the leakage rate value in lbs/min/ft2.
x Determine the equivalent metric value by using the conversion value of 1 lb/min/ft.2 = 4.89 kg/min/m2.
EXCEPTION: If the opening(s) is in the side wall(s) only, divide the area of the opening(s) by two. It is assumed
that one-half of the opening will provide fresh air intake while the other half allows CO2 leakage. If the opening(s)
is in the ceiling, no additional CO2 is required to compensate for this opening(s).

2.2.1.3.3 CONCENTRATION ADJUSTMENT FOR SPECIAL MATERIALS

Some products and/or materials require a higher extinguishing concentration of CO 2 due to their specific chemical
characteristics. Therefore, the design concentration must be adjusted by a “Material Conversion Factor” if any of
these materials are present. To accomplish this adjustment, first determine the quantity of CO2 required at a 34%
base concentration. Then, locate the specific material or product in the following table and note its required
extinguishing concentration. The table below lists some of the more common liquids and gases, and the
established CO2 extinguishing concentrations required for each. Consult Fike Corporation, Product Support
Services, for required concentrations for any chemicals not listed below.
MINIMUM CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHING CONCENTRATIONS

Min. Min.
Min.
Material or Product Conc. Material or Product Conc. Material or Product
Conc. %
% %
Acetylene 66 Ethane 40 JP-4 36
Acetone 34 Ethyl Alcohol 43 Kerosene 34
Aviation Gas – Grades
36 Ethyl Ether 46 Methane 34
115/145
Benzol, Benzene 37 Ethylene 49 Methyl Acetate 35
Butadiene 41 Ethylene Dichloride 34 Methyl Alcohol 40
Butane 34 Ethylene Oxide 53 Methyl Butene-I 36
Methyl Ethyl Ketone
Butane-I 37 Gasoline 34 40
(MEK)
Carbon Disulfide 72 Hexane 35 Methyl Formate 39
Carbon Monoxide 64 Higher Paraffin Hydrocarbons 34 Pentane 35
Coal or Natural Gas 37 Hydrogen 75 Propane 36
Cyclopropane 37 Hydrogen Sulfide 36 Propylene 36
Diethyl Ether 40 Isobutane 36 Quench/Lube Oils 34
Dimethyl Ether 40 Isobutylene 34 Toluene 40
Dowtherm 46 Isobutyl Formate 34
[NFPA 12, Table 2-3.2.1]

Next, find the minimum concentration percentage required at the bottom of the chart below. Follow the minimum
concentration percent line up, until it intersects with the curve line. Then, follow the horizontal line to the left for
the conversion factor. Multiply the base CO2 requirement (in pounds/kilograms) by the conversion factor to
determine the amount of agent required for that particular material.
Material Conversion Chart

Conversion Factor
Minimum Design CO2 Concentration (%)

[NFPA 12, Figure 2-3.4]
CAUTION: When a system design involves multiple fuel sources, always use the highest required
concentration for any of the materials or products present within the protected hazard; regardless of the
stored quantity.
2.2.1.3.4 TEMPERATURE CONSIDERATIONS

There are two areas of concern as it relates to temperature:
1) The temperature of the hazard being protected
2) The temperature range of the area where the agent storage cylinder(s) is/are located
2.2.1.3.4.1 HIGH TEMPERATURES

When protecting hazards where the normal operating temperature is greater than 200°F (93.3°C), the amount of
CO2 required must be increased. For every 5 degrees above 200°F (93.3°C), an additional one percent (1%)
increase in the calculated quantity of CO2 agent must be provided.
2.2.1.3.4.2 LOW TEMPERATURES

When the protected hazard has a normal operating temperature of less than 0°F (-17.8°C), the amount of CO2
agent required must be increased. For every 1 degree below 0°F (-17.8°C), an additional one percent (1%)

2.2.1.3.4.3 CYLINDER STORAGE TEMPERATURES

The CO2 cylinders must be located / installed in an area that falls within the temperature limitations for each
system type. Where storage temperatures fall outside of the ranges stated, additional measures such as
enclosures, heating, or cooling shall be provided.
1) For Total-Flooding systems, the cylinder(s) must be stored within a temperature range of 0o to 130oF
(-18o to 54oC).
2) For Local Application systems, the cylinder(s) must be stored within a temperature range of 32o to 120oF
(0o to 49oC).
2.2.1.4 POWER / FUEL SOURCE CONSIDERATION

All electrical power and fuel sources must be shutdown prior to CO2 system discharge. This is to remove any
ignition source(s) and the potential of re-flash within the hazard(s) being protected.
2.2.1.5 PRESSURE OPERATED SIRENS

Pressure operated sirens that operate off of the CO2 supply must be compensated for when determining the
amount of agent required. Agent consumption for each siren is approximately 6 pounds per minute. If the
siren(s) is located within the protected space, additional agent compensation is not necessary.
2.2.1.6 MINIMUM DISCHARGE TIME / SURFACE FIRE APPLICATION

For surface-type applications, the calculated agent quantity must be discharged within 1 minute. This includes
any compensation made for materials, ventilation, temperature, and/or uncloseable openings.
2.2.1.7 SPECIAL LIQUIDS

If a hazard contains a liquid having an auto ignition temperature below its boiling point, (i.e. paraffin wax and
cooking oils), the CO2 concentration shall be maintained for a period sufficient for the liquid temperature to cool
below its auto ignition temperature. In this circumstance, the minimum liquid discharge time shall be 3 minutes.

2.2.2 TOTAL FLOOD / DEEP-SEATED FIRE SYSTEMS

Deep-Seated hazards are those in which the materials involved are subject to smoldering fire conditions.
Generally, this involves “Class A” products such as wood, paper, cloth, or any similar material that leaves a
carbon ash residue. The quantity of CO2 necessary for a Deep-Seated hazard is based on tight enclosures.
After the design concentration is reached, the concentration shall be maintained for a substantial period of time;
but not less than 20 minutes. Any possible leakage shall be given special consideration since no allowance is
included in the basic flooding factors.
TOTAL FLOOD – DEEP-SEATED FIRE SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW CHART
Determine Hazard
Flooding
Special Condition
Adjustments
Ventilation
Uncloseable Openings
Below 0° F 0° to 200° F Above 200° F
+1% per No Correction +1% per 5

Required
Nozzles Required
Agent Required – Bill of Material

Determine the volume of the hazard by multiplying (length) x (width) x (height). For total-flood applications, the
volume can be reduced to exclude any permanent, non-removable, or impermeable structures from the overall
volume of the protected space.

2.2.2.2 FLOODING FACTORS FOR DEEP-SEATED FIRES

The flooding factor used for a system design is based on the specific hazard being protected. To determine the
base quantity of CO2 agent required, multiply the hazard volume by a flooding factor selected from the following
table.
FLOODING FACTORS FOR SPECIFIC HAZARDS

Design
Specific Hazard
Conc. Ft3 / lb. CO2 lb. CO2 / ft3 m3 / kg. CO2 kg. CO2 / m3
Dry electrical hazards in general.
50% 10 0.100 0.62 1.60
(Spaces 0 - 2,000 ft3./ 56.6 m3)
0.083 1.33 Dry electrical hazards
50% 12 0.75
(200 lb/min) (91 kg/min) (Spaces over 2,000 ft 3 / 56.6 m3)
Record or bulk paper storage, ducts &
65% 8 0.125 0.50 2.00
covered trenches
75% 6 0.166 0.38 2.66 Fur storage vaults, dust collectors, etc.
[NFPA 12, Table 2-4.2.1]
2.2.2.3 AGENT ADJUSTMENTS FOR SPECIAL CONDITIONS

Additional CO2 must be supplied to compensate for specific material types, ventilation, hazard temperature, and
enclosure leakage. The determination of these adjustments is explained in the following paragraphs.
See Section 3, Sample Problems for additional information regarding the following conditions.
2.2.2.3.1 VENTILATION
Where forced-air-ventilating systems are involved, they preferably shall be shutdown and/or closed before or
simultaneously with the start of the CO2 system discharge. When a ventilation system cannot be shutdown prior
to the CO2 system discharge, additional agent must be added to compensate for the volume expressed as cubic
feet per minute (cfm) leaving the enclosure. This information is variable and will depend upon the type and
capacity of the air handling system(s) present.
The additional agent required is determined by multiplying the volume moved (cfm) during the required holding
period by the flooding factor used to determine the base quantity required. The additional agent is supplied
through the regular piping distribution system.

2.2.2.3.2 UNCLOSEABLE OPENINGS

Uncloseable openings in a protected hazard must be compensated for by providing additional CO2. The
additional quantity of CO2 must equal the total anticipated quantity of CO2 agent that will be lost through the
openings during the required agent hold time.
Use the Leakage Compensation Chart below to determine the leak rate for the area due to the uncloseable
openings. Multiply that leak rate by the total area of the opening(s) and the discharge time to determine the
amount of additional CO2 agent required.
For deep-seated hazards, uncloseable openings shall be restricted to those bordering or actually in the ceiling
when the size of the openings exceed the pressure relief venting requirements, Per NFPA12.
Leakage Rate (lbs/ft2/min)
Center of Opening to Ceiling (ft)

[NFPA 12, Figure A-2-3 (b)]
To determine the additional amount of CO2 required compensating for the leakage, proceed as follows:
x Find the intersection of the vertical line (representing the distance from the center of an opening to the top
of the enclosure) in feet and the diagonal line (representing the design concentration of CO2).
x Follow a horizontal line left to the “Leakage Rate” axis to determine the leakage rate value in lbs/min/ft2.
x Determine the equivalent metric value by using the conversion value of 1 lb/min/ft2 = 4.89 kg/min/m2.
EXCEPTION: If the opening(s) is in the side wall(s) only, divide the area of the opening(s) by two. It is assumed
that one-half of the opening will provide fresh air intake while the other half allows CO2 leakage. If the opening(s)
is in the ceiling, no additional CO2 is required to compensate for this opening(s).

2.2.2.3.3 TEMPERATURE CONSIDERATIONS

There are two areas of concern as it relates to temperature:
1) The temperature of the hazard being protected
2) The temperature range of the area where the agent storage cylinder(s) is/are located
2.2.2.3.3.1 HIGH TEMPERATURES

When protecting hazards where the normal operating temperature is greater than 200°F (93.3°C), the amount of
CO2 required must be increased. For every 5 degrees above 200°F (93.3°C), an additional one percent (1%)
2.2.2.3.3.2 LOW TEMPERATURES

When the protected hazard has a normal operating temperature of less than 0°F (-17.8°C), the amount of CO2
agent required must be increased. For every 1 degree below 0°F (-17.8°C), an additional one percent (1%)
2.2.2.3.3.3 CYLINDER STORAGE TEMPERATURES

The CO2 cylinders must be located / installed in an area that falls within the temperature limitations for each
system type. Where storage temperatures fall outside of the ranges stated, additional measures such as
enclosures, heating, or cooling shall be provided.
1) For Total-Flooding systems, the cylinder(s) must be stored within a temperature range of 0oF to 130oF
(-18oC to 54oC).
2) For Local Application systems, the cylinder(s) must be stored within a temperature range of 32oF to 120oF
(0oC to 49oC).
2.2.2.4 POWER / FUEL SOURCE CONSIDERATION

All electrical power and fuel sources must be shutdown prior to system discharge. This is to remove any ignition
source(s) and the potential of re-flash within the hazard(s) being protected.
2.2.2.5 PRESSURE OPERATED SIRENS

Pressure operated sirens that operate off of the CO2 supply must be compensated for when determining the
amount of agent required. Agent consumption for each siren is approximately 6 pounds per minute. If the
siren(s) is located within the protected space, additional agent compensation is not necessary.
2.2.2.6 DISCHARGE DURATION / FLOW RATE

Deep-Seated hazard systems are discharged at a slower flow rate and for a longer duration to counter-act the
characteristics of a smoldering fire. For Deep-Seated fires, the design concentration shall be achieved within
7 minutes, but at a flow rate that will provide a concentration of 30% within 2 minutes. To calculate the minimum
flow rate for a 30% concentration, multiply the hazard volume by 0.043 (0.688 for metric units). This will
determine the amount of CO2 to be discharged within 2 minutes. Dividing the resultant quantity of CO2 by two
provides the required flow rate in pounds (kg) of CO 2 per minute.
For Deep-Seated hazards requiring a 75% concentration, the flow rate required to discharge within
7 minutes is greater than the 30% requirement stated above, and must be used.
2.2.2.7 PRESSURE RELIEF VENTING

Leakage from doors, windows, and dampers, though not easily calculated, or apparent have been found to
provide sufficient relief venting for the system without the need for additional venting. Even “tight” spaces such as
vaults, freezers, and ductwork have also been found to provide adequate venting under normal conditions.

2.2.3 COMBINED SURFACE FIRE AND DEEP SEATED HAZARDS

Some protected spaces may contain both Surface Fire hazards (such as flammable liquids or solids) and Deep-
Seated hazards (such as wood, paper or cloth) within the same enclosure. Whenever this situation occurs, the
system discharge flow rate must be adjusted to satisfy the Surface Fire requirements FIRST, while still satisfying
the requirements for the Deep-Seated Fire. Therefore, the CO2 must be discharged within 1 minute to satisfy the
Surface Fire requirements and maintain the 20 minute hold time requirement associated with a Deep-Seated
Fire.
2.2.4 NOZZLE SELECTION

All Fike nozzle types are acceptable for use in Total Flood applications. Each nozzle has its own discharge
characteristics and recommended range of flow rates. This information will assist the system designer in
determining which nozzle is the most appropriate to use for each application.
2.2.4.1 RADIAL NOZZLES

The Radial Nozzle (P/N C80-041 thru C80-046) is machined from brass and is available in 1/2”, 3/4”, and 1” NPT
sizes. They are available in 180 degree and 360 degree discharge patterns. Approved for Total Flood
applications only, the Radial Nozzle offers flexibility and a variety of options to the system designer.
RADIAL NOZZLES
Availabl
Flow Rates
Nozzle e Spacing and/or
Description Orifice Height above Floor
Minimum Maximum Recommended
Codes
C80-041 – 360° 25 lbs./min 160 lbs./min 100 lbs./min 3.5 thru 20 feet
1/2” NPT (11.3 kg/min) (72.6 kg/min) (45.4 kg/min) 13 (6.1 m)
C80-042 – 180° 25 lbs./min 160 lbs./min 100 lbs./min 3.5 thru 20 feet
C80-043 – 360° 120 lbs./min 200 lbs./min 150 lbs./min 10 thru 25 feet
1” NPT (99.8 kg/min) (136.1 kg/min) (113.4 kg/min) 25 (6.1 m)
1” NPT (99.8 kg/min) (136.1 kg/min) (113.4 kg/min) 25 (6.1 m)
2.2.4.2 BAFFLE NOZZLE

The Baffle Nozzle (P/N C80-030) provides a 180-degree, fan-shaped discharge pattern that makes it acceptable
for perimeter mounting around the protected hazard space. The Baffle Nozzle is machined from brass and has a
1/2” NPT male pipe thread connection.
BAFFLE NOZZLE – P/N C80-030

Flow Rates Available Spacing and/or
Minimum Maximum Recommended Orifice Codes Height above Floor
25 lbs./min 160 lbs./min 75 lbs./min 1 thru 20 feet
(11.3 kg/min) (72.6 kg/min) (34.0 kg/min) 13.5 (6.1 m)

2.2.4.3 VENT NOZZLE

Vent Nozzles (P/N C80-020B and C80-020S) are primarily installed in ductwork and small enclosures such as
shallow, covered pits; covered trenches, electrical switches and electrical cabinets. The discharge pattern is a
narrow, 120-degree cone shape. The Vent Nozzle is machined from brass or stainless steel and has a 1/2" NPT
pipe thread on each end. The 1/2" NPT male thread on the discharge end allows the Vent Nozzle to be mounted
on the outside of a protected hazard. This results in easier installation and access, as well as preventing
blockage of the nozzle due to dirty airflow and/or atmospheres.
External mounting is accomplished by using the Vent Nozzle Flange Mounting Kit (P/N C80-1013) complete with
Mylar dirt seal.
VENT NOZZLE – P/N C80-020

10 lbs./min 120 lbs./min 60 lbs./min 1 thru
(4.5 kg/min) Special Application
(54.4 kg/min) (27.2 kg/min) 13.5
2.2.4.4 “S” TYPE NOZZLE

“S” Type Nozzles (P/N C80-010) can be used for both Total-Flood and Local Application hazard designs. They
are particularly effective when specific objects within the hazard area need to be protected. The “S” Type Nozzle
has a circular shaped discharge pattern. The bell shaped “S” Nozzle is spun from a single stock piece and
provided with a 1/2” NPT female pipe thread connection. The nozzle uses a brass or stainless steel nozzle insert
that contains 2 or 4 orifice holes depending upon the orifice code value requested. With the insert in position
within the nozzle, an extremely “soft” CO2 discharge is realized; thus making the “S” Type Nozzle well suited for
use in hazard areas were small or loose items could be dislodged and propelled about the protected space during
a system discharge.
The “S” Type Nozzle can be mounted outside a protected space by using the “S” Type Nozzle Flange Mounting
Kit (P/N C80-1018) complete with Mylar dirt seal.
“S” TYPE NOZZLE – P/N C80-010

15 lbs./min 130 lbs./min 75 lbs./min 1 thru 20 feet
(6.8 kg/min) (59.0 kg/min) (34.0 kg/min) 11.0 (6.1 m)
2.2.4.5 NOZZLE STRAINER

Nozzle Strainers (P/N C02-1181) are required on Radial Nozzles having an orifice code of 7, or less, and all other
nozzles having an orifice code of 3, or less. Nozzle Strainers do not come with the nozzles and must be ordered
separately.

2.3 LOCAL APPLICATION SYSTEMS

A Local Application System consists of a fixed supply of CO2 agent permanently connected to a system of fixed
piping with nozzles designed to discharge the CO2 directly into the fire for the protection of a specific piece of
equipment or surface. Flammable liquids, gases, and shallow solids may be protected where the hazard is not
enclosed, or where leakage prohibits the use of a Total Flooding System. Some examples of such hazards are
dip tanks, quench tanks, spray booths, oil-filled transformers and hydraulic pump/reservoir systems.
Local Application Systems are divided into two design classifications, depending upon the method of application
required:
1) Rate-by-Area System Design
2) Rate-by-Volume System Design
WARNING: Local Application CO2 systems cannot be applied to deep-seated or smoldering fire hazards
that require longer discharge durations to ensure complete extinguishment.
2.3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Local Application Systems shall be designed, installed, tested, and maintained in accordance with applicable
requirements in NFPA 12, and with the additional requirements set forth in this section of this manual.
The hazard area must be isolated from other hazards and combustibles in order to keep a fire from spreading
outside the protected area. All areas that may become coated by combustible liquids due to spillage, leakage, or
splashing, are considered to be part of the hazard; as well as all associated materials that may extend into, or out
of, the protected space.
2.3.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

The discharge of carbon dioxide in fire-extinguishing concentration creates serious hazards personnel due to
obscuration of vision and reduction of oxygen concentration below that which will support life; not only in the
immediate area of discharge, but in adjacent areas into which the gas may migrate. Consideration shall be given
to the potential for personnel to become trapped or enter into a space made hazardous by the CO2 discharge.
Refer to NFPA 12 for safeguards necessary to prevent injury or death to personnel.
2.3.3 DISCHARGE DURATION REQUIREMENTS

When designing a Local Application System, the minimum effective discharge time used for computing CO2 agent
quantity shall be 30 seconds. This shall be increased to compensate for any additional hazard condition(s) that
would require a longer cooling period to assure complete extinguishment of the fire.
When the fuel has an auto-ignition point below its boiling point, such as paraffin wax and cooking oils, the
effective discharge time shall be increased to permit cooling of the fuel to prevent re-ignition. For this application,
the minimum liquid discharge time shall be 3 minutes.
2.3.4 RADIANT HEATING

Where there is a possibility that metal, or other materials, can become heated above the ignition temperature of
the hazard fuel, the effective discharge time shall be increased to allow adequate cooling time.
2.3.5 STORAGE REQUIREMENTS

The storage requirement is the quantity of CO2 required for a Local Application System. This quantity is based on
the discharge flow rate required to blanket the “Hazard Area” or “Assumed Volume” being protected. Since flow
rate is calculated in terms of lbs. per minute; and the required discharge time is 30 seconds, the system flow rate
must be multiplied by 0.5 minutes (30 seconds). Furthermore, since the hazard is not totally enclosed in the
case of Local Application Systems, only the LIQUID PORTION of the discharge may be considered to be
effective. Therefore, the quantity of CO2 agent supplied for a Local Application system shall also be increased by
40%, (multiplied by 1.4), to compensate for the ineffective vapor portion of the discharge .

2.3.6 LOCAL APPLICATION / RATE-BY-AREA DESIGN METHOD

The Rate-by-Area design method is used to protect two dimensional, horizontal surfaces and low-level objects.
The hazard can consist of a flammable solid, a liquid surface, or a coated surface.
x A “liquid surface” is any pool of liquid 0.25” (6 mm) or more in depth.
x A “coated surface” is defined as pools of liquid less than 0.25” (6 mm) deep, accumulating over a total
area exceeding 10% of the protected surface.
2.3.6.1 NOZZLE DETERMINATION

The Rate-by-Area method of protection utilizes the “S” Type Nozzle, which directs the CO2 agent discharge in a
specific pattern toward the protected surface. This method of agent application is effective only when the proper
agent flow rate and nozzle height are applied to a specific coverage area.
2.3.6.2 NUMBER AND LOCATION OF NOZZLES

The number and location of the nozzles is based upon the height of the nozzle(s) above the hazard, and the size
of the surface to be protected. When evaluating the size of the hazard area, both sides of the protected “square”
(length and width) must be taken into consideration when determining the location and quantity of nozzles
required.
Each nozzle is rated to protect a single, square segment of protected surface area as shown in the figure below.
Therefore, irregular-shaped hazard surfaces must be carefully subdivided to provide for complete coverage.
Once all these factors have been established, the correct nozzle flow rate can be determined. Each nozzle
combination as shown on the selection chart provide the maximum coverage dimensions for liquid or coated
surfaces based upon the height above the protected surface, and the required flow rate for each nozzle.
"S" TYPE NOZZLE

H
L1
L2
L1
L2 L 1 = LIQUID SURFACE
L 2 = COATED SURFACE

x DETERMINE NUMBER OF NOZZLE ROWS

To determine the number of nozzle rows required to cover the width of the protected surface, divide the width by
the surface dimension (Liquid = L1; Coated = L2) from the Rate-by-Area nozzle coverage chart (See Section
2.7.3). The appropriate dimension (L1 or L2) is dependent upon the nozzle height (H) above the protected
surface. The result identifies the number of nozzle ROWS that are required.
5.0' 12.0'
(1.52 m) (3.66 m)
LIQUID COATED SURFACE 10.0'

SURFACE (3.05 m)
NOZZLE HEIGHT = 3'-0" (0.91 m)
DETERMINE NOZZLE ROWS

English Units Metric Units
Liquid Surface: Liquid Surface:
Width of Surface = 10’-0” Nozzle Height = 3’-0” Width of Surface = 3.05m Nozzle Height = 0.91 m
L1 = 2.68 ft. L1 = 0.82 m
(L1 taken from Rate-by-Area Chart. See Section 2.7.3) (L1 taken from Rate-by-Area Chart. See Section 2.7.3)
Nozzles Rows required = 10.0’ y 2.68’ = 3.7 = 4 Rows Nozzles Rows required = 3.05 y 0.82 = 3.7 = 4 Rows
Coated Surface: Coated Surface:
Width of Surface = 10’-0” Nozzle Height = 3’-0” Width of Surface = 3.05 m Nozzle Height = 0.91 m
L2 = 3.22 ft. L2 = 0.98 m
Nozzles Rows required = 10.0’ y 3.22’ = 3.11 = 4 Rows Nozzles Rows required = 3.05 y 0.98 = 3.11 = 4 Rows

x DETERMINE NUMBER OF NOZZLES PER ROW

To determine the number of nozzles per row required, divide the length of the protected space by the surface
dimension (Liquid = L1; Coated = L2) from the Rate-by-Area nozzle coverage chart (See Section 2.7.3). The
appropriate dimension (L1 or L2) is dependent upon the nozzle height (H) above the protected surface. The result
identifies the number of nozzles required IN EACH ROW.
DETERMINE NUMBER OF NOZZLES IN EACH ROW

Liquid Surface: Liquid Surface:
Length of Surface = 5’-0” Nozzle Height = 3’-0” Length of Surface = 1.52 m Nozzle Height = 0.91 m
L1 = 2.68 ft. L1 = 0.82 m
Nozzles Per Row = 5.0’ y 2.68’ = 1.87 = 2 Nozzles/Row Nozzles Per Row = 1.52 y 0.82 = 1.9 = 2 Nozzles/Row
Coated Surface: Coated Surface:
Length of Surface = 12’-0” Nozzle Height = 3’-0” Length of Surface = 3.66 m Nozzle Height = 0.91 m
L2 = 3.22 ft. L2 = 0.98 m
Nozzles Per Row = 12.0’ y 3.22’ = 3.11 = 4 Nozzles/Row Nozzles Per Row = 3.66 y 0.98 = 3.7 = 4 Nozzles/Row
x DETERMINE TOTAL NUMBER OF NOZZLES

The total number of nozzles is now calculated by multiplying the number of rows by the number of nozzles
required for each row.
5.0' 12.0'
(1.52 m) (3.66 m)
3.22'
2.68' (0.98 m)
(0.82 m)
2.68' 3.22'
(0.82 m) (0.98 m)
10.0'
DRAIN BOARD
DIP TANK (3.05 m)
"S" NOZZLE
(TYP.)
COVERAGE
AREA (TYP.)
NOZZLE HEIGHT = 3.0' (0.91 M)

LIQUID COATED
SURFACE SURFACE

2.3.6.3 NOZZLE / APPLICATION FLOW RATE

Two things are needed to determine the appropriate nozzle flow rate:
a) The height of the nozzles above the surface to be protected
b) The number of nozzles required
The following Rate-by-Area nozzle selection chart must be used to determine the nozzle flow criteria for each
system application.
Rate-by-Area Nozzle Coverage Chart

Nozzle Height (H) Flow Rate Liquid Surface Coated Surface
feet (meters) lb./min. Side of square (Y) Side of square (X)
(kg/min.) feet (meters) feet (meters)
1.00 (0.30) 1 19.4 (8.8) 1.75 (0.53) 2.10 (0.64)
1
1.25 (0.38) 21.6 (9.8) 1.84 (0.56) 2.21 (0.67)
1
1.50 (0.46) 24.0 (10.9) 1.94 (0.59) 2.33 (0.71)
1
1.75 (0.53) 26.6 (12.1) 2.04 (0.62) 2.45 (0.75)
2
2.00 (0.61) 29.6 (13.4) 2.15 (0.66) 2.58 (0.79)
2
2.25 (0.69) 33.5 (15.2) 2.28 (0.69) 2.74 (0.84)
2
2.50 (0.76) 37.3 (17.0) 2.41 (0.73) 2.89 (0.88)
2
2.75 (0.84) 41.2 (18.7) 2.54 (0.77) 3.05 (0.93)
2
3.00 (0.91) 45.1 (20.5) 2.68 (0.82) 3.22 (0.98)
2
3.25 (0.99) 49.0 (22.2) 2.79 (0.85) 3.35 (1.02)
2
3.50 (1.07) 52.8 (24.0) 2.90 (0.88) 3.48 (1.06)
2
3.75 (1.14) 56.7 (25.7) 3.01 (0.92) 3.61 (1.10)
2
4.00 (1.22) 60.6 (27.5) 3.13 (0.95) 3.76 (1.15)
2
4.25 (1.30) 64.4 (29.2) 3.23 (0.98) 3.88 (1.18)
2
4.50 (1.37) 68.3 (31.0) 3.33 (1.01) 4.00 (1.22)
2
4.75 (1.45) 72.2 (32.8) 3.43 (1.05) 4.12 (1.26)
2
5.00 (1.52) 76.1 (34.5) 3.54 (1.08) 4.25 (1.30)
1
5.25 (1.60) 76.5 (34.7) 3.54 (1.08) 4.25 (1.30)
1
5.50 (1.68) 79.5 (36.1) 3.54 (1.08) 4.25 (1.30)
1
5.75 (1.75) 82.5 (37.4) 3.54 (1.08) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.00 (1.83) 85.5 (38.8) 3.54 (1.08) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.25 (1.91) 89.3 (40.5) 3.54 (1.08) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.50 (1.98) 92.3 (41.9) 3.54 (1.08) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.75 (2.06) 95.3 (43.2) 3.54 (1.08) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.00 (2.13) 99.0 (44.9) 3.54 (1.08) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.25 (2.20) 102.0 (46.3) 3.54 (1.08) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.50 (2.29) 105.0 (47.6) 3.54 (1.08) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.75 (2.36) 108.0 (49.0) 3.54 (1.08) 4.25 (1.30)
1
8.00 (2.44) 110.0 (50.0) 3.54 (1.08) 4.25 (1.30)
1
Fike recommended values.
2
UL listed and FM approved values (FZKX.EX4447)

2.3.6.4 NOZZLE PLACEMENT

Nozzles should be installed in a location that will enable an extinguishing “Envelope” to be developed around the
entire protected area. Any obstructions that could interfere with the flow of CO2 from the nozzle to the protected
surface, must be avoided to ensure proper system performance. If obstructions cannot be avoided, the nozzle(s)
must be repositioned or relocated. If additional nozzles are required, the agent quantity will have to be revised
accordingly. Nozzles should be installed perpendicular to the hazard and centered over the area protected by the
nozzle whenever possible. They may also be installed at an angle between 45 degrees and 90 degrees from the
plane of the hazard surface.
For nozzles mounted at an angle, the height used in determining the flow rate and area coverage shall be
the distance from the aiming point on the protected surface to the face of the nozzle; as measured along
the axis of the nozzle.
2.3.6.4.1 NOZZLE AIMING FACTORS
Nozzles shall be aimed at a point that is a specific distance in from the edge of the protected surface. This
distance, from the near side of the protected surface to the aiming point, is calculated by multiplying the coverage
dimension (L1 or L2) of the nozzle’s protected area by the Aiming Factor found in the table below. The concept is
illustrated below the table.
Aiming Factors for Angular Placement of Nozzles

Discharge Angle Aiming Factor
(Degrees from plane of hazard surface) (Fractional amount of coverage area)
45 - 60q 1/4 (0.25)

60 - 75q 1/4 - 3/8 (0.25 - 0.375)
75 - 90q 3/8 - 1/2 (0.375 - 0.50)
90q (Perpendicular) 1/2 (Centered)
H 90°
60°
W x 1/2
W W
2.3.6.5 DETERMINE SYSTEM FLOW RATE AND AGENT QUANTITY REQUIRED

The quantity of agent required for the system is determined by the number of nozzles required to cover the
projected surface area x the flow rate per nozzle as determined by the Rate-by-Area Coverage Chart (See
Section 2.7.3). This gives you the total system flow rate that will be utilized to determine pipe sizes.
Take the system flow rate x 1.4 to compensate for the liquid portion of the discharge and x 0.5 (the minimum
effective discharge time) to determine the total agent quantity required to protect the area being protected.

2.3.7 LOCAL APPLICATION / RATE-BY-VOLUME DESIGN METHOD

The Rate-by-Volume protection method is used to protect three-dimensional hazards that are NOT enclosed, or
those hazards that have too high a leakage rate to protect with a Total Flood / Surface Type system. The total
flow rate requirement for the system will be based upon an “Assumed Enclosure” volume that surrounds the
hazard. The dimensions of the assumed walls and ceiling of this “enclosure” shall be at least 2 ft. (0.61 m)
greater than the extreme dimensions of the specific hazard itself; unless actual walls are involved. The assumed
enclosure shall be based on an actual closed floor unless special provisions are made to take care of bottom
conditions. In addition, no deductions shall be made for solid objects within this volume.
The type of hazards that can be protected by local application / rate-by-volume can be put in three different
hazard / design categories:
1) Three dimensional hazards without an enclosure
2) Three dimensional hazard in large room with permanent perimeter walls
3) Enclosure with leakage, where leakage prohibits the use of a total flooding system
The following information describes the procedure required to design a Local Application rate-by-volume CO2
system and the steps in the order they must be accomplished:
2.3.7.1 LOCAL APPLICATION DESIGN: GENERAL

Local application can be successfully applied only when the fuels present a surface fire hazard exclusively.
Stationary pieces of machinery or permanent flammable liquid storage tanks could be candidates for local
application. A flammable liquids storage room for drum storage would usually be more practically protected with a
total flooding system.
A robot which is designed to move about an enclosure might be difficult to protect with local application; there
have been cases, however, where such mobile equipment has been protected with a local application system
attached to the equipment itself.
a. Isolation of hazards
The fire hazard must be isolated from other hazards or combustibles so that fire will not spread outside the
area protected. The entire hazard MUST be protected. For example, it is NOT sufficient to protect only the
surface of a dip tank. All associated drainboards, coated stock, hoods and ducts. . . in short, anything that
might extend the fire outside the immediate area of concern. . .must also be protected.
b. Interexposed hazards
A series of interexposed hazards may be divided into sub-groups or sections with the consideration and
approval of the authority having jurisdiction. Systems so designed must be capable of providing immediate,
independent protection to adjacent hazards. Printing presses are sometimes protected with such “zoned”
coverage. A group of presses may be protected with the provision that if fire should spread to one or more
adjacent groups these likewise will be immediately covered with CO2.
c. Location of hazard
Local application hazards may be located within an enclosure or out of doors. If a hazard is out of doors,
protection will be greatly simplified if an enclosure is provided. The effects of wind and air currents must be
considered in protecting an outdoor hazard.
Assuming that the hazard is suitable for local application, the designer must choose between local application
rate-by-area and local application rate-by-volume.
a. If the hazard is a two dimensional hazard such as a vat or dip tank, rate-by-area is generally the simplest
method of design.
b. If the hazard is two dimensional AND is partially or completely surrounded by permanent walls which are
nearby (within 4 to 8 feet / 1.22 to 2.44m) and the walls extend at least two feet above the top of the hazard,
rate-by-volume design may provide good protection with less carbon dioxide required.
c. If the hazard is three dimensional, rate-by-volume is generally the simplest method of design. Printing
presses and metal working (steel or aluminum) mills are common examples. A drain board with coated stock
conveyed above it is another example where rate-by-volume would be preferred.

2.3.7.2 LOCAL APPLICATION DESIGN – RATE-BY-VOLUME FOR THREE DIMENSIONAL HAZARDS

WITHOUT AN ENCLOSURE
The following steps need to be followed to determine the assumed volume, the CO2 flow rate, the location of
nozzles and the quantity of carbon dioxide required when protecting a three dimensional hazard without an
enclosure.
2.3.7.2.1 DETERMINE THE ASSUMED VOLUME

The “assumed volume” is calculated by first adding 2 feet (0.61m) to the extreme dimensions for all four sides and
the top of the protected hazard (NFPA 12 requirement).
The following conditions apply:
No volume deductions for objects within the protected volume can be used.
No assumed volume dimension may be less than 4.0 feet (1.22m).
Requires a “Closed Floor” or:
a) If the hazard being protected does not have a closed floor, the volume below must be added to the
hazard volume and additional CO2 agent and nozzles must be provided to cover the space below the
hazard.
b) If the area below is being protected by a CO2 system that is discharged at the same time and has a
discharge time equal to or greater than the rate-by-volume system discharge time, the agent discharged
below can be considered the same as a “closed floor”.
c) If the openings in the floor are relatively small they can be screened using local application – rate by
area nozzle coverage directed into the rate-by-volume hazard area.
(English Units)
(Length + 2.0’ + 2.0’) x (Width + 2.0’ + 2.0’) x (Height + 2.0’) = Assumed Volume
Length (L): 7.5 + 2.0 + 2.0 = 11.5

Width (W): 3.5 + 2.0 + 2.0 = 7.5
Height (H): 4.5 + 2.0 + 0 = 6.5
Assumed Volume: 11.5 x 7.5 x 6.5 = 561 ft3
(Metric Units)
(Length + 0.61m + 0.61m) x (Width + 0.61m + 0.61m) x (Height + 0.61m) = Assumed Volume
Length (L): 2.29 + 0.61 + 0.61 = 3.51

Width (W): 1.07 + 0.61 + 0.61 = 2.29
Height (H): 1.37 + 0.61 = 1.98
Assumed Volume: 3.51 x 2.29 x 1.98 = 7.78m3

2.3.7.2.2 DETERMINE SYSTEM FLOW RATE

For systems protecting a three dimensional hazard without an enclosure the flow rate per unit volume is 1
lb./min./ft3 (16 kg./min./m3) per NFPA 12.
The method used to calculate the system flow rate is:

(English Units)
Assumed Volume x System Discharge Rate = System Flow Rate
(ft3) (lb./min./ft3) (lbs./min.)
561 x 1 = 561
(Metric Units)
(m3) (kg./min./m3) (kg./min.)
15.92 x 16 = 254.72
2.3.7.2.3 DETERMINE QUANTITY OF NOZZLES REQUIRED

The quantity of nozzles is determined by dividing the system flow rate by the nozzle flow rate (based on the
distance from the hazard) and rounding the value up to the nearest whole number of nozzles.
The number of nozzles required for a rate-by-volume system to protect a hazard in an open area is based on
following factors:
Distance the nozzle(s) is located from the hazard; distance used is from the nozzle to the closest point of
the hazard being protected.
Nozzle flow rate established for the distance (the flow rate should be equal to that used for rate-by-area
application)
If the hazard contains liquids in depth, nozzles directed at such liquids shall have flow rate not greater
than that for which the nozzle is listed at the given distance from a liquid surface. Use of the higher flow
rates approved for “wetted surfaces” could produce splashing of the liquid and possibly spread the fire
outside the protected volume.
Total Flood type nozzles are not acceptable for use on rate-by-volume systems.
Considerations for Nozzle Location and Selection:
Although this guide is presented to help standardize the design of local application rate-by-volume systems, it
is possible to layout systems for a given local application hazard in a variety of ways. By using different styles
of nozzles and locating nozzles in various positions several design layouts (all meeting the basic
requirements of NFPA 12) are possible for any given hazard.
The quantity of agent required for a given hazard may vary somewhat depending on nozzle choice but the
approach to calculating agent quantity should be consistent regardless of nozzle type.
Remember, rate-by-volume local application is intended to apply a blanket of carbon dioxide over all portions
of the hazard for a sufficient time to extinguish the flames and permit the fuel and surroundings to cool below
the auto-ignition temperature of the fuel. While the approach is based on engineering principles, there is
some “art” in positioning nozzles so the discharge will tend to stay confined about the hazard.
For rate by volume systems, nozzles should be located so that the discharge will be naturally contained about
the hazard as much as possible. For hazards which do not have walls or partitions bounding them, pairs of
nozzles discharging in opposing directions are generally preferred over a single row of nozzles all discharging
parallel to each other.
If the hazard is tall and fuel can collect on the floor or lower levels multiple levels of nozzles may be advisable
to assure complete coverage of all areas.

ACCEPTABLE METHOD PREFERRED METHOD
Hazard
Hazard
(side view) (side view)
While the arrangement on the left may meet the requirements of NFPA 12, the arrangement on the right will
provide better coverage of the hazard and better “confinement” of the carbon dioxide around the hazard.
If a hazard is bounded by perimeter walls, the walls can provide a natural “confinement” of the carbon dioxide
which can be enhanced by the positioning of the nozzles.
It is advisable to consider the discharge pattern of the nozzle as well as the required flow rate when selecting
the type of nozzle to be used for a given hazard.
A final note on nozzle locations: Locate nozzles where they will not be subject to displacement by operations
in and around the hazard. For example, a nozzle located “head high” in a walkway around a printing press
will not likely be left in position for long. The first pressman who hits his head on the nozzle will likely swing it
off to the side – out of his way – but also discharging into empty space. Likewise nozzles that could be hit by
parts on a conveyor are unlikely to stay in the required position.
Rate-by-Volume Nozzle Chart

Nozzle Height (H) Flow Rate Coated Surface
feet (meters) lb./min. Side of square (X)
(kg/min.) feet (meters)
1.00 (0.30) 1 19.4 (8.8) 2.10 (0.64)
1
1.25 (0.38) 21.6 (9.8) 2.21 (0.67)
1
1.50 (0.46) 24.0 (10.9) 2.33 (0.71)
1
1.75 (0.53) 26.6 (12.1) 2.45 (0.75)
2
2.00 (0.61) 29.6 (13.4) 2.58 (0.79)
2
2.25 (0.69) 33.5 (15.2) 2.74 (0.84)
2
2.50 (0.76) 37.3 (17.0) 2.89 (0.88)
2
2.75 (0.84) 41.2 (18.7) 3.05 (0.93)
2
3.00 (0.91) 45.1 (20.5) 3.22 (0.98)
2
3.25 (0.99) 49.0 (22.2) 3.35 (1.02)
2
3.50 (1.07) 52.8 (24.0) 3.48 (1.06)
2
3.75 (1.14) 56.7 (25.7) 3.61 (1.10)
2
4.00 (1.22) 60.6 (27.5) 3.76 (1.15)

4.25 (1.30) 2 64.4 (29.2) 3.88 (1.18)

2
4.50 (1.37) 68.3 (31.0) 4.00 (1.22)
2
4.75 (1.45) 72.2 (32.8) 4.12 (1.26)
2
5.00 (1.52) 76.1 (34.5) 4.25 (1.30)
1
5.25 (1.60) 76.5 (34.7) 4.25 (1.30)
1
5.50 (1.68) 79.5 (36.1) 4.25 (1.30)
1
5.75 (1.75) 82.5 (37.4) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.00 (1.83) 85.5 (38.8) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.25 (1.91) 89.3 (40.5) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.50 (1.98) 92.3 (41.9) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.75 (2.06) 95.3 (43.2) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.00 (2.13) 99.0 (44.9) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.25 (2.20) 102.0 (46.3) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.50 (2.29) 105.0 (47.6) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.75 (2.36) 108.0 (49.0) 4.25 (1.30)
1
8.00 (2.44) 110.0 (50.0) 4.25 (1.30)
1
2
UL listed values (FZKX.EX4447)
The method used to calculate the nozzle quantity is:

(English Units)
System Flow Rate ÷ Minimum Nozzle Flow Rate @ Distance from Hazard = Total Nozzles Required
(lbs./min.) (lbs./min.) (ft.)
561 ÷ 105.0 @ 7.5’ = 5.34, round up to 6
(Metric Units)
(kg./min.) (kg./min.) (m)
254.72 ÷ 47.6 @ 2.8m = 5.35, round up to 6 Nozzle Distance

from Hazard
2.3.7.2.4 REVISED SYSTEM DESIGN FLOW RATE
After nozzles are positioned and the flow rate for each nozzle is determined
(based on the distance from the nozzle to hazard), the system flow rate is
recalculated based on the combined nozzle flow rates:
(English Units) Hazard
Nozzle(s) Required x Nozzle Flow Rate = System Flow Rate
(lbs./min.) (lbs./min.)
(Side View)
6 x 105.0 = 630
(Metric Units)
(kg./min.) (kg./min.)
6 x 47.6 = 285.6

2.3.7.2.5 DETERMINE QUANTITY AGENT REQUIRED

The quantity of CO2 required to protect the “assumed” volume is calculated by multiplying the revised system flow
rate by the minimum liquid agent discharge time1 and then multiplying that result by the liquid CO2 compensation
factor. The method used to calculate is:
(English Units)
System Flow Rate x 1.4 x Discharge Time 1 = Qty. CO2 Req’d
(lbs./min.) (Liquid CO2 Compensation) (minute) (lbs.)
630 x 1.4 x 0.5 = 441
(Metric Units)
(kg./min.) (Liquid CO2 Compensation) (minute) (kg.)
285.6 x 1.4 x 0.5 = 200
1
Minimum liquid discharge time per NFPA 12 is 30 seconds with the exception of hazards containing a fuel whose auto ignition
temperature is less than its boiling point (example, paraffin wax). In the later case, the minimum liquid discharge time is 3 minutes. In all
cases, the minimum liquid discharge time will need to be increased if necessary to allow adequate cooling time for metal and other
objects that can become heated above the auto-ignition temperature of the fuel to cool below the fuel’s auto-ignition temperature.
2.3.7.2.6 DETERMINE QUANTITY AGENT SUPPLY

The total amount of CO2 to be supplied is calculated by rounding the quantity of agent required to the nearest
whole cylinder size.
(NOTE: The cylinder capacity chosen is normally based on the most economical choice, taking into account
cylinder capacity, the amount of CO2, piloting hardware, cylinder racking, etc. In the examples below the option to
use either 75 lb cylinders or 100 lb cylinders was provided to allow the user of this guide a clearer understanding
of how the total amount of carbon dioxide supplied is derived.)
(English Units)
441 lbs. ÷ 75 lbs./cylinder = 5.88, round up to 6 (75 lb. cylinders); 6 x 75 lb./cylinder = 450 lbs. supplied
or
(Metric Units)
200 kg. ÷ 34 kg./cylinder = 5.88, round up to 6 (34 kg. cylinders); 6 x 34 kg./cylinder = 204 kg. supplied
or
200 kg. ÷ 45.4 kg./cylinder = 4.41, round up to 5 (45.4 kg. cylinders); 5 x 45.4 kg./cylinder = 227 kg. supplied
2.3.7.2.7 LAYOUT PIPE NETWORK AND RUN HYDRAULIC CALCULATION

Before final design is completed a piping layout of the system should be finalized and a hydraulic calculation
needs to be run to verify that the predicted liquid discharge time for each nozzle equals or exceeds the minimum
liquid discharge time. If necessary, adjust the quantity of CO2 provided in storage to deliver liquid flow at each
nozzle for the minimum liquid discharge time required.

2.3.7.3 LOCAL APPLICATION DESIGN – RATE-BY-VOLUME FOR THREE DIMENSIONAL HAZARD IN

LARGE ROOM WITH PERMANENT PERIMETER WALLS
The following steps need to be followed to determine the assumed volume, the CO2 flow rate, the location of
nozzles and the quantity of carbon dioxide required when protecting a three dimensional hazard in a large room
with permanent perimeter walls.
2.3.7.3.1 DETERMINE ASSUMED VOLUME WITH PERMANENT PERIMETER WALLS

The “assumed volume” is calculated by first adding 2 feet (0.61m) to the extreme dimensions for all four sides and
the top of the protected hazard or by using the actual distance to the permanent wall(s) (NFPA 12 requirement).
The following conditions apply:
No volume deductions for objects within the protected volume can be used.
No assumed volume dimension may be less than 4.0 feet (1.22m).
Requires a “Closed Floor” or:
a) If the hazard being protected does not have a closed floor, the volume below must be added to the
hazard volume and additional CO2 agent and nozzles must be provided to cover the space below the
hazard.
b) If the area below is being protected by a CO2 system that is discharged at the same time and has a
discharge time equal to or greater than the rate-by-volume system discharge time, the agent discharged
below can be considered the same as a “closed floor”.
c) If the openings in the floor are relatively small they can be screened using local application – rate by
area nozzle coverage directed into the rate-by-volume hazard area.
Permanent perimeter wall(s) which are not part of the hazard itself may be used to reduce the required system
flow rate.
The presence of such walls can reduce the discharge rate from 1 lb/min/ft3 to 0.25 lb/min/ft3 depending on the
area of permanent perimeter walls that apply (Per NFPA 12).
Permanent perimeter wall(s) can reduce the amount of CO2 required if all the following conditions are present:
the permanent walls are close to the hazard
permanent walls extend at least 2.0’ (0.61m) above hazard
the walls do not form part of the hazard itself.
2.0’ (0.61m) Minimum
Permanent
Wall
Hazard
Closed Floor
(side view)
General Rules:
If permanent perimeter walls are more than the following distances from the hazard being protected:
1 perimeter wall = 4.0’ (1.22m)
2 perimeter walls = 5.0’ (1.53m)
the amount of agent required to protect the hazard will be less by adding 2.0’ (0.61m) to each side.
For sides of a hazard which are not bounded by walls, add 2 feet (0.61m) to each dimension.
For sides of hazard which are bounded by walls, use the actual distance from the hazard to the wall.
Add 2 feet (0.61m) to topmost dimension of the hazard to determine the assumed volume height.

Assumed Volume = Length x Width x Height + 2.0’ (0.61m) to any side not defined by permanent walls or actual
distance to permanent wall(s).
(English Units) SIDE A

Length (L): 7.5 + 4.0 + 2.0 = 13.5 Boundary 7.5’ + 4.0’ +
of Assumed
Width (W): 3.5 + 4.0 + 2.0 = 9.5 Volume
Height (H): 4.5 + 2.0 = 6.5
2.0’
Assumed Volume:
13.5 x 9.5 x 6.5 = 834 ft3 7.5’
2.0’ 4.0’
3.5’
(Metric Units) SIDE B
Length (L): 2.28 + 1.22 + 0.61 = 4.11 3.5’ + 4.0’ +
Ht. = 4.5’
Width (W): 1.07 + 1.22 + 0.61 = 2.90
Height (H): 1.37 + 0.61 = 1.98
4.0’ (Use actual distance)
Assumed Volume:
4.11 x 2.90 x 1.98 = 23.60 m3
(top view)
2.3.7.3.2 DETERMINE TOTAL SURFACE AREA OF ASSUMED VOLUME PERIMETER WALLS

(English Units)
(Assumed Length x Assumed Height) x 2 = Surface Area of Front & Back
(Assumed Width x Assumed Height) x 2 = Surface Area of 2 Sides
(ft.) (ft.) = Total Surface Area
(ft2)
Front Surface
Front & Back: 2 [(7.5 + 4.0 + 2.0) x (4.5 + 2.0] = 175.5 ft2
Sides: 2 [(3.5 + 4.0 + 2.0) x (4.5 + 2.0] = 123.5 ft2
2.0’
Total Surface Area: 175.5 + 123.5 = 299.0 ft2 7.5’

2.0’ 4.0’
Side 1
Surface Side 2
3.5’
Surface
Ht. =
4
4.0’
Back Surface
(top view)
(Metric Units)
= Total Surface Area
(m) (m) (m2)
Front & Back: 2 [(2.28 + 1.22 + 0.61) x (1.37 + 0.61)] = 16.28 m2

Sides: 2 [(1.07 + 1.22 + 0.61) x (1.37 + 0.61)] = 11.48 m2
Total Surface Area: 16.28 + 11.48 = 27.76 m2

2.3.7.3.3 DETERMINE TOTAL OPEN AREA

The total “open area” is defined as the surface area (length x height) of each open wall or portion thereof added
together. The “open” width dimensions include the additional “assumed” 2 feet (0.61m) and /or the distance to
the fixed perimeter wall. The actual height of the hazard PLUS 2 feet (0.61m) is the height of each boundary of
the assumed volume.
(English Units)
[(Length + 2.0 + 2.0) x (Height + 2.0)] + [(Width + 2.0 + 2.0) x (Height + 2.0)] = Total Open Area
(ft.) (ft.) (ft.) (ft.) (ft2)
or actual distance to permanent perimeter wall(s)
[(7.5 + 4.0 + 2.0) x (6.5)] + [(3.5 + 4.0 + 2.0) x (6.5)]

or 87.75 + 61.75
Total Open Area = 149.5 ft2
(Metric Units)
(m) (m) (m) (m) (m2)
[(2.29 + 1.22 + 0.61) x (1.98)] + [(1.07 + 1.22 + 0.61) x (1.98)]

or 8.16 + 5.74
Front Wall (Open)
Total Open Area = 13.9 m2
7.5+4.0+2.0
2.0’
2.0’ 7.5’ 4.0’

Side
Wall Side
3.5’ Wall
(Open)
3.5+4.0+2.0 (Closed)
Ht. = 4.5’
4.0’
Back Wall (Closed)
(top view)
2.3.7.3.4 DETERMINE OPEN AREA PERCENTAGE

The open area percentage (expressed as a decimal) is determined by:
(English Units)
Open Area ÷ Total Surface Area = Open Area Percentage
(ft2) (ft2) (decimal)
149.5 ÷ 299.0 = 0.50 (50%)
(Metric Units)
(m2) (m2) (decimal)
13.9 ÷ 27.76 = 0.50 (50%)

2.3.7.3.5 DETERMINE CLOSED AREA PERCENTAGE

The closed area percentage (expressed as a decimal) is determined by:
(English & Metric Units)
1 – Open Area Percentage = Closed Area Percentage
(decimal) (decimal)
1 – 0.5 = 0.5
2.3.7.3.6 DETERMINE FLOW RATE PER UNIT VOLUME

The method used to calculate the flow rate per unit volume is shown in the figure below.
Local Application Rate By Volume
Metric English
16.0 1.000
Rate-by-volume
15.2 0.950
Mathematical method
Flow Rate per unit volume = 1 - (.75 X % enclosed (expressed as a
decimal))
13.6 0.850
12.0 0.750
10.4 0.650
8.8 0.550
7.2 0.450
5.6 0.350
4.0 0.250
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1

Fraction of perimeter enclosed

1 – (Closed Area Percentage x 0.75) = Flow Rate per unit volume
(decimal) (decimal)
1 – (0.50 x 0.75) = 0.625
2.3.7.3.7 DETERMINE REDUCED FLOW RATE

The method used to calculate the reduced flow rate is:
(English Units)
Flow Rate per Unit Volume x Assumed Volume = Reduced Flow Rate
(decimal) (ft3) (lbs./min.)
0.625 x 834 = 521.25
(Metric Units)
(decimal) (m3) (kg./min.)
(0.625 x 16) x 23.60 = 236
2.3.7.3.7 DETERMINE QUANTITY OF NOZZLES REQUIRED

The number of nozzles required for a rate-by-volume system to protect a hazard in an open area is based on
following factors:
the hazard being protected.
application)
If the hazard contains liquids in depth, nozzles directed at such liquids shall have flow rate not greater
than that for which the nozzle is listed at the given distance from a liquid surface. Use of the higher flow
rates approved for “wetted surfaces” could produce splashing of the liquid and possibly spread the fire
outside the protected volume.
Considerations for Nozzle Location and Selection:
Although this guide is presented to help standardize the design of local application rate-by-volume systems, it
is possible to layout systems for a given local application hazard in a variety of ways. By using different styles
of nozzles and locating nozzles in various positions several design layouts (all meeting the basic
requirements of NFPA 12) are possible for any given hazard.
The quantity of agent required for a given hazard may vary somewhat depending on nozzle choice but the
approach to calculating agent quantity should be consistent regardless of nozzle type.
Remember, rate-by-volume local application is intended to apply a blanket of carbon dioxide over all portions
of the hazard for a sufficient time to extinguish the flames and permit the fuel and surroundings to cool below
the auto-ignition temperature of the fuel. While the approach is based on engineering principles, there is
some “art” in positioning nozzles so the discharge will tend to stay confined about the hazard.
For rate by volume systems, nozzles should be located so that the discharge will be naturally contained about
the hazard as much as possible. If the hazard is tall and fuel can collect on the floor or lower levels multiple
levels of nozzles may be advisable to assure complete coverage of all areas.
If a hazard is bounded by perimeter walls, the walls can provide a natural “confinement” of the carbon dioxide
which can be enhanced by the positioning of the nozzles.
In the sketch below, the arrangement on the left may be adequate but the arrangement on the right is likely to
produce better confinement of the carbon dioxide about the hazard.

ACCEPTABLE METHOD PREFERRED METHOD
Hazard Hazard
It is advisable to consider the discharge pattern of the nozzle as well as the required flow rate when selecting
the type of nozzle to be used for a given hazard.
A final note on nozzle locations: Locate nozzles where they will not be subject to displacement by operations
in and around the hazard. For example, a nozzle located “head high” in a walkway around a printing press
will not likely be left in position for long. The first pressman who hits his head on the nozzle will likely swing it
off to the side – out of his way – but also discharging into empty space. Likewise nozzles that could be hit by
parts on a conveyor are unlikely to stay in the required position.

1.00 (0.30) 1 19.4 (8.8) 2.10 (0.64)
1
1.25 (0.38) 21.6 (9.8) 2.21 (0.67)
1
1.50 (0.46) 24.0 (10.9) 2.33 (0.71)
1
1.75 (0.53) 26.6 (12.1) 2.45 (0.75)
2
2.00 (0.61) 29.6 (13.4) 2.58 (0.79)
2
2.25 (0.69) 33.5 (15.2) 2.74 (0.84)
2
2.50 (0.76) 37.3 (17.0) 2.89 (0.88)
2
2.75 (0.84) 41.2 (18.7) 3.05 (0.93)
2
3.00 (0.91) 45.1 (20.5) 3.22 (0.98)
2
3.25 (0.99) 49.0 (22.2) 3.35 (1.02)
2
3.50 (1.07) 52.8 (24.0) 3.48 (1.06)
2
3.75 (1.14) 56.7 (25.7) 3.61 (1.10)
2
4.00 (1.22) 60.6 (27.5) 3.76 (1.15)
2
4.25 (1.30) 64.4 (29.2) 3.88 (1.18)
2
4.50 (1.37) 68.3 (31.0) 4.00 (1.22)
2
4.75 (1.45) 72.2 (32.8) 4.12 (1.26)
2
5.00 (1.52) 76.1 (34.5) 4.25 (1.30)

5.25 (1.60) 1 76.5 (34.7) 4.25 (1.30)

1
5.50 (1.68) 79.5 (36.1) 4.25 (1.30)
1
5.75 (1.75) 82.5 (37.4) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.00 (1.83) 85.5 (38.8) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.25 (1.91) 89.3 (40.5) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.50 (1.98) 92.3 (41.9) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.75 (2.06) 95.3 (43.2) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.00 (2.13) 99.0 (44.9) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.25 (2.20) 102.0 (46.3) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.50 (2.29) 105.0 (47.6) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.75 (2.36) 108.0 (49.0) 4.25 (1.30)
1
8.00 (2.44) 110.0 (50.0) 4.25 (1.30)
1
2

(English Units)
522 ÷ 76.1 @ 5.0 = 6.86, round up to 7
(Metric Units)
236 ÷ 34.5 @ 1.52 = 6.86, round up to 7

Nozzle Distance
from Hazard
Hazard
(Side View)
2.3.7.3.8 DETERMINE REVISED SYSTEM FLOW RATE

After nozzles are positioned and the flow rate for each nozzle is determined (based on the distance from the
nozzle to hazard), the system flow rate is recalculated based on the combined nozzle flow rates:
(English Units)
7 x 76.1 = 532.7
(Metric Units)

7 x 34.5 = 241.5
2.3.7.3.9 DETERMINE QUANTITY OF AGENT REQUIRED

(English Units)
533 x 1.4 x 0.5 = 374
(Metric Units)
242 x 1.4 x 0.5 = 170
1
2.3.7.3.10 DETERMINE QUANTITY OF AGENT SUPPLIED

(English Units)
374 lbs. ÷ 75 lb./cylinder = 4.98, round up to 5 (75 lb. cylinders); 5 x 75 lb./cylinder = 375 lbs. supplied
or
374 lbs. ÷ 100 lb./cylinder = 3.74, round up to 4 (100 lb cylinders); 4 x 100 lb./cylinder = 400 lbs supplied
(Metric Units)
170 kg. ÷ 34 kg./cylinder = 5, 5 x 34 kg./cylinder = 170 kg. supplied
or
170 kg. ÷ 45.4 kg./cylinder = 3.74, round up to 4 (45.4 kg. cylinders); 4 x 45.4 kg./cylinder = 181.6 kg. supplied


2.3.7.4 LOCAL APPLICATION DESIGN – RATE-BY-VOLUME FOR ENCLOSURE WITH LEAKAGE, WHERE
LEAKAGE PROHIBITS THE USE OF A TOTAL FLOODING SYSTEM
2.3.7.4.1 DETERMINE ASSUMED VOLUME OF ENCLOSURE

Calculate by adding 2 feet (0.61m) to any side or opening not defined by permanent wall(s).
(English Units)
Length: 16.0 + 0 = 16.0 6’-0” 2’-0”
Width: 6.0 + 2.0 = 8.0 (open side)
Height: 7.0 + 0 = 7.0 16’-0”
Plus the assumed volume for 2 openings, 1 on each end

of cabinet
Length: 5.0 7’-0” Ht.

Width: 2.0
Height: 4.0
Assumed volume = 4’-0”
(16.0 x 8.0 x 7.0) + 2 x (5.0 x 2.0 x 4.0) = 976 ft3
5’-0”
(Metric Units)
Length: 4.88 + 0 = 4.88 2’-0”
Width: 1.83 + 0.61 = 2.44 (open side)
Height: 2.13 + 0 = 2.13
Plus the assumed volume for 2 openings, 1 on each end of cabinet
Length: 1.52
Width: 0.61
Height: 1.22
Assumed volume =
(4.88 x 2.44 x 2.13) + 2 x (1.52 x 0.61 x 1.22) = 30.95 m3
2.3.7.4.2 DETERMINE TOTAL SURFACE AREA OF ASSUMED VOLUME ENCLOSURE WALLS

(excludes top and bottom)
(English Units)
Length: 16.0
Width: 8.0 (6.0 + 2.0)
Height: 7.0
Front & Back: 2 (16.0 x 7.0) = 224 ft2

Sides: 2 (8.0 x 7.0) = 112 ft2
Total Surface Area: 336 ft2
(Metric Units)
Length: 4.88
Width: 2.44 (1.83 + 0.61)
Height: 2.13
Front & Back: 2 (4.88 x 2.13) = 20.79 m2

Sides: 2 (2.44 x 2.13) = 10.39 m2
Total Surface Area: 31.28 m2
2.3.7.4.3 DETERMINE TOTAL OPEN AREA

The total “open area” is defined as the surface area (length x height) of each open wall or portion thereof added
together. The “open” width dimensions include the additional “assumed” 2 feet (0.61m).

Total Open area = total surface area of each open wall or portion thereof:
(English Units) 8’-0”
Open Front: 16.0 x 7.0 = 112 ft2 (6’-0” + 2’-0”)
Opening on Sides: (5.0 x 4.0) x 2 = 40 ft2
Total Open Area: 152 ft2 16’-0”
(Metric Units)
Open Front: 4.88 x 2.13 = 10.41 m2
Opening on Sides: (1.52 x 1.22) x 2 = 3.71 m2
Total Open Area: 14.12 m2
2.3.7.4.4 DETERMINE OPEN AREA PERCENTAGE

The open area percentage (expressed as a decimal) is
determined by:
(English Units)
Opening Size
Open Area ÷ Total Surface Area = Open Area Percentage L=5.0’ x W=4.0’
Opening Size
152 ÷ 336 = 0.452 (45.2%) L=5.0’ x W=4.0’
(Metric Units)
(m2) (m2) (decimal)
14.12 ÷ 31.28 = 0.452 (45.2%)
2.3.7.4.5 DETERMINE CLOSED AREA PERCENTAGE

The closed area percentage (expressed as a decimal) is determined by:
(decimal) (decimal)
1 – 0.452 = 0.548 (54.8%)

2.3.7.4.6 DETERMINE FLOW RATE PER UNIT VOLUME

The method used to calculate the flow rate per unit volume is shown in the figure below.
Local Application Rate By Volume
Metric English
16.0 1.000
Rate-by-volume
15.2 0.950
Mathematical method
Flow Rate per unit volume = 1 - (.75 X % enclosed (expressed as a
decimal))
13.6 0.850
12.0 0.750
10.4 0.650
8.8 0.550
7.2 0.450
5.6 0.350
4.0 0.250
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1

Fraction of perimeter enclosed

1 – (Closed Area Percentage x 0.75) = Flow Per Unit Volume
(decimal) (lbs./min./ft3 or kg./min./m3)
1 – (0.548 x 0.75) = 0.589
2.3.7.4.7 DETERMINE REDUCTED FLOW RATE

The method used to calculate the reduced flow rate is:
(English Units)
Flow Rate Reduction Factor x System Discharge Rate x Assumed Volume = Reduced Flow Rate
(lb./min./ft3) (lb./min./ft3) (ft3) (lbs./min.)
0.589 x 1 x 976 = 575
(Metric Units)
(kg./min./m3) (kg./min./m3) (m3) (kg./min.)
0.589 x 16 x 30.95 = 291.7
2.3.7.4.8 DETERMINE QUANTITY OF NOZZLE(S) REQUIRED

The number of nozzles required for a rate-by-volume system to protect an enclosure with openings is based on
following factors:
the hazard being protected or bottom of the enclosure.

application).
If the hazard contains liquids in depth, the “S” nozzles must be located at 1.0 feet (0.3m) or more above
the liquid surface.
In the sketch below, the arrangement on the left is the preferred method because the nozzle is discharging away
from the opening and the arrangement on the right is not recommended because the nozzle is discharging toward
the opening allows faster agent loss.
ACCEPTABLE / PREFERRED METHOD NOT RECOMMENDED METHOD
Enclosure Opening
Hazard Hazard

1.00 (0.30) 1 19.4 (8.8) 2.10 (0.64)
1
1.25 (0.38) 21.6 (9.8) 2.21 (0.67)
1.50 (0.46) 1 24.0 (10.9) 2.33 (0.71)
1
1.75 (0.53) 26.6 (12.1) 2.45 (0.75)
2
2.00 (0.61) 29.6 (13.4) 2.58 (0.79)
2
2.25 (0.69) 33.5 (15.2) 2.74 (0.84)
2
2.50 (0.76) 37.3 (17.0) 2.89 (0.88)
2
2.75 (0.84) 41.2 (18.7) 3.05 (0.93)
2
3.00 (0.91) 45.1 (20.5) 3.22 (0.98)
2
3.25 (0.99) 49.0 (22.2) 3.35 (1.02)
2
3.50 (1.07) 52.8 (24.0) 3.48 (1.06)
2
3.75 (1.14) 56.7 (25.7) 3.61 (1.10)
2
4.00 (1.22) 60.6 (27.5) 3.76 (1.15)
2
4.25 (1.30) 64.4 (29.2) 3.88 (1.18)
2
4.50 (1.37) 68.3 (31.0) 4.00 (1.22)

4.75 (1.45) 2 72.2 (32.8) 4.12 (1.26)

2
5.00 (1.52) 76.1 (34.5) 4.25 (1.30)
1
5.25 (1.60) 76.5 (34.7) 4.25 (1.30)
1
5.50 (1.68) 79.5 (36.1) 4.25 (1.30)
1
5.75 (1.75) 82.5 (37.4) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.00 (1.83) 85.5 (38.8) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.25 (1.91) 89.3 (40.5) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.50 (1.98) 92.3 (41.9) 4.25 (1.30)
1
6.75 (2.06) 95.3 (43.2) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.00 (2.13) 99.0 (44.9) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.25 (2.20) 102.0 (46.3) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.50 (2.29) 105.0 (47.6) 4.25 (1.30)
1
7.75 (2.36) 108.0 (49.0) 4.25 (1.30)
1
8.00 (2.44) 110.0 (50.0) 4.25 (1.30)
1
2

(English Units)
575 ÷ 115 @ 5.0 = 5
(Metric Units)
260.8 ÷ 52.16 @ 1.52 = 5
Nozzle Distance
from Hazard
Hazard
(side view)
2.3.7.4.9 DETERMINE REVISED SYSTEM FLOW RATE

After nozzles are positioned and the flow rate for each nozzle is determined (based on the distance from the
nozzle to hazard), the system flow rate is recalculated based on the combined nozzle flow rates:
(English Units)
Nozzles Required x Average Nozzle Flow Rate = System Flow Rate

5 x 115 = 575
(Metric Units)
Nozzles Required x Average Nozzle Flow Rate = Revised System Flow Rate
5 x 52.16 = 260.8
2.3.7.4.10 DETERMINE QUANTITY OF CO2 REQUIRED

(English Units)
575.0 x 1.4 x 0.5 = 402.5
(Metric Units)
260.8 x 1.4 x 0.5 = 182.6
1
2.3.7.3.11 DETERMINE QUANTITY OF AGENT SUPPLIED

(English Units)
402.5 lbs. ÷ 75 lb./cylinder = 5.37, round up to 6 (75 lb. cylinders); 6 x 75 lb./cylinder = 450 lbs. supplied
or
(Metric Units)
182.6 kg. ÷ 34 kg./cylinder = 5.37, round up to 6 (34 kg. cylinders); 6 x 34 kg./cylinder = 204 kg. supplied
or
182.6 kg. ÷ 45.4 kg./cylinder = 4.03, round up to 5 (45.4 kg. cylinders); 5 x 45.4 kg./cylinder = 227 kg. supplied


2.4 COMBINATION TOTAL-FLOOD AND LOCAL APPLICATION SYSTEMS

For applications that require a portion of the hazard to be protected with a Total-Flood system design, and
another portion to be protected with a Local Application system design, the discharge rate of the Total-Flooding
portion must be determined in accordance with the Local Application requirements. Therefore, the discharge time
requirement is 30 seconds for a combined application system design. To determine the total CO2 agent supply
required for a combined system, calculate the Total-Flood and Local Application portions of the hazard separately
as described in preceding sections of this manual and add them together. However, since the discharge time
requirement is 30 seconds, the flow rate requirement for the Total-Flood portion(s) must be adjusted as follows:
NOTE: To determine the flow rate required for the total-flood portion, the agent supply quantity must be divided
by 0.7 >1.4 x 0.5 (vapor compensation factor x discharge time in minutes)@.
2.5 PIPING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

2.5.1 GENERAL
Pipe and fittings shall be of metallic, noncombustible, materials having physical and chemical characteristics such
that their deterioration under stress can be predicted with reliability. Where piping systems are installed in
severely corrosive atmospheres, special corrosion-resistant materials or coatings shall be used.
2.5.2 PIPE
Pipe used in CO2 systems shall be black or galvanized steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-53, seamless or electric
welded, Grade A or B; or ASTM A-106, Grade A, B, or C. ASTM A-120 pipe and ordinary cast-iron pipe shall not
be used. Stainless steel pipe shall be Type 304 or Type 316 for threaded connections, or Type 304, 316, 304L,
or 316L for welded connections. Pipe that is 3/4” NPT and smaller shall be permitted to be Schedule 40.
Pipe that is 1” through 4” NPT shall be Schedule 80.
While the use of flexible piping system components is not recommended, it is allowed. Flexible piping system
components shall be used only when there is no alternative method of installation. All flexible piping system
components shall have a minimum burst pressure of 5,000 psi (34,474 kPa).
2.5.3 FITTINGS
Class 300 malleable iron and/or ductile iron fittings shall be used for all nominal sizes through 2”, and forged steel
fittings shall be used for all larger sizes. Flanged joints upstream of stop valves shall be Class 600, and flanged
joints downstream of stop valves, or in systems with no stop valves, may be Class 300. Stainless steel fittings
shall be Type 304 or 316, wrought/forged (per ASTM A-182); Class 3000, threaded or socketweld, for all sizes
1/8” through 4”.
NOTE: Class 150 lb. malleable iron and ordinary cast iron fittings, shall not be used.
2.5.3.1 OTHER APPROVED FITTINGS

Welded joints, screwed, or flanged fittings (malleable or ductile iron) may be used. Mechanical grooved joint
fittings may be used only if they are specifically listed for CO2 service. Flush bushings shall not be used.
Where hex bushings are used for one pipe size reduction, a 3000-lb. steel bushing shall be provided to maintain
adequate strength. Where hex bushings are used for more than one pipe size reduction, the materials and
strength must be in accordance with those outlined in paragraph 2.5.3 above. Suitable flared, compression-type,
or brazed fittings shall be used with compatible tubing. Where brazed joints are used, the brazing alloy shall have
a melting point of 1,000 qF (538 qC), or higher.

2.5.4 PIPING SUPPORT

The piping system shall be securely supported with due allowance for CO2 agent thrust forces, thermal expansion
/ contraction, and shall not be subject to mechanical, chemical, or other damage. Where explosions are possible,
the piping system shall be provided with hangers or supports that are least likely to be displaced.
NOTE: Pipe shall be reamed and cleaned before assembly, and installed in a neat, workmanlike, manner. After
assembly, the entire system shall be blown out before nozzles or other discharge devices are installed.
2.5.5 VALVES
All valves shall be suitable for the intended use, particularly in regard to flow capacity and operation. They shall
be used only within the temperature range and other conditions for which they are listed and/or approved. Valves
shall be located, installed, or suitably protected so that they are not subject to mechanical, chemical, or other
damage that would render them inoperative.
Valves used in high-pressure systems and continuously under pressure shall have a minimum bursting pressure
of 6,000 psi (41,369 kPa). Those valves not under continuous pressure shall have a minimum bursting pressure
of 5,000 psi (34,474 kPa).
2.5.5.1 SELECTOR VALVES

Selector valves allow a single agent supply to be utilized for protection of multiple hazards, reducing the total
amount of agent required. They are used to direct the flow of Carbon Dioxide to a single hazard of a multiple
hazard application.
NOTE: The selector valves are Factory Approvals approved.
Selector valves are shipped from the factory in the normally closed state. The Solenoid Actuator must be fired,
either electrically or manually, to actuate the selector valve. The selector valve must be activated to allow the
agent to flow to the selected hazard.
The Fike Cheetah panel provides solenoid circuit supervision via use of a Solenoid Release Modules (SRM).
One SRM is required for each 24v solenoid.
The equivalent length of each Selector Valve must be added to the Flow Calculation.

2.5.6 PRESSURE RELIEF PROVISIONS

In piping systems where valve arrangement introduces sections of closed piping, such sections shall be equipped
with pressure relief devices, or the valves shall be designed to prevent entrapment of liquid CO2. The pressure
relief device(s) shall operate between 2,400 and 3,000 psi (16,547 and 20,684 kPa). Where pressure operated
cylinder valves are used, a means shall be provided to vent any cylinder gas leakage from the manifold or piping
system, but will prevent loss of CO2 agent when the system operates/discharges. All pressure relief devices shall
be of such design, and so located, that their discharge will not injure personnel.
2.5.7 ESTIMATING PIPE SIZES

Prior to performing a CO2 flow calculation, the piping system’s required pipe sizes can be estimated by using the
table located below. However, this table contains “estimated” sizes only and a flow calculation must always be
performed prior to the installation of any piping or discharge nozzles.
Pipe Size Estimating Table

Pipe Size
Avg. Flow Rate
(Schedule)
US lbs/min kg/min
1/2" (40) 15 - 100 6.8 - 45.4
3/4" (40) 101 - 200 45.8 - 90.7
1" (80) 201 - 350 91.2 - 158.8
1-1/4" (80) 351 - 700 159.2 - 317.5
1-1/2" (80) 701 - 1000 318.0 - 453.6
2" (80) 1001 - 1600 454.0 - 725.8
2-1/2" (80) 1601 - 2500 726.2 - 1134.0
3" (80) 2501 - 4000 1134.5 - 1814.4

2.6 EQUIVALENT LENGTHS

In the process of calculating flow rates and quantities of CO2 required, it is necessary to use equivalent lengths
for some of the system components. These equivalent lengths are listed in the following paragraphs.
2.6.1 CHECK VALVES
The equivalent lengths listed in the table below apply for either vertical or horizontal mounting.
CHECK VALVE EQUIVALENT LENGTHS
Nominal Sch. 40 Sch. 80
Part No.
Size (NPT) ft (m) ft (m)
C02-1204 1/2” 10.0 (3.05) 5.0 (1.52)
C02-1205 3/4” 8.0 (2.44) 4.0 (1.22)
C02-1206 1" N/A 3.0 (0.91)
C02-1207 1-1/2” N/A 3.0 (0.91)
C02-1240 2" N/A 2.5 (0.76)
2.6.2 STOP / MAINTENANCE VALVES

The equivalent lengths for Stop / Maintenance Valves are listed in the table below.
STOP / MAINTENANCE VALVE EQUIVALENT LENGTHS

Nominal Sch. 40 Sch. 80
Part No.
Size (NPT) ft (m) ft (m)
C02-1210 1/2" 0.4 (0.12) N/A
C02-1211 3/4" 0.51 (0.16) N/A
C02-1212 1" N/A 0.6 (0.18)
C02-1213 1-1/2" N/A 0.9 (0/27)
2.6.3 PNEUMATIC TIME DELAYS

The equivalent lengths for Pneumatic Time Delays are listed in the table below.
PNEUMATIC TIME VALVE EQUIVALENT LENGTHS

Sch. 40 Sch. 80
Part No. Time Value
ft (m) ft (m)
C70-235 30 Sec. 55.0 (16.8) 32.0 (9.8)
C70-237 60 Sec. 55.0 (16.8) 32.0 (9.8)
2.6.4 SELECTOR VALVES

The equivalent lengths for Selector Valves are listed in the table below.
SELECTOR VALVE EQUIVALENT LENGTHS

Sch. 80
Part No. Nominal Size
ft (m)
70-1899-10-XX 1” (25mm) 1.40 (0.43)
70-1899-15-XX 1-1/2” (40mm) 2.70 (0.82)
70-1899-20-XX 2” (50mm) 7.81 (2.38)
70-1899-30-XX 3” (80mm) 5.16 (1.57)

Section 3
Sample Problems
Carbon Dioxide
Manual P/N C06-018
SECTION 3 – SAMPLE PROBLEMS
3.0 SAMPLE PROBLEMS

This section contains sample problems; each detailing a specific system design concept. Each sample problem
provides step-by-step instructions on how to engineer each particular system design, including adjusting agent
quantities for specific hazard conditions. It should be noted that each example steps through a “worst case”
scenario that involves multiple special hazard conditions. Where a condition does not exist, that step is simply
deleted from the process when designing a system.
3.1 TOTAL FLOOD APPLICATION SAMPLES
3.1.1 SURFACE FIRE HAZARDS
Example: Flammable Liquids Storage Room
Hazard Size: 35 ft (10.67 m) long x 15 ft (4.57 m) wide x 12 ft (3.66 m) high
Determine the volume of the hazard being protected.
x The volume is determined by multiplying: length x width x height
x Volume = 35 ft x 15 ft x 12 ft = 6,300 ft3 (10.67 m x 4.57 m x 3.66 m = 178.47 m3)
3.1.1.2 REQUIRED FLOODING FACTOR

The flooding factor is based upon the volume of the hazard being protected.
FLOODING FACTOR
(From table “Flooding Factors for Surface Fires” in Section 2.2.1.1)
3 3
6,300 ft requires a volume factor of 0.050 lb CO2/ft 178.47 m requires a volume factor of 0.80 kg CO2/m3
3
3.1.1.3 MINIMUM EXTINGUISHING QUANTITY (34% CONC.) REQUIRED

The baseline amount of CO2 required for a total-flood hazard is calculated by determining the quantity required for
the hazard volume at the minimum extinguishing concentration of 34%.
x Minimum Extinguishing Concentration = Hazard Volume x Flooding Factor determined in previous

steps.
MINIMUM EXTINGUISHING QUANTITY OF CO2 (34% CONC.)

3 3
6,300 ft x .050 lb CO2/ft = 315 lbs 178.4 m x 0.8 kg CO2/m3 = 142.7 kg
3
Carbon Dioxide Page : 1 of 31

3.1.1.4 VENTILATION
Ventilation Rate: 900 ft3/min (25.5 m3/min)
If the ventilation system cannot be shutdown, the quantity of CO2 must be adjusted to compensate for the loss of
agent during the required holding period. This is determined by multiplying the ventilation rate x the flooding
factor x the holding period.
ADDITIONAL QUANTITY OF CO2 – VENTILATION LOSS

3 3
900 ft /min x .050 lb CO2/ft = 45 lbs 25.5 m /min x 0.8 kg CO2/m3 = 20.4 kg
3
45 lbs x 1 min = 45 lbs 20.4 kg x 1 min = 20.4 kg
3.1.1.5 UNCLOSEABLE OPENING(S)

Uncloseable opening: 2 ft x 3 ft (0.61 m x 0.91 m) in sidewall; center of opening 7 ft (2.13 m) below
ceiling
The adjustment for uncloseable openings is based on the size of the opening and its distance from the ceiling.
x From the Leakage Compensation Chart in Section 2.2.3.2 for an opening with the center 7 ft below
ceiling and required concentration of 34% is:
Leakage Rate = 18 lbs of CO2 per minute per square foot of opening. Refer to the table below for
the metric conversion. The metric conversion is made in this manner because the chart in Section
2.2.3.2 is in English units and the conversion must be made after the chart is used.
x The area of the uncloseable opening is 2 ft (0.61 m) x 3 ft (0.91 m) = 6 ft2 (0.56 m2). The area is
further reduced by half due to the opening being in the sidewall of the enclosure. 6ft2 (0.56 m2) y 2
= 3ft2 (0.28 m2).
x The discharge duration for surface type applications is 1 minute.
If an uncloseable opening(s) is in a sidewall, the area of the opening(s) may be divided by 2. This
is based on the assumption that half of the opening provides fresh air intake, while the other half allows
CO2 leakage.
ADDITIONAL QUANTITY OF CO2 REQUIRED

18 lbs/min/ft2 x 4.89 = 88 kg/min/m2
18 lbs/min x 3 ft2 x 1 min = 54 lbs additional CO2
88 kg/min x 0.28 m2 x 1 min = 24.6 kg CO2

Leakage
Rate = 34% C
18#/min
Center of Opening = 7’-0”

3.1.1.6 SPECIAL MATERIAL ADJUSTMENT

Hazard Contents: Butane, Gasoline, Propane, and Ethylene
Special Material Adjustments are made after the normal minimum extinguishing quantity is determined,
and after adjustments have been made to compensate for ventilation and leakage due to uncloseable
openings as illustrated in Sections 3.1.1.1 through 3.1.1.5.
When dealing with multiple fuel sources, the minimum design concentration is the highest of the concentrations
required for the materials that are present within the protected area. To determine the concentration of CO2
required, the minimum concentration for each of the hazard contents must be determined.
x From table “Minimum Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Concentrations” in Section 2.2.3.3
x Butane = 34%, Ethylene = 49%, Gasoline = 34% and Propane = 36%
x Required concentration of CO2 is determined by the Ethylene = 49%
Whenever the minimum required concentration of CO2 is greater than the standard 34%, a material conversion
factor must be used. The adjusted minimum required quantity of CO2 equals the Normal Minimum Extinguishing
Quantity (See Section 3.1.1.3) multiplied by the Material Conversion Factor as determined below.
ADJUSTED QUANTITY OF CO2 – SPECIAL MATERIAL

315 lbs (base requirement) 142.7 kg (base requirement)
+ 45 lbs (ventilation loss) + 20.4 kg (ventilation loss)
+ 54 lbs (uncloseable openings) + 24.6 kg (uncloseable openings)
= 414 lbs. x 1.6 = 663 lbs Total CO2 required = 187.7 kg x 1.6 = 300.3 kg Total CO2 required
Material Conversion Chart

Conversion Factor
1.6
49%
Minimum Concentration Percentage

3.1.1.7 TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT

Hazard Temperature: 216°F (102°C)
The temperature adjustment is based upon the temperature of the hazard volume (See Section 2.2.3.4).
x Each 5°F (2.77°C) increment, or part thereof, above 200°F (93.3°C) requires a 1% increase in CO2
quantity for high temperature adjustment
x Each 1°F (0.55°C) below 0°F (-17.8°C) requires a 1% Increase in CO 2 quantity for low temperature
adjustment
Apply the temperature adjustment by increasing the quantity of CO2 by the calculated percentage.
ADJUSTED QUANTITY OF CO2 – TEMPERATURE

th
216–200=16; 16 y 5 = 3.2 This is 3 and part of a 4 102.1-93.3=8.8; 8.8y2.77 = 3.2 This is 3 and part of a
increment. Therefore a 4% adjustment is req’d. 4th increment. Therefore a 4% adjustment is req’d.
663 lbs x 1.04 = 690 lbs Total CO2 Required 300.3 kg x 1.04 = 312.3 kg Total CO2 Required
When determining the CO2 quantity to be provided in storage, ALWAYS round up to the next largest cylinder
size. Therefore, the storage quantity for this example is 700 lbs (317.8 kg).
3.1.1.8 DISCHARGE DURATION / FLOW RATE

For Surface Fire hazards, the required discharge time (duration) is one minute. Therefore, the total quantity of
CO2 as determined above must be discharged within one minute.
DISCHARGE FLOW RATE

690 lbs y 1 min = 690 lbs/min 312.3 kg y 1 min = 312.3 kg/min

3.1.1.9 NOZZLE SELECTION

All nozzle types are acceptable for Total Flood applications, but the Radial Nozzle is generally recommended.
This system requires a flow rate of 690 lbs/min (312.3 kg/min) that can be provided by utilizing multiple nozzles.
In order to determine the quantity required, two criteria should be considered, with the larger result of the two
being the determining factor:
x The first criteria will involve the system flow rate. The recommended flow rate for a 1/2” NPT Radial
Nozzle is 100 lbs/min (45.4 kg/min), and the recommended flow rate for a 3/4” NPT Radial Nozzle is
150 lbs/min (68 kg/min). Choosing between the two sizes is largely a matter of preference and
consideration should be given to the cost of larger pipe and fittings vs. additional smaller nozzles.
Additional consideration shall given to the additional turbulence caused by the discharge from larger
nozzles and its possible impact.
1/2” NPT RADIAL NOZZLE

690 lbs/min y 100 lbs/min = 6.9 = 7 Nozzles 312.3 kg/min y 45.4 kg/min = 6.9 = 7 Nozzles

690 lbs/min y 150 lbs/min = 4.6 = 5 Nozzles 312.3 kg/min y 68 kg/min = 4.6 = 5 Nozzles
x The second criteria will involve the area coverage limitations for the nozzles:
The 1/2” Radial Nozzle can cover an area 20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m x 6.1 m). Therefore, a single row of
nozzles will cover the 15 ft (4.6 m) width, and two nozzles can cover the 35 ft (10.7 m) length.
In summary, the flow rate requirement is the greater of the two and is the determining factor. Therefore, this
example could be protected with (5) 3/4” Radial Nozzles, or (7) 1/2” Radial Nozzles, depending on the preference
of the designer. It should also be noted that the area can be protected using multiple “S”-Type or Baffle Nozzles
as well.

3.1.2 DEEP SEATED FIRE HAZARD (NO LEAKAGE OR VENTILATION COMPENSATION)

Example: Storage Vault containing Paper Rolls
Ventilation system to shutdown upon discharge
All leakage areas sealed

x The volume is determined by multiplying: length x width x height.
x Volume = 42 ft. x 25 ft. x 12 ft. = 12,600 ft3 (12.8 m x 7.6 m x 3.66 m = 356 m3)
3.1.2.2 MINIMUM CO2 CONCENTRATION AND FLOODING FACTOR

Both the minimum CO2 concentration and flooding factor are based on the specific hazard being protected (See
Section 2.3.2). For this example, bulk paper storage requires:
x Minimum CO2 concentration = 65%
x Flooding factor = 0.125 lb CO2/ft3 (2.00 kg CO2/m3)
3.1.2.3 MINIMUM EXTINGUISHING QUANTITY REQUIRED

The minimum quantity of CO2 required is based on the volume of the hazard being protected and the Flooding
Factor.
MINIMUM QUANTITY OF CO2 – UNADJUSTED SYSTEM

3 3
12,600 ft x .125 = 1,575 lbs CO2 356 m x 2.00 = 712 kg CO2

Example: Storage Vault
adjustment

th
1,575 lbs (base requirement) 712 kg (base requirement)
1,575 lbs x 1.04 = 1,638 lbs Total CO2 Required 712 kg x 1.04 = 740.5 kg Total CO2 Required

3.1.2.5 REQUIRED FLOW RATE

For deep seated hazards, the minimum flow rate requirement is as follows: The system must achieve a 30%
concentration within 2 minutes, with the remainder of the discharge occurring within 7 minutes.
x The first step in determining the correct flow rate is to calculate the amount of CO2 required to provide a 30%
concentration in 2 minutes. (See Section 2.3.4)
QUANTITY OF CO2 FOR 30% CONCENTRATION IN 2 MINUTES

3 3
12,600 ft x .043 = 542 lbs / 2 min 356 m x 0.688 = 245 kg / 2 min
x The minimum flow rate is the amount of CO2 required, divided by 2 minutes.
REQUIRED FLOW RATE OF CO2

542 y 2 = 271 lbs CO2/min 245 y 2 = 122.5 kg CO2/min
x Next, the Adjusted Quantity of CO2 must be checked with the Required Flow Rate to verify that the total
discharge time does not exceed 7 minutes.
DISCHARGE DURATION VERIFICATION

1,638 lbs y 271 lbs./min = 6.04 minutes 740.5 kg y 122.5 kg/min = 6.04 minutes
Therefore, this flow rate IS acceptable and should be used to determine the number of nozzles required, pipe
sizes, and manifold size.


Nozzle selection is based on the system flow rate, not on the system supply quantity.


The 1/2” Radial Nozzle can cover an area 20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m x 6.1 m). Therefore, two rows of
nozzles will be necessary to cover the 25 ft. (7.6 m) width, and three nozzles will be necessary in
each row to cover the 42 ft. (12.8 m) length. (6 Nozzles Total)
(2 Nozzles Total)
In summary, the area coverage requirement is the greater of the two and is the determining factor. Therefore,
this hazard could be protected with (2) 3/4” Radial Nozzles supplying 135.5 lbs/min (61.25 kg/min), or (6) 1/2”
Radial Nozzles supplying 45.2 lbs/min (20.4 kg/min), depending on the preference of the designer. In this case,
protecting the hazard with (2) 3/4” Radial Nozzles would be the less expensive option. It should also be noted
that the area can be protected using multiple “S”-Type or Baffle Nozzles as well.

3.1.3 DEEP SEATED FIRE HAZARD w/ VENTILATION & LEAKAGE COMPENSATION

Example: Storage Vault containing Paper Rolls
Ventilation system to remain active after discharge
Uncloseable opening compensation required

x Volume = 42 ft x 25 ft x 12 ft = 12,600 ft3 (12.8 m x 7.6 m x 3.66 m = 356 m3)

Both the minimum CO2 concentration and flooding factor are based on the specific hazard being protected (See
Section 2.3.2). For this example, bulk paper storage requires:
3.1.3.3 MINIMUM EXTINGUISHING QUANTITY REQUIRED

The minimum quantity of CO2 required is based on the volume of the hazard being protected and the Flooding
Factor.
MINIMUM QUANTITY OF CARBON DIOXIDE – UNADJUSTED SYSTEM

3 3
12,600 ft x .125 = 1,575 lbs CO2 356 m x 2.00 = 712 kg CO2
3.1.3.4 VENTILATION
Ventilation Rate: 900 ft3/min (25.5 m3/min)
If the ventilation system cannot be shutdown, the quantity of CO2 must be adjusted to compensate for the loss of
agent during the required holding period. This is determined by multiplying the ventilation rate x the flooding
factor x the holding period.
ADDITIONAL QUANTITY OF CO2 – VENTILATION LOSS

3 3
900 ft /min x .125 lb CO2/ft = 112.5 lbs 25.5 m /min x 2.0 kg CO2/m3 = 51 kg
3
112.5 lbs x 20 min = 2,250 lbs 51 kg x 20 min = 1,020 kg
As you can see, it is often desirable to shutdown the ventilation system in lieu of compensating for the
leakage with additional CO2.

3.1.3.5 UNCLOSEABLE OPENING(S)

Uncloseable opening: 2 ft x 3 ft (0.61 m x 0.91 m) in sidewall; center of opening 7 ft (2.13 m) below
ceiling
The adjustment for uncloseable openings is based on the size of the opening and its distance from the ceiling.
x From the Leakage Compensation Chart in Section 2.3.3.2 for an opening with the center 7 ft below
ceiling and required concentration of 65% is:
Leakage Rate = 45 lbs of CO2 per minute per square foot of opening. Refer to the table below for
the metric conversion. The metric conversion is made in this manner because the chart in Section
2, Paragraph 2.3.3.2 is in English units and the conversion must be made after the chart is used.
x The area of the uncloseable opening is 2 ft (0.61m) x 3 ft(0.91m) = 6 ft2 (0.56 m2). The area is
further reduced by half due to the opening being in the sidewall of the enclosure. 6ft2 (0.56 m2) y 2
= 3ft2 (0.28 m2).
x The discharge duration for surface type applications is 1 minute.
If an uncloseable opening(s) is in a sidewall, the area of the opening(s) may be divided by 2. This
is based on the assumption that half of the opening provides fresh air intake, while the other half allows
CO2 leakage.
ADDITIONAL QUANTITY OF CO2 REQUIRED

45 lbs/min/ft x 4.89 = 220.1 kg/min/m2
2
45 lbs/min x 3 ft2 x 20 min = 2,700 lbs additional CO2
220.1 kg/min x 0.28 m2 x 20 min = 1,232.6 kg CO2
As you can see, it is often desirable to seal all uncloseable openings in lieu of compensating for the leakage with
additional CO2.

Leakage
Rate = 65% C
45#/min
Center of Opening = 7’-0”


adjustment

th
1,575 lbs (base requirement) 712 kg (base requirement)
+ 2,250 lbs (ventilation loss) 1,020 kg (ventilation loss)
+ 2,700 lbs (uncloseable openings) 1,232.6 kg (uncloseable openings)
= 6,525 lbs required = 2,964.6 kg required
6,525 lbs. x 1.04 = 6,786 lbs Total CO2 Required 2,964.6 kg x 1.04 = 3,083.2 kg Total CO2 Required

For deep seated hazards, the minimum flow rate requirement is as follows: The system must achieve a 30%
concentration within 2 minutes, with the remainder of the discharge occurring within 7 minutes.
x The first step in determining the correct flow rate is to calculate the amount of CO2 required to provide a 30%
concentration in 2 minutes (See Section 2.3.4).
QUANTITY OF CO2 FOR 30% CONCENTRATION IN 2 MINUTES

3 3
12,600 ft x .043 = 542 lbs / 2 min 356 m x 0.688 = 245 kg / 2 min
x The minimum flow rate is the amount of Carbon Dioxide required, divided by 2 minutes.
REQUIRED FLOW RATE OF CO2

542 y 2 = 271 lbs CO2/min 245 y 2 = 122.5 kg CO2/min
x Next, the Adjusted Quantity of CO2 must be checked with the Required Flow Rate to verify that the total
discharge time does not exceed 7 minutes.
DISCHARGE DURATION VERIFICATION

6,786 lbs y 271 lbs/min = 25 minutes 3,083 kg y 122.5 kg/min = 25 minutes
Therefore, this flow rate is NOT acceptable.

x In this case, the Required Flow Rate must be equal to the flow rate necessary to provide the total quantity of
CO2 in 7 minutes. This is determined as follows:
MINIMUM FLOW RATE ADJUSTMENT

6,786 lbs. y 7 minutes = 970 lbs/min 3,083 kg y 7 minutes = 440.5 kg/min



The 1/2” Radial Nozzle can cover an area 20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m x 6.1 m). Therefore, two rows of
nozzles will be necessary to cover the 25 ft (7.6 m) width, and three nozzles will be necessary in
each row to cover the 42 ft (12.8 m) length. (6 Nozzles Total)
(2 Nozzles Total)
In summary, the flow rate requirement is the greater of the two and is the determining factor. This hazard should
therefore be protected with (7) 3/4” Radial Nozzles supplying 139 lbs/min (63 kg/min), or (10) 1/2” Radial Nozzles
supplying 97 lbs/min (44.5 kg/min), depending on the preference of the designer. It should also be noted that the
area can be protected using multiple “S”-Type or Baffle Nozzles as well.

3.1.4 COMBINED SURFACE AND DEEP SEATED HAZARDS

Some deep seated hazards may have flammable liquids or solids within the area being protected. When this
occurs, the flow rate must be adjusted to satisfy the surface fire requirements FIRST, while still satisfying the
requirements for a deep seated hazard. In other words, the quantity of agent supplied and hold time (20 minutes)
are based upon the requirements for a deep seated hazard, while the flow rate and discharge time are based
upon the requirements for a surface fire hazard.
Example: Oil-filled Transformer Room
Hazard Contents: Oil Barrels and Electrical Equipment
Hazard Size: 28 ft (8.5 m) long x 14 ft (4.3 m) wide x 12’-6” ft (3.8 m) high

x Volume = 28 ft x 14 ft x 12’-6” ft = 4,900 ft3 (8.5 m x 4.3 m x 3.8 m = 138.9 m3)

For the deep seated portion of the fire hazard, both the minimum CO2 concentration and flooding factor are based
on the specific hazard being protected (See Section 2.3.2). For this example, The electrical equipment within the
room (dry electrical hazard), over 2,000 ft3 requires:
x Minimum CO2 concentration = 50%.
For the surface fire portion of the fire hazard, the minimum CO2 concentration is 34%. The flooding factor is
based on the volume of the hazard being protected (See Section 2.2.2).
3.1.4.3 DETERMINE QUANTITY REQUIRED

Proceed as follows for both the deep seated and the surface fire portions of the fire hazard:
MINIMUM EXTINGUISHING QUANTITY OF CO2

For deep seated portion:
4,900 ft3 x .083 = 407 lbs CO2 138.9 m3 x 1.330 = 184.7 kg CO2
For surface fire portion:
4,900 ft3 x .050= 245 lbs CO2 138.9 m3 x 0.80 = 111.1 kg CO2
The minimum quantity of CO2 required is the larger of the quantities: 407 lbs (184.7 kg)
The actual storage quantity of CO2 is: 500 lbs (227 kg)


The surface fire flow rate requirement must be met first. This requirement is 34% concentration in 1 minute or
245 lbs/min (111.1 kg/min).
Checking the deep seated portion requirements yields:
x The 30% in two minutes requirement is definitely met because 34% is reached in 1 minute.
x The 100% in seven minutes is met because the discharge time is 1.67 minutes.
407 lbs y 245 lbs/min = 1.67 min (184.7 kg y 111.1 kg/min = 1.66).



The 1/2” Radial Nozzle can cover an area 20 ft x 20 ft (6.1 m x 6.1 m). Therefore, one row of nozzles
will be necessary to cover the 14 ft (4.3 m) width, and two nozzles will be necessary to cover the 28 ft
(8.5 m) length. (2 Nozzles Total)
(2 Nozzles Total)
In summary, the flow rate requirement is the greater of the two and is the determining factor. This hazard should
therefore be protected with (2) 3/4” Radial Nozzles supplying 122.5 lbs/min (56 kg/min), or (3) 1/2” Radial Nozzles
supplying 82 lbs/min (37 kg/min), depending on the preference of the designer. It should also be noted that the
area can be protected using multiple “S”-Type or Baffle Nozzles as well.

3.2 LOCAL APPLICATION SAMPLES

3.2.1 RATE-BY-AREA METHOD – NOZZLES PERPENDICULAR TO SURFACE
Example: Dip Tank and Drain Board
Hazard Size: Dip Tank – 2.75 ft wide x 4.25 ft long (0.84 m wide x 1.30 m long)
Drain Board - 2.75 ft wide x 6.0 ft long (0.84 m wide x 1.83 m long)
Nozzle height limited to 2.0 ft (0.61 m), or higher, above the hazard
3.2.1.1 NOZZLE TYPE AND NUMBER REQUIRED

The recommended nozzle for the Rate-by-Area method of protection is the “S” Type nozzle (See Section 2.7.1).
The number and location of nozzles is based on their height above the hazard and the size of the surface being
protected. Refer to the “Rate-by-Area Nozzle Selection Chart” in Section 2.7.3, for the correct size of the area
covered.
NUMBER OF NOZZLES – LIQUID SURFACE (DIP TANK)

Nozzles 2.5 ft high cover 2.41 ft x 2.41 ft Nozzles 0.76 m high cover 0.73 m x 0.73 m
Number req’d. for width: 2.75 y 2.41 = 1.14; 2 req’d. Number req’d. for width: 0.84 y 0.73 = 1.06; 2 req’d.
Number req’d. for length: 4.25 y 2.41 = 1.76; 2 req’d. Number req’d. for length: 1.30 y 0.73 = 1.78; 2 req’d.
Nozzles Required: 2 x 2 = 4 Nozzles Required: 2 x 2 = 4
NUMBER OF NOZZLES – COATED SURFACE (DRAIN BOARD)

Nozzles 2.0 ft high cover 2.58 ft x 2.58 ft Nozzles 0.61 m high cover 0.79 m x 0.79 m
Nozzles Required: 2 x 3 = 6 Nozzles Required: 2 x 3 = 6
The Total number of nozzles required, for the hazard in this example is 10.


The flow rate of nozzles is based on their height above the hazard. Refer to the “Rate-by-Area Nozzle Selection
Chart” in Section 2.7.3 for the correct flow rate.
FLOW RATE
2 nozzles for Dip Tank at 2.5 ft high: 2 nozzles for Dip Tank at 0.76 m high:
require 28 lbs/min each x 2 nozzles = 56 lbs/min require 12.7 kg/min each x 2 nozzles = 25.4 kg/min
2 nozzles for Drain Board at 2.0 ft high: 2 nozzles for Drain Board at 0.61 m high:
require 24 lbs/min each x 2 nozzles = 48 lbs/min require 10.9 kg/min each x 2 nozzles = 21.8 kg/min
Total required flow rate: 56 + 48 = 104 lbs/min Total required flow rate: 25.4 + 21.8 = 47.2 kg/min
3.2.1.3 MINIMUM REQUIRED STORAGE QUANTITY OF CO2

The requirement for the storage quantity of CO2 agent, is determined by adjusting the total required flow rate by a
vapor compensation factor of 1.4 (40% more CO2) and 0.5 min (30 second) discharge time. Refer to Section
2.6.5 of this manual for a more detailed explanation.
Always round up to the next larger cylinder size. Never round down. Refer to Section 7.1 for available
cylinder sizes.
REQUIRED STORAGE QUANTITY OF CO2

(Quantity of CO2 = Flow Rate x Vapor Compensation Factor x Discharge Time)
104 lbs/min x 0.5 min x 1.4 = 73 lbs 47.2 kg/min x 0.5 min x 1.4 = 33.1 kg
(or 104 x 0.7 = 73) (or 47.2 x 0.7 = 33.1)
The above example shows the minimum nozzle requirements based upon the stated area coverage and
height placement limitations. However, the nozzles could be placed at higher levels than those shown,
but this would require adjustments to the flow rate and agent storage requirements.

3.2.2 RATE-BY-AREA METHOD – NOZZLES AT ANGLE TO SURFACE

Normally, nozzles should be installed perpendicular to the hazard surface and centered over the area being
protected. However, when it is necessary to avoid obstructions, the nozzles can be installed at angles between
45° and 90° from the plane of the protected surface.
Example: Dip Tank and Drain Board
Hazard Size: Dip Tank – 2.75 ft wide x 4.25 ft long (0.84 m wide x 1.30 m long)
Drain Board - 2.75 ft wide x 6.0 ft long (0.84 m wide x 1.83 m long)
3.2.2.1 NOZZLE TYPE AND NUMBER REQUIRED

The recommended nozzle for the Rate-by-Area method
of protection is the “S” Type nozzle (Reference: Section
2.7.1). The number and location of nozzles is based on H
their height above the hazard and the size of the surface
being protected, just as if the nozzles were perpendicular
to the surface. However, it is important to remember that 60°
the nozzle height is measured along the axis of the
nozzle. Refer to the “Rate-by-Area Nozzle Selection
Chart” in Section 2.7.3 for the correct size of the area
covered.
NUMBER OF NOZZLES – LIQUID SURFACE (DIP TANK)

Nozzles 3.75 ft high cover 3.01 ft x 3.01 ft Nozzles 1.14 m high cover 0.92 m x 0. 92 m
Number req’d. for width: 2.75 y 3.01 = 0.9; 1 req’d. Number req’d. for width: 0.84 y 0. 92 = 0.9; 1 req’d.
Number req’d. for length: 4.25 y 3.01 = 1.4; 2 req’d. Number req’d. for length: 1.30 y 0. 92 = 1.3; 2 req’d.
Total Nozzles Required: 1 x 2 = 2 Total Nozzles Required: 1 x 2 = 2
NUMBER OF NOZZLES – COATED SURFACE (DRAIN BOARD)

Nozzles 3.75 ft high cover 3.61 ft x 3.61 ft Nozzles 1.14 m. high cover 1.10 m x 1.10 m
Total Nozzles Required: 1 x 2 = 2 Total Nozzles Required: 1 x 2 = 2


The flow rate of nozzles is based on their height above the hazard. Refer to the “Rate-by-Area Nozzle Selection
Chart” in Section 2.7.3 for the correct flow rate.
FLOW RATE
2 nozzles for Dip Tank at 3.75 ft high: 2 nozzles for Dip Tank at 1.14 m high:
require 38.5 lbs/min each x 2 nozzles = 77 lbs/min require 17.5 kg/min each x 2 nozzles = 35.0 kg/min
2 nozzles for Drain Board at 3.75 ft high: 2 nozzles for Drain Board at 1.14 m high:
require 38.5 lbs/min each x 2 nozzles = 77 lbs/min require 17.5 kg/min each x 2 nozzles = 35.0 kg/min
Total required flow rate: 77 + 77 = 154 lbs/min Total required flow rate: 35.0 + 35.0 = 70.0 kg/min
3.2.2.3 MINIMUM REQUIRED STORAGE QUANTITY OF CARBON DIOXIDE

The requirement for the storage quantity of CO2 agent, is determined by adjusting the total required flow rate by a
vapor compensation factor of 1.4 (40% more CO2) and 0.5 min. (30 second) discharge time (See to Sections
2.6.5 and 2.7.5 of this manual for a more detailed explanation).
Always round up to the next larger cylinder size. Never round down. Refer to Section 7.1 for available
cylinder sizes.
REQUIRED STORAGE QUANTITY OF CO2

(Quantity of CO2 = Flow Rate x Vapor Compensation Factor x Discharge Time)
154 lbs x 0.5 min x 1.4 = 107.8 lbs 70.0 kg x 0.5 min x 1.4 = 49.0 kg
(or 154 x 0.7 = 107.8) (or 70.0 x 0.7 = 49.0)
The above example shows the minimum nozzle requirements based upon the stated area coverage and
height placement limitations. However, the nozzles could be placed at different levels or angles than
those shown, but this would require adjustments to the flow rate and agent storage requirements.
3.2.2.4 NOZZLE AIMING FACTORS

Because the nozzles are mounted at an angle to the surface, an adjustment must be made regarding their
placement above the protected surface. This adjustment, or Aiming Factor, is based on the angle of the nozzle to
the protected surface (See Section 2.7.4.1 for the table of Aiming Factors).
The Aiming Factor for this example is 1/4 because the nozzles are aimed at 60° from the plane of the surface.
Therefore, the nozzles are aimed at a point a quarter of the width in from the near edge of the protected surface.
APPLICATION OF AIMING FACTOR

2.75 ft. x 1/4 = 0.688 ft in from the edge 0.84 m x 1/4 = 0.21 m in from the edge

3.2.3 RATE-BY-VOLUME METHOD

To help understand the procedures require in designing a system for each category, following are four example
problems with step-by-step instructions for each example.
3.2.3.1 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 1 – THREE DIMENSIONAL HAZARD WITHOUT AN ENCLOSUE OR

PERMANENT PERIMETER WALLS
1-1 DETERMINE ASSUMED VOLUME

(English Units)
(Length + 2.0 + 2.0) x (Width + 2.0 + 2.0) x (Height + 2.0) = Assumed Volume
(ft.) (ft.) (ft.) (ft3)
Length (L): 7.5 + 2.0 + 2.0 = 11.5

Width (W): 3.5 + 2.0 + 2.0 = 7.5
Height (H): 4.5 + 2.0 + 0 = 6.5
Assumed Volume: 11.5 x 7.5 x 6.5 = 561 ft3
(Metric Units)
(Length + 0.61m + 0.61m) x (Width + 0.61m +
0.61m) x (Height + 0.61m) = Assumed Volume
Length (L): 2.29 + 0.61 + 0.61 = 3.51

Width (W): 1.07 + 0.61 + 0.61 = 2.29
Height (H): 1.37 + 0.61 = 1.98
Assumed Volume: 3.51 x 2.29 x 1.98 = 7.78m3
1-2 DETERMINE SYSTEM FLOW RATE

(English Units)
(ft3) (lb./min./ft3) (lbs./min.)
561 x 1 = 561
(Metric Units)
(m3) (kg./min./m3) (kg./min.)
15.89 x 16 = 254.24
1-3 DETERMINE QUANTITY OF NOZZLE(S) REQUIRED

(English Units)
System Minimum Nozzle @ Distance Total
Flow Rate ÷ Flow Rate from Hazard = Nozzle Required
561 ÷ 105.0 @ 7.5’ = 5.34, round up to 6
(Metric Units) Hazard

System Minimum Nozzle @ Distance Total
Flow Rate ÷ Flow Rate from Hazard = Nozzle Required
(kg./min.) (kg./min.) (m) (side view)
254.24 ÷ 47.6 @ 2.8m = 5.34, round up to 6

1-4 REVISED SYSTEM FLOW RATE

(English Units)
6 x 105.0 = 630
(Metric Units)
6 x 47.6 = 285.6
1-5 QUANTITY OF AGENT REQUIRED

(English Units)
System Flow Rate x Liquid CO2 Compensation x Discharge Time + Initial Vapor Compensation = Qty. CO2 Req’d
(lbs./min.) (min.) (lbs.)
630 x 1.4 x 0.5 + 0 = 441
(Metric Units)
System Flow Rate x Liquid CO2 Compensation x Discharge Time + Initial Vapor Compensation = Qty. CO2 Req’d
(kg./min.) (min.) (kg.)
285.6 x 1.4 x 0.5 + 0 = 200
1-6 QUANTITY OF AGENT SUPPLIED

Quantity of Agent Required Rounded Up to Nearest Available Container Size
(English Units)
or
(Metric Units)
200 kg. ÷ 34 kg./cylinder = 5.88, round up to 6 (34 kg. cylinders); 6 x 34 kg./cylinder = 204 kg. supplied
or
200 kg. ÷ 45.4 kg./cylinder = 4.41, round up to 5 (45.4 kg. cylinders); 5 x 45.4 kg./cylinder = 227 kg. supplied
1-7 LAYOUT PIPE NETWORK AND RUN HYDRAULIC CALCULATION

This needs to be done to verify that the predicted liquid discharge time for each nozzle equals or exceeds the
minimum liquid discharge time. If necessary, adjust the quantity of CO2 provided in storage to deliver liquid flow
at each nozzle for the minimum liquid discharge time required.

3.2.3.2 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 2 – THREE DIMENSIONAL HAZARD IN LARGE ROOM WITH PERMANENT
PERIMETER WALL(S)
7.5’ + 4.0’ +
2-1 DETERMINE ASSUMED VOLUME 2.0’
Assumed Volume = Length x Width x Height + 2.0’ Assumed
Volume
(0.61m) to any side not defined by permanent walls
or actual distance to permanent wall(s).
2.0’
(English Units)
Length (L): 7.5 + 4.0 + 2.0 = 13.5 2.0’ 7.5’ 4.0’
Width (W): 3.5 + 4.0 + 2.0 = 9.5 3.5’
Height (H): 4.5 + 2.0 = 6.5 3.5’ + 4.0’ +
2.0’
Ht. = 4.5’
Assumed Volume:
13.5 x 9.5 x 6.5 = 834 ft3
4.0’ (Use actual distance)
(Metric Units)
Length (L): 2.28 + 1.22 + 0.61 = 4.11
Width (W): 1.07 + 1.22 + 0.61 = 2.90 (top view)
Height (H): 1.37 + 0.61 = 1.98
Assumed Volume:
4.11 x 2.90 x 1.98 = 23.60 m3
2-2 DETERMINE TOTAL SURFACE AREA OF ASSUMED VOLUME PERIMETER WALLS

(English Units)
(ft.) (ft.) = Total Surface Area
(ft2)
Front Surface
Front & Back: 2 [(7.5 + 4.0 + 2.0) x (4.5 + 2.0] = 175.5 ft2
Sides: 2 [(3.5 + 4.0 + 2.0) x (4.5 + 2.0] = 123.5 ft2 2.0’
Total Surface Area: 175.5 + 123.5 = 299.0 ft2 2.0’ 7.5’ 4.0’
Side 1
Surface Side 2
3.5’
Surface
Ht. =
4
4.0’
Back Surface
(top view)
(Metric Units)
(Assumed Length x Assumed Height) x 2 = Surface
Area of Front & Back
= Total Surface Area
(m) (m) (m2)
Front & Back: 2 [(2.28 + 1.22 + 0.61) x (1.37 + 0.61)] = 16.28 m2

Sides: 2 [(1.07 + 1.22 + 0.61) x (1.37 + 0.61)] = 11.48 m2

Total Surface Area: 16.28 + 11.48 = 27.76 m2

2-3 DETERMINE TOTAL OPEN AREA
(English Units)
(ft.) (ft.) (ft.) (ft.) (ft2)
Front Wall (Open)
7.5+4.0+2.0
[(7.5 + 4.0 + 2.0) x (6.5)] + [(3.5 + 4.0 + 2.0) x (6.5)]
or 87.75 + 61.75 2.0’
Total Open Area = 149.5 ft2
2.0’ 7.5’ 4.0’
(Metric Units) Side
Side
Wall 3.5’
[(Length + 0.61 + 0.61) x (Height + 0.61)] + [(Width + (Open) Wall
(m) (m) (m) 3.5+4.0+2.0
Ht. = 4.5’
(Closed)
0.61 + 0.61) x (Height + 0.61)] = Total Open Area
(m) (m2)
or actual distance to permanent perimeter wall(s) 4.0’
Back Wall (Closed)
[(2.29 + 1.22 + 0.61) x (1.98)] + [(1.07 + 1.22 + 0.61)

x (1.98)] (top view)
or 8.16 + 5.74
Total Open Area = 13.9 m2
2-4 DETERMINE OPEN AREA PERCENTAGE

(English Units)
149.5 ÷ 299.0 = 0.50 (50%)
(Metric Units)
(m2) (m2) (decimal)
13.9 ÷ 27.76 = 0.50 (50%)
2-5 CALCULATE PERCENT CLOSED AREA

(decimal) (decimal)
1 – 0.5 = 0.5
2-6 DETERMINE FLOW RATE PER UNIT VOLUME

1 – (Closed Area Percentage x 0.75) = Flow Rate per unit volume
(decimal) (decimal)
1 – (0.50 x 0.75) = 0.625
2-7 DETERMINE REDUCED FLOW RATE

(English Units)
(decimal) (ft3) (lbs./min.)

0.625 x 834 = 521.25

(Metric Units)
Flow Rate Per Unit Volume x Assumed Volume = Reduced Flow Rate
(decimal) (m3) (kg./min.)
(0.625 x 16) x 23.60 = 236

(English Units)
System Flow Rate ÷ Minimum Nozzle Flow Rate @ Distance From Hazard = Total Nozzles Required
522 ÷ 76.1 @ 5.0 = 6.86, round up to 7
(Metric Units)
236 ÷ 34.5 @ 1.52 = 6.86, round up to 7
2-9 DETERMINE REVISED SYSTEM FLOW RATE

(English Units)
7 x 76.1 = 532.7
Hazard
(Metric Units)
7 x 34.5 = 241.5
2-10 DETERMINE QUANTITY OF AGENT REQUIRED

(English Units)
System Liquid CO2 Initial Vapor
Flow Rate x Compensation x Discharge Time + Compensation = Qty. CO2 Required
(lbs./min.) (minutes) (lbs.)
533 x 1.4 x 0.5 + 0 = 374
(Metric Units)
System Liquid CO2 Initial Vapor
Flow Rate x Compensation x Discharge Time + Compensation = Qty. CO2 Required
(kg./min.) (minutes) (kg.)
242 x 1.4 x 0.5 + 0 = 170
2-11 DETERMINE QUANTITY OF AGENT SUPPLIED

(English Units)
or
374 lbs. ÷ 100 lb./cylinder = 3.74, round up to 4 (100 lb cylinders); 4 x 100 lb./cylinder = 400 lbs supplied

(Metric Units)
170 kg. ÷ 34 kg./cylinder = 5, 5 x 34 kg./cylinder = 170 kg. supplied
or
170 kg. ÷ 45.4 kg./cylinder = 3.74, round up to 4 (45.4 kg. cylinders); 4 x 45.4 kg./cylinder = 181.6 kg. supplied
Layout pipe network and run hydraulic calculation to confirm 30 second of liquid discharge at each nozzle.
3.2.3.3 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 3 – ENCLOSURE WITH LEAKAGE

Calculated by adding 2 feet (0.61m) to any side not 6.0
defined by permanent walls + 2.0 = 8.0
(English Units) 16.0
Length: 16.0 + 0 = 16.0
Width: 6.0 + 2.0 = 8.0 (open side)
Height: 7.0 + 0 = 7.0
Assumed Volume:
16.0 x 8.0 x 7.0 = 896 ft3
7.0
(Metric Units)
Length: 4.88 + 0 = 4.88
Width: 1.83 + 0.61 = 2.44 (open side)
Height: 2.13 + 0 = 2.13 (Isometric View)
Assumed Volume:
4.88 x 2.44 x 2.13 = 25.36m3

(English Units)
Length: 16.0
Width: 8.0 (6.0 + 2.0)
Height: 7.0
Front & Back: 2 (16.0 x 7.0) = 224 ft2

Sides: 2 (8.0 x 7.0) = 112 ft2
(Metric Units)
Length: 4.88
Width: 2.44 (1.83 + 0.61)
Height: 2.13
Front & Back: 2 (4.88 x 2.13) = 20.79 m2

Sides: 2 (2.44 x 2.13) = 10.39 m2


(English Units)
Open Front: 16.0 x 7.0 = 112 ft2
Total Open Area: 112 ft2
16.0
(Metric Units)
Open Front: 4.88 x 2.13 = 10.39 m2

(English Units)
Open Area ÷ Total Surface Area = Open Area Percentage 7.0
(ft2) (ft2) (decimal) (Isometric View)
112 ÷ 336 = 0.333 (33.3%)
(Metric Units)
(m2) (m2) (decimal)
10.39 ÷ 31.18 = 0.333 (33.3%)
3-5 DETERMINE CLOSED AREA PERCENTAGE

(decimal) (decimal)
1 – 0.333 = 0.667 (66.7%)

1 – (Closed Area Percentage x 0.75) = Flow per Unit Volume
1 – (0.667 x 0.75) = 0.50
3-7 DETERMINE REDUCTED FLOW RATE

(English Units)
0.50 x 1 x 896 = 448.0
(Metric Units)
0.50 x 16 x 25.36 = 202.9


(English Units)
System Flow Rate ÷ Average Nozzle Flow Rate = Nozzles Required
448.0 ÷ 115 = 4
(Metric Units)
202.9 ÷ 52.16 = 4
3-9 DETERMINE REVISED SYSTEM FLOW RATE (Isometric View)

(English Units)
4 x 115 = 460
(Metric Units)
4 x 52.16 = 208.64
3-10 DETERMINE QUANTITY OF CO2 REQUIRED

(English Units)
Revised System Flow Rate x Liquid CO2 Compensation x Discharge Time = Qty. CO2 Required
(lbs./min.) (minute) (lbs.)
460.0 x 1.4 x 0.5 = 322
(Metric Units)
(kg./min.) (minute) (kg.)
208.64 x 1.4 x 0.5 = 146.05
3-11 DETERMINE QUANTIY OF AGENT SUPPLIED

(English Units)
or
(Metric Units)
or
146.05 kg. ÷ 45.4 kg./cylinder = 3.22, round up to 4 (45.4 kg. cylinders); 4 x 45.4 kg./cylinder = 181.6 kg. supplied


3.2.3.4 EXAMPLE PROBLEM 4 – ENCLOSURE WITH MULTIPLE OPENINGS

The next series of steps show an example on how to calculate the system if the enclosure being protected has
multiple openings.
6’-0” 2’-0”
Calculate by adding 2 feet (0.61m) to any side or opening 16’-0”
not defined by permanent wall(s).
(English Units)
Length: 16.0 + 0 = 16.0
Width: 6.0 + 2.0 = 8.0 (open side) 7’-0” Ht.
Height: 7.0 + 0 = 7.0
Plus the assumed volume for 2 openings, 1 on each end of

4’-0”
cabinet
Length: 5.0 5’-0”

Width: 2.0
2’-0”
Height: 4.0
Assumed volume =
(16.0 x 8.0 x 7.0) + 2 x (5.0 x 2.0 x 4.0) = 976 ft3
(Metric Units)
Length: 4.88 + 0 = 4.88
Width: 1.83 + 0.61 = 2.44 (open side)
Height: 2.13 + 0 = 2.13
Plus the assumed volume for 2 openings, 1 on each end of cabinet
Length: 1.52
Width: 0.61
Height: 1.22
Assumed volume =
(4.88 x 2.44 x 2.13) + 2 x (1.52 x 0.61 x 1.22) = 30.95 m3

(English Units)
Length: 16.0
Width: 8.0 (6.0 + 2.0)
Height: 7.0
Front & Back: 2 (16.0 x 7.0) = 224 ft2

Sides: 2 (8.0 x 7.0) = 112 ft2
(Metric Units)
Length: 4.88
Width: 2.44 (1.83 + 0.61)
Height: 2.13
Front & Back: 2 (4.88 x 2.13) = 20.79 m2

Sides: 2 (2.44 x 2.13) = 10.39 m2


(English Units) 8’-0”
Open Front: 16.0 x 7.0 = 112 ft2 (6’-0” + 2’-0”)
Opening on Sides: (5.0 x 4.0) x 2 = 40 ft2
Total Open Area: 152 ft2 16’-0”
(Metric Units)
Open Front: 4.88 x 2.13 = 10.41 m2
Opening on Sides: (1.52 x 1.22) x 2 = 3.71 m2
7’-0”
(English Units)
Opening Size
L=5.0’ x W=4.0’
152 ÷ 336 = 0.452 (45.2%)
Opening Size
(Metric Units) L=5.0’ x W=4.0’
(m2) (m2) (decimal)
14.12 ÷ 31.28 = 0.452 (45.2%)
4-5 DETERMINE CLOSED AREA PERCENTAGE

(decimal) (decimal)
1 – 0.452 = 0.548 (54.8%)

1 – (Closed Area Percentage x 0.75) = Flow Per Unit Volume
1 – (0.548 x 0.75) = 0.589
4-7 DETERMINE REDUCTED FLOW RATE

(English Units)
0.589 x 1 x 976 = 575
(Metric Units)
0.589 x 16 x 30.95 = 291.7


(English Units)
575 ÷ 115 = 5
(Metric Units)
260.8 ÷ 52.16 = 5
4-9 DETERMINE REVISED SYSTEM FLOW RATE

(English Units)
5 x 115 = 575
(Metric Units)
5 x 52.16 = 260.8
4-10 DETERMINE QUANTITY OF CO2 REQUIRED

(English Units)
(lbs./min.) (minute) (lbs.)
575.0 x 1.4 x 0.5 = 402.5
(Metric Units)
(kg./min.) (minute) (kg.)
260.8 x 1.4 x 0.5 = 182.6
4-11 DETERMINE QUANTIY OF AGENT SUPPLIED

(English Units)
or
(Metric Units)
or
182.6 kg. ÷ 45.4 kg./cylinder = 4.03, round up to 5 (45.4 kg. cylinders); 5 x 45.4 kg./cylinder = 227 kg. supplied


Section 4
Installation
Carbon Dioxide
Manual P/N C06-018
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
4.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Fike CO2 fire suppression system components are included as part of a total suppression system package. The
installing Fike Distributor, or sub-contractor, provides pipe, fittings, electrical conduit and fittings, wire, hangers,
brackets, and all normal mounting hardware. These items are provided to suit the installation specifications and
the requirements of the specific system.
All materials provided for the CO2 system installation must be new, free from all defects and imperfections, and
shall be of a grade and type that complies with NFPA 12, latest edition, and this manual.
Before the CO2 system is installed, the qualified installer should develop installation drawings in order to locate
the equipment, determine pipe routing(s), and develop a bill-of-materials. All drawings shall be reviewed by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) prior to installation.
The system installation shall be completed in accordance with the current issue of the following applicable codes
and/or standards:
x NFPA No. 12 – Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems
x NFPA No. 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC)
x NFPA No. 72 – National Fire Alarm Code
x Local and state Fire and Building codes
x Requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
The ambient storage temperatures for local application systems shall not exceed 120oF (49oC) nor be less than
32oF (0oC). For total-flood systems, they shall not exceed 130oF (54oC) nor be less than 0oF (-18oC) unless the
system is designed for proper operation with storage temperatures outside of this range. External heating or
cooling shall be permitted to keep the temperature within this range.
Specific projects and installations may have requirements for other “special” codes and/or standards as
recommended by the AHJ. Where two or more codes are in conflict, the most stringent code or standard shall
apply.
4.2 CYLINDER ASSEMBLIES AND STORAGE
CO2 cylinders can be stored inside, or outside, the hazard space. Generally, it is preferable to locate the cylinders
outside and away from the hazard area. Do not locate the cylinders in areas where they may be exposed to a fire
or explosion in the hazard. When the cylinders are located within the protected space, a remote pneumatic
control should be installed to release the system safely from outside of the hazard area.
CO2 cylinders should be located to provide convenient access for inspection, and removal for recharge or
maintenance purposes. Do not install cylinders where they will be exposed to the elements, the sun’s direct rays,
or temperatures outside of the acceptable ranges stated for each system type, (See Section 4.1).
Each cylinder is shipped as a “Slave” valve and is fitted with a pipe plug on both the Pilot port located on the side
of the valve and the pressure port located on the top of the valve. To convert to the “Master” valve function,
remove these plugs and install the solenoid actuation system as detailed in Section 4.10.
All Fike CO2 cylinders have a siphon tube and MUST be installed in the vertical (up) position. Horizontal
mounting is not allowed.
Each CO2 cylinder assembly has a safety / shipping cap that is installed after the initial factory filling to protect
against accidental discharge, or valve damage during shipping, handling and installation.
WARNING: THE SAFETY CAP MUST BE IN PLACE AT ALL TIMES UNTIL FINAL CONNECTION TO
THE SYSTEM IS COMPLETE!

4.2.1 CYLINDER BRACKETING

CO2 cylinders must be secured in place in accordance with NFPA and OSHA requirements. Fike provides two
methods of securing the cylinders as described in the following sections. However, this does not preclude the use
of custom designed skids or racking arrangements that have been designed to accommodate special
circumstances.
4.2.1.1 CYLINDER MOUNTING STRAP CONTAINER

Singular cylinders are easily secured using a cylinder mounting strap
anchored to a solid mounting surface. Anchoring into plaster or any MOUNTING STRAP
other facing material is not acceptable without taking additional
measures to ensure the structural integrity of the mounting surface. P1000 UNISTRUT CHANNEL
(BY OTHERS)
WALL
UNISTRUT NUT, BOLT AND

WASHER (BY OTHERS)
MOUNTING STRAP DETAIL
4.2.1.2 CYLINDER RACKING ASSEMBLY

The figure and table below illustrate the recommended height above the floor placement of the center / front rails
and weigh rails.
Weigh Rail
Recommended Mounting Dimensions

“A” “B” “A” “B”
Cylinder Size
(in) (in) (mm) (mm)
50 lb./22.7 kg 67.50 33.00 1715 838
“A”
75 lb./34.0 kg 72.5 38.50 1842 978
Center Rail
100 lb./45.4 kg 74.5 43.00 1892 1092
“B”

4.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS

The following sections detail the specifications for materials normally used for the installation of CO2 fire
suppression systems. The information provided does not preclude the use of other materials (stainless steel,
flexible hoses, etc.) providing that they comply with the minimum pressure and temperature requirements detailed
in NFPA 12.
4.3.1 FERROUS PIPE
Black or galvanized steel pipe shall be ASTM A-53 seamless or electric welded, Grade A or B, or ASTM A-106,
Grade A, B, or C. Stainless steel pipe shall be Type 304 or 316 for threaded connections, or Type 304, 316,
304L, or 316L for welded connections.
ASTM A-120 and ordinary cast-iron pipe shall not be used in CO2 piping systems.
In high pressure piping distribution systems 3/4” NPT and smaller, Schedule 40 pipe may be used. Schedule 80
pipe shall be used for 1” thru 4” NPT piping systems. Furnace butt weld pipe conforming to ASTM A-53 SHALL
NOT be used.
High pressure CO2 system piping components that are not specifically covered in this manual shall have a
minimum burst pressure of 5,000 psi (34,474 kPa).
4.3.2 FITTINGS
x Black or galvanized malleable or ductile fittings, having a Class 300 rating, shall be used through 2”
IPS. Forged steel fittings shall be used in all sizes 2-1/2” and larger.
x Flanged joints upstream of any stop valve shall be Class 600. Flange joints down-stream of stop
valves, or in systems with no stop valves, may be Class 300.
x Stainless steel fittings shall be type 304 or 316, wrought/forged (per ASTM A-182), Class 3000,
threaded or socketweld, for all sizes 1/8” thru 4”.
4.3.3 FLANGED, WELDED AND MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS

CO2 piping systems may utilize screwed, flanged or welded joints utilizing malleable, ductile or forged steel
fittings.
When hex reducing bushings are used for one pipe size reduction, a 3,000 lb. forged steel bushing shall
be used to maintain adequate strength. When hex bushings are used for more than one pipe size
reduction, they must be Class 300 malleable or ductile iron through 2” IPS, and 3,000 lb. forged steel for
all larger sizes. Flush or face bushings shall not be used.
Mechanical grooved fittings and couplings may be used if they are specifically listed and/or approved for high
pressure CO2 service.
Suitable flared, compression-type, or brazed fittings shall be used with compatible tubing. Where brazed joints
are used, the brazing alloy shall have a minimum melting point of 1,000°F (538°C).
4.4 PIPING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

For high pressure CO2 systems, the supply piping network shall have a minimum burst pressure of 5,000 psi
(34,474 kPa). The piping system shall be installed in accordance with the approved system plans and the latest
version of Fike CO2 Flow Calculation Program. Any deviation from the system plans or flow calculation program
must be approved by the engineer-in-charge and a system flow calculation performed to confirm the acceptability
of the changes.
4.4.1 THREADED CONNECTIONS

All threaded joints shall have American Standard pipe threads (NPT) conforming to ANSI B1.20.1. All threads
shall be cut full length and the pipe suitably reamed and chamfered. After threading, all pipe shall be cleaned
using a non-flammable cleaning solvent to remove metal shavings, cutting oil, mill scale, etc,

When assembling pipe with threaded joints, use a quality grade of pipe sealant applied to the male threads
ONLY. The pipe joint should be tightened until the fitting engagement conforms to the value specified for NPT
pipe threads. Normal engagement values for tight joints are provided in the Pipe Fitting Engagement Table that
follows.
Pipe shall be reamed and cleaned before assembly. After assembly, the entire piping system shall be blown out
before nozzles or other discharge devices are installed.
PIPE FITTING ENGAGEMENT TABLE

English Values, inches
Nominal Pipe
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5 6
Size (NPT)
Engagement: 3/8 3/8 1/2 9/16 11/16 11/16 11/16 3/4 15/16 1 1-1/16 1-1/8 1-1/4 1-5/16
Metric Values, mm
Nominal Pipe
1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 5 6
Size (NPT)
Engagement: 10 10 13 14 18 18 18 19 24 25 27 29 32 33
4.4.2 WELDED PIPE CONNECTIONS

When making welded connections, either bevel-type or socket-weld fittings may be used. All welding shall be
performed by qualified welders in accordance with Section IX, qualification standard for welding and brazing
procedures, covering welders and brazers, in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
During the welding operation, care must be taken to remove any weld spatter or molten metal that may have
entered the piping. Rough spots and metal build-up that could affect agent flow must be removed.
4.4.3 TUBE AND BRAZED CONNECTIONS

When installing tubing, compression type fittings are preferred. Care must be taken NOT to exceed the
pressure/temperature ratings of the fitting manufacturer. When tubing joints are soldered or brazed, the melting
temperature of the solder or brazing material must be a minimum of 1000°F (538°C).
4.5 HANGERS AND BRACING

All CO2 system piping, both vertical and horizontal, shall be securely supported with hangers conforming to the
latest requirements of the ASME Power Piping Code.
Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting pipe under all conditions of operation and service. They shall allow
for the expansion and contraction of the piping and shall prevent pipe loads and stresses from being transmitted
into connected equipment. Pipe hangers and brackets shall be of a rugged design and fabrication. They shall be
installed so that movement of the supported pipe will not loosen them.
The piping system shall be securely supported and braced with due allowance for agent thrust forces, and
thermal expansion and/or contraction. The piping system shall not be subject to mechanical, chemical or other
damage. Where practical, riser piping shall be supported independently from the connected horizontal piping. An
anchor must be installed at each change in piping direction and a support bracket, or hanger, installed adjacent to
each discharge nozzle and/or whenever a change in direction occurs. CO2 system piping shall not be suspended
or supported from other utility systems piping (i.e. water, gas, steam, compressed air, etc.) or electrical
distribution system conduit.
Where explosions are possible, the piping system shall be suspended from supports or hangers that are the least
likely to be displaced. In earthquake prone areas, piping hangers, brackets, anchors and supports shall conform
to good engineering design practices and be approved by an Earthquake Design Engineer and the local Authority
Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
Generally, no section of piping should be without a hanger bracket or support. Maximum spacing between
hangers and hanger rod sizes shall conform to the following tables.

Hanger Spacing – Rod Sizing

English Values
Nominal Pipe
1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 3-1/2" 4" 5" 6"
Size (NPT)
Max. Spacing (ft.) 5’ 6’ 7’ 9’ 9’ 10’ 11’ 12’ 13’ 14’ 16’ 17’
Rod Size (in. dia.) 3/8" 3/8" 3/8" 3/8" 3/8" 3/8" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" 5/8" 5/8" 3/4"
Metric Values
Nominal Pipe
1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" 2" 2-1/2" 3" 3-1/2" 4" 5" 6"
Size (NPT)
Max. Spacing (m) 1.5 1.8 2.1 2.8 2.8 3.1 3.4 3.7 4 4.3 5 5.2
Rod Size (mm dia.) 10 10 10 10 10 10 15 15 15 16 16 20
4.6 CLOSED PIPE SECTIONS

All closed pipe sections that could trap CO2 agent shall be provided with a pressure relief device. This situation
will occur if stop/maintenance or selector valves are incorporated into a CO2 system’s piping.
4.7 PIPE AND NOZZLE INSTALLATION

CO2 system piping shall be installed according to the piping layout drawing(s) prepared by/for the Fike distributor,
or the installing contractor. The drawings will show the proposed pipe routing, equipment and nozzle locations,
general details, notes and a piping isometric drawing showing pipe sizes, lengths, nozzle type and code
number(s).
CO2 flow calculations are prepared from the isometric(s) to verify pipe sizes and determine nozzle code numbers.
The installer must verify that the piping can be installed as shown on the drawing, and to establish fabrication data
based upon their site inspection. Changes to the piping from that shown on the drawing are critical and can affect
overall system performance. Any deviations or changes to the piping system design MUST be approved by the
system designer prior to implementation, and an “as built” flow calculation performed to determine the appropriate
nozzle orifice code numbers.
4.7.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
Pipe, fittings, hangers, and all other materials used for a CO2 system installation shall be new and of good quality;
installed in a neat and workmanlike manner.
Piping shall be reamed before threading, and cleaned before and after installation. The entire piping system shall
be blown out with Nitrogen or compressed air before the nozzles and other devices are installed.
A dirt trap and blow-out pocket consisting of a tee and 3” - 6” (76 –152 mm) long capped nipple, shall be installed
at the end of each pipe run, and at each nozzle.
Piping installed through walls, floors, etc., shall be installed through pipe sleeves fabricated from Schedule 40
pipe that is a minimum of 2 pipe sizes larger than the pipe passing thru the sleeve, but not smaller than 1” pipe.
Sleeves shall be filled with an intrumessant material to seal the space around the system pipe and eliminate the
possibility of fire transmission through the sleeve.
When installing a CO2 piping system, the use of reducing tee fittings is preferred. When these fittings are not
available, the use of concentric reducing couplings or bell reducers is recommended. If 2 reducing fittings are
required to make the required size reduction, they shall be selected to evenly split the reduction.
After completion of the piping network portion of the CO2 system, but prior to connection to the cylinders, nozzles
or other equipment; the discharge piping system should be blown out in accordance with NFPA 12.
All valves (stop, selector, etc.) should be installed with a union immediately on each side of the valve to facilitate
inspection, repair, or replacement. Flanged valves are exempted.

4.7.2 DISCHARGE BEND INSTALLATION

Install the Discharge Bend by threading the 1/2” NPT male end into the piping
or manifold wrench-tight in the location(s) shown on the drawings. Connect
the other end of the discharge bend to the outlet of the discharge valve
wrench-tight, and verify that the hose does not have any kinks in it.
Apply Teflon tape to the 1/2” NPT male threads prior to installation.
When applying pipe sealant, start at the second male thread and wrap
the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise around the threads, away
from the pipe opening. DO NOT overlap the pipe opening, as this
could possibly cause blockage of the gas pressure.
4.7.3 MANIFOLD PIPING INSTALLATION
Mount the discharge manifold to a solid structural member such as the racking
uprights, or on top of the weigh bar brackets using pipe clamps or U-bolts.
Care must be taken to ensure that the manifold is not located at a height or
location that is not compatible with the length of the discharge bend(s).
If accessories such as pressure switches, header vent plugs, pneumatic time
delays, etc. are required, make certain that the manifold configuration includes
the tee fittings necessary to make those connections.
2" (51 mm)
4.7.4 PNEUMATIC TIME DELAY INSTALLATION
The Pneumatic Time Delay is installed in the piping,
and should be located as close as possible to the CO2
cylinder for single cylinder systems. Securely mount
the time delay to a structurally solid mounting surface
using its mounting bracket. 17" 6"
(432 mm) (152 mm)
For manifold systems, the time delay should be 9/32" DIA
installed in the piping between the master cylinder(s) (7 mm)
and the slave cylinder(s). It is recommended that the TYP. 4 PLCS.
time delay be securely mounted to the rack bulkhead or
another structurally solid mounting surface rather than 5 1/2"
simply suspending the device from the manifold piping. (140 mm)
When installing the time delay, make certain that the outlet port of the time delay is pointing toward the manifold
outlet. Each port is a threaded 3/4” NPT fitting for connection to the pipe. It is also recommended that the time
delay is mounted in a location that makes the manual override lever accessible from the ground; and leaves
enough room to operate the lever freely as well.
MANUAL OVERRIDE LEVER
TIME
DELAY
MASTER SLAVE

4.7.5 STOP / MAINTENANCE VALVE INSTALLATION

Stop / Maintenance Valves are manually operated valves with a limit switch to provide a “trouble” input to the
control system when the valve is in the closed position. The stop valve is installed in the discharge piping after
the manifold, (if applicable), in a location that is accessible from the ground without being prone to accidental
damage. It is also recommended that a union be installed on either side of the valve to facilitate removal if
needed.
After installation, the stop valve should be equipped with a suitable lock to secure the valve in the “open” or
“closed” position depending upon the situation. Signage should also be provided to identify the stop valve, its
purpose, and its operation requirements.
All interconnect wiring to the control system must be installed using conduit and boxes that are appropriate for the
environment in which they are installed.
STOP/MAINTENANCE VALVE
HEADER SAFETY
HEADER VENT
MASTER SLAVE

4.7.6 MAIN & RESERVE CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION

Both Main and Reserve supplies for fixed storage systems shall be permanently connected to the piping and
arranged for easy changeover, except where the authority having jurisdiction permits an unconnected reserve.
When piping a connected reserve system, the reserve cylinders must be segregated from the pressure released
from the main system during a discharge in order to prevent the backpressure from opening the valves on the
reserve cylinders as well. This is accomplished by adding check valves on both sides of the manifold to isolate
each side. It will also be necessary to add a header vent plug (See Section 4.7.7).
CHECK VALVE
MAIN RESERVE
4.7.7 LOW & HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES INSTALLATION

When valves are installed within a CO2 system, agent being trapped in a pipe section is a concern. To protect the
system piping from an over-pressure condition, high pressure relief devices shall be installed in any pipe section
that has the potential of having CO2 trapped within it. The pressure relief devices shall be located in such a
manner that the discharge of trapped Carbon Dioxide will not injure personnel or damage equipment.
The Header Safety Relief has a 1/2” NPT threaded body and is installed in a tee or coupling located within the
closed section of piping. Closed pipe sections are potentially created where stop valves, selector valves,
pneumatic time delays, and check valves are used.
The Header Vent Plug is a pressure relief device used to prevent pressure from building within a main or reserve
manifold section due to small amounts of leakage being trapped by the check valves. The Header Vent Plug has
a 1/2” NPT threaded body and is installed in a tee or coupling located at the each end of the manifold.
HEADER VENT
TYP. OF 2 PLCS.
HEADER SAFETY
TYP. OF 2 PLCS.

4.7.8 PRESSURE SWITCH INSTALLATION

The Pressure Switch should be securely mounted in a location that "NORMAL"
is not prone to accidental damage, and yet is accessible to the OPERATED STANDBY
POSITION
discharge piping or manifold. Connect the pressure switch to a tee POSITION
fitting installed in the discharge piping with 1/4” NPT pipe, stainless
steel flex hose, or tubing.
All interconnect wiring to the control system must be installed using
conduit and boxes that are appropriate for the environment in which
they are installed.
All pipe, tubing, and fittings used for these connections
must be supplied in accordance with the strength 1/4" (8 mm)
requirements outlined in NFPA 12. PIPE, TUBE
OR FLEX HOSE
4" 3" DISCHARGE

(102 mm) (76 mm) PIPING
5-1/8"
(130 mm)
1/2" (15mm) 1/4" NPT

CONDUIT ENTRY FEMALE, PORT À'
2 MTG. HOLES
1/4" DIA. (8 mm)
4.7.9 PRESSURE TRIP INSTALLATION 3.50"

Pressure Trips should be securely mounted in the (89 mm)
appropriate location and connected to the discharge
piping using 1/4” NPT pipe or tubing. The minimum
operating pressure required is 75 psi (517.1 kPa) with
a maximum load rating of 100 lbs. (45.4 kg) on the
retaining pin.
Pressure Trips can be installed in series from a 3.625"
common pressure outlet fitting on the discharge (92 mm)
piping. When using more than 1 pressure trip on a
common supply line, the outlet of the last pressure
trip in line must be plugged with a 1/4” NPT pipe plug.
All pipe, tubing, and fittings used for these 1/4" NPT
connections must be supplied in accordance PRESSURE INLET/OUTLET
CONNECTION (TYP. OF 2)
with the strength requirements outlined in
NFPA 12.
9/32" DIA. (7 mm)
TYP. OF 2 PLCS.

4.7.10 PRESSURE OPERATED SIREN INSTALLATION

The Pressure Operated Siren operates off of the carbon
dioxide supply of the system. Securely mount the siren(s)
in the appropriate location(s) and connect to the discharge
piping using 1/2” NPT pipe. A dirt trap and union should
also be installed to prevent contamination during operation
and to provide an easy means of removal if needed.
The siren(s) should be located as close to the discharge
piping as possible, with a maximum pipe length of 250 ft.
(76.2 m) of 1/2” NPT pipe. Based on the flow rates and
anticipated pressure drop, a maximum of 2 sirens can be
supplied for a single cylinder.
Agent consumption for each siren is approximately 6 lbs.
(2.7kg) per minute. Therefore, the agent consumption must
be accounted for when determining the amount of agent
required for the system.
All pipe, tubing, and fittings used for these
connections must be supplied in accordance with
the strength requirements outlined in NFPA 12.
4.7.11 SELECTOR VALVE INSTALLATION

Selector Valves (P/N: 70-1899-XX-XV) are used to direct the flow of agent into one specific hazard of a multiple
hazard application. One Selector Valve is required for each zone that is to be protected.
Selector Valves can be mounted in either the horizontal or vertical position. They are a normally closed spring-
return ball valve that must be opened, either electrically or manually, with the solenoid actuator kit to allow the
agent to flow to the particular hazard zone. Once opened, the pressure must be relieved using the relief/pop-off
valve to allow the Selector Valve to spring-return to the closed position.
Reducing bushings can be utilized when connecting to a 1/2”, 3/4”, 1-1/4”, and 2-1/2” piping network.
Selector Valve Systems utilize the Solenoid Actuator Kit (P/N: 70-202).
Selector Valves are FM approved only.
SOLENOID
ACTUATORS
SELECTOR
VALVES
TO ZONE A PIPE TO ZONE B PIPE

NETWORK NETWORK

4.7.11.1 SOLENOID ACTUATOR KIT INSTALLATION

The Solenoid Actuator Kit should be one of the last components installed on a system. All
components are shipped as separate items to be field assembled. The following items
should be completed prior to final installation of the Solenoid Actuator:
Container installation should be complete and secured in place
Discharge piping installation should be complete and all bracing, brackets, etc. in
place
The discharge nozzles should be installed
The detection & control system installation should be complete & tested – no faults
shall be present
4.7.11.1.1 SOLENOID ACTUATOR MOUNTING

The Solenoid Actuator Mounting Bracket must be secured to a solid, load-bearing surface
using a minimum of four fasteners and positioned so that the total length of the actuation
line does not exceed 3 feet (0.92m). As an option, the brackets may be welded into place.
6.89"
(175.0mm)
2.76"
(70.1mm)

4.7.11.1.2 SOLENOID INSTALLATION

Remove the retention screw from the body of the solenoid coil and unplug the solenoid connector. Remove the
rubber gasket and use a small thin blade screwdriver to remove the wiring terminal. Attach the appropriate wires,
through the cable gland, from the control panel solenoid releasing circuit according to the wiring diagram shown.
NOTE: The ground terminal can be attached to the control panel chassis ground to
improve ground fault detection but it is not required for proper function of the Control Panel
solenoid. No connection is required for Terminal 3 (NC). Solenoid Releasing Circuit
Following is a typical wiring diagram showing how the electric solenoid is wired to
supervisory contact of the solenoid circuit of the Fike SHP PRO. For control panel
wiring details, refer to the SHP PRO Manual (p/n 06-297) or a Cheetah Xi manual if
used.
-
11
Solenoid 24V Solenoid

2 Watt Min. / 48 Watt Max.
12
+
Remove the solenoid coil from the cylinder to prevent accidental discharges. Re-assemble the solenoid
connector in the desired orientation, plug it into the front of the actuator, and secure with the retention screw.
Install the nitrogen cylinder after the Final Test and Inspection of the system has been completed and the
customer is ready to arm the system.
4.7.12 WINTERGREEN ODORIZER INSTALLATION

The Wintergreen Odorizer is installed in the distribution piping and should be located before the stop/maintenance
valve or at the end of the manifold piping. This device has a 1” NPT male thread and is installed in the side outlet
of a side/thru tee and must be installed in the upright position. After a system discharge, unscrew cap, clean out
basket and replace ampoule then screw cap down tight.
4.8 NOZZLE INSTALLATION

Fike CO2 systems include a variety of discharge nozzles, each designed for a specific application or flow rate.
Each nozzle has an orifice drilled to suit the specific nozzle location and discharge flow requirements.
When installing nozzles, it is imperative that the correct nozzle be installed in its appropriate location within the
system discharge piping network. To ensure that this is accomplished, do the following:
1. Verify the orifice code value and pipe size for each nozzle in the system as listed on the project
drawings. Nozzle code values are stamped on each nozzle.
2. Install the nozzles in their correct location within the pipe distribution network.
3. Be sure that each nozzle is oriented to discharge correctly.

4.9 SYSTEM INSTALLATION

The following procedures should be followed as closely as possible to ensure that the CO2 system installation is
completed in a timely manner:
4.9.1 CYLINDER INSTALLATION
1. After completing the cylinder racking assembly and discharge piping, place the cylinders securely in the
rack and tighten all cylinder straps.
2. Remove the safety/shipping cap from each cylinder. Safety/shipping caps should be stored close to the
cylinders so they will be readily available when the cylinders are removed from the storage rack.
WARNING: Cylinders shall not be transported under any circumstances without the
safety/shipping cap securely installed on each cylinder.
3. When cylinder(s) are properly installed in the system racking, attach flexible discharge bend(s) to the
cylinder(s); hand-tight. This is done to determine proper alignment between the cylinder(s) and the
discharge manifold.
4. Mount the discharge manifold using the discharge bend(s) for reference, so that little, or no, strain is put
on the discharge bend(s).
5. Disconnect the flexible bend(s) from the cylinder valve(s). Install the flexible bend(s) into the discharge
manifold; wrench-tight. Be sure to apply a good quality pipe sealant or Teflon£ tape on the male thread
(only) of the flexible bend(s) before installing. Do not connect the flexible discharge bend(s) to the
cylinder(s) at this time.
6. Total Flood applications require that the nozzles be located at the highest practical elevation within the
hazard enclosure. The exception is when more than one (1) tier of nozzles is required, or special
application conditions apply. For Total Flood applications, the nozzle orifice should not be more than 1’-
0” (.30 m) from the top of the hazard.
7. For Local Application systems, all system nozzles MUST be located exactly as shown on the project
drawings.
8. Ensure that there are no obstructions are adjacent to the discharge nozzles (i.e. structural columns or
beams, ducts, cable trays, racking, equipment, etc.) that would adversely affect the nozzle discharge
pattern(s) or disbursement of the CO2 agent.
9. Install nozzle piping in the hazard as shown on the project drawings. Be sure to securely brace piping at
each nozzle. Verify that nozzle orientation will provide proper discharge patterns.
10. Complete installation of piping supply from hazard to cylinder manifold. Complete the installation of
piping to auxiliary devices (i.e. pressure trips, pressure switch(s), etc.).

4.10 ACTUATION COMPONENTS INSTALLATION
4.10.1 MASTER VALVE SOLENOID INSTALLATION

Systems consisting of 2 or less Carbon Dioxide cylinders require 1 Master
Valve and Solenoid. Systems consisting of 3 or more CO2 cylinders require
2 Master Valves and Solenoids.
It is recommended that systems having 1 Master Valve use 1 24VDC
solenoid valve for actuation; and systems with 2 Master Valves use 2 12VDC
solenoid valves wired in series for actuation.
Since each cylinder is shipped with the Brass cylinder valve assembly
configured as a “Slave” valve, one or more must be converted to the
“Master” valve function for automatically operated systems. Systems
requiring pneumatic or manual operation DO NOT require solenoids.
The 12VDC (P/N C85-113) and 24VDC (P/N C85-114) Solenoid Actuator(s)
Master Cylinder Package(s) are shipped from the factory with the brass tee
and emergency manual activation lever already assembled to the solenoid
valve. Field assembly of the stainless steel solenoid connector to the
cylinder “Master” valve and solenoid are among the last functions performed
prior to placing the CO2 system into service. After all system checkouts and
tests have been completed, the solenoid valve(s) must be attached to the
Master cylinder(s).
The fill/actuation port of the CO2 Brass Valve contains 2 set of threads. One set is threaded with 1/2“-28
UNEF machine threads that are used to connect the CO2 fill adapter. The other set is threaded with 1/8”
NPT pipe threads that are used to connect the solenoid actuator (See the figure above).

The following are the steps required for Master Solenoid Valve Installation.
1. Prior to assembling either solenoid actuator to the “Master” Valve, remove the solenoid valve electric coil
and protective housing. Disassemble the cap and coil using an 11/16” (18 mm) wrench to remove the
hex nut that secures the assembly to the solenoid valve. Even if the coil has been connected to the
control panel firing circuit, the coil and cap can be removed without compromising the integrity of the
actuation system. The coil and cap can also be removed in this manner for all maintenance and
inspection procedures.
2. Remove the 1/8” NPT pipe plugs from the top port and actuation/fill port on the side of the CO2 Brass
Valve (P/N C85-010) as shown below. No CO2 leakage should be observed. Do not proceed if leakage
is observed.
3. Place Teflon£ tape pipe sealant on the 1/8” NPT pipe thread of the 1/4” JIC x 90q brass elbow (P/N
CO2-1278) and install it in the top port of the “Master” Valve. Tighten securely, orientating the elbow with
the Fike logo as shown below. Tape is required to ensure that the connection will not leak and can be
removed when necessary.
4. CAUTION: Install Teflon£ tape pipe sealant on the CO2 valve connector (P/N C85-1099) and thread into
the fill/actuation port on the side of the Brass valve as shown above. Failure to use Teflon tape on this
connection will result in the threads being damaged or stripped off the connector, thus rendering the
connector unfit for service.
5. Carefully align and turn the assembly into the Brass valve approximately 5 turns until the assembly is
snug. Some CO2 leakage will be observed. Continue tightening until the leakage stops and assembly is
oriented as shown in the Master Valve figure.
6. Install the 7” (178 mm), stainless steel braided hose between the elbow on top of the “Master” Valve and
the branch of the Tee fitting at the back of the solenoid valve.

7. Install the 9” (229 mm), stainless steel braided hose between the elbow at the Manual Actuator ball valve
and the Tee fitting at the back of the solenoid valve.
8. Replace the solenoid coil and protective cap. Tighten cap nut securely.
9. Repeat the above steps for any other required “Master” Valves.
10. Align Master Valves and install Manual Actuator Connecting Link. See Section 4.10.3.
11. Test for correct operation and connect electrical wiring.
12. System is now ready for service.
4.10.2 LOCAL LEVER ACTUATOR INSTALLATION
The Local Lever (Manual) Actuator is installed as follows:
1. Remove the 1/8” NPT pipe plugs from the top port and actuation/fill port on the side of the CO2 Valve (P/N
C85-010). No CO2 leakage should be observed. Do not proceed if leakage is observed.
2. Place Teflon tape pipe sealant on the 1/8” NPT pipe thread of the 1/4” JIC x 90o brass elbow (P/N
C02-1278) and install it in the top port of the Master Valve. Tighten securely and orientate the elbow with
the Fike logo as shown. Tape is required to ensure that the connection will not leak and can be removed
when necessary.
3. IMPORTANT: Install Teflon tape on the CO2 valve connector (P/N C85-1099) and thread into the
fill/actuation port on the side of the Master Valve as shown. Failure to use tape on this connection will
result in the threads being damaged or stripped off the connector, thus rendering the connector unit for
service.
4. Carefully align and turn the assembly into the Master Valve approximately 5 turns until the assembly is
snug. Some Carbon Dioxide leakage will be observed. Continue tightening until the leakage stops and
the assembly is oriented as shown in the Master Valve figure.
5. Install the stainless steel hose supplied between the elbows on the top of the Master Valve and the Lever
Actuator.
6. Repeat the above steps for any additional Lever Actuators required.
7. Align Master Valves and install Connecting Link as described below.
8. Test for correct operation.
9. System is now ready for service.
1/4"JIC x 90 Elbow
(C02-1278)
Plug
Discharge Port Discharge Port

Flex Hose
(C02-1366)
Plug
Slave Valve Master Valve Local Lever Actuator

(C85-119)
Connector
(C85-1099)

4.10.3 CONNECTING LINK ASSEMBLY & INSTALLATION

The Connecting Link assembly (P/N C70-228) is designed to connect 2 CO2 Master Valve manual actuators
together in order to manually actuate both Master Valves simultaneously. The Connecting Link is provided with 3
holes for connecting the Manual Actuators together. The spacing of the holes allow for cylinders to be spaced
from 11-5/8” (295 mm) to 12” (305 mm) centers.
With all cylinders secured in a Fike-approved racking system, proceed as follows:
1. Install the Valve Actuation assemblies per the instructions and procedures outlined previously.
2. Place the connecting link between the manual actuators, aligning the holes in the connecting link with the
holes in the manual actuator handles.
3. Install the bolts, washers and nylon insert nuts provided to secure the connecting link.
4. NOTE: Do not over-tighten the nylon insert nuts to the handles on the manual actuators. The nuts must
be loose enough to allow the handle(s) to rotate during the manual actuation operation.
5. Both Valve Actuation assemblies will be equipped with safety ring pins. After the connecting link has
been installed, remove 1 ring pin and secure the other ring pin with a beaded plastic wire seal that can be
easily broken if the CO2 system must be manually actuated.
4.10.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

The power supply for the system’s operation and control panel shall be supplied from a clearly marked and
dedicated power circuit from the building’s main power supply. The capacity of the AC power circuit and battery
back-up supply must be in accordance with the requirements of the specific control system used.
Installation of the system control panel and associated detectors and devices shall be performed according to the
requirements and guidelines outlined in the appropriate Installation and Operation manual for that specific system.
The CO2 system wiring, devices, and/or components shall have no connection to Ground, except as may be
specifically noted on the drawings or in the panel manual. All wiring shall be tested and certified to be free of any
ground connection or short. Testing of the completed system’s functions, including all shutdowns and system
interface connections, shall be performed prior to the final connection of system components.
Ensure that all system initiating devices (i.e. detectors and manual release stations) are U.L. listed and/or FM
approved. All devices installed in the CO2 system must be compatible with the control panel selected for the
installation.
All detectors must be installed in accordance with their manufacturers’ recommendations and listings for that
specific detector. Installation codes, the National Electrically Code (NEC), local electrical codes and/or other
“Authorities Having Jurisdiction” may specify the location of detectors in a system. However, the most stringent of
all requirements shall be followed to ensure that an acceptable CO2 system is provided.
All system components shall be installed using conduit, boxes, and materials that are compatible and/or
acceptable for the environments in which they are located. Installation shall be in a neat, workmanlike manner in
accordance with the accepted practices of the electrical and fire protection trades.

4.10.5 PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR INSTALLATION

The Pneumatic Actuator(s) and associated tubing should be
located in the required area in a manner that will be accessible, 2" (51 mm)
yet not prone to accidental damage. Installation should be
completed as follows:
1. Securely mount the Pneumatic Actuator mounting
bracket on a structurally solid surface. The location
chosen should provide protection against the effects of 17" 6"
inclement weather. (432 mm) (152 mm)
9/32" DIA
2. Install the mounting bracket clamps and hardware. (7 mm)
Remove the safety cap and install the nitrogen cylinder TYP. 4 PLCS.
in the bracket and tighten just enough to hold the
container in place. 5 1/2"
(140 mm)
3. Rotate the nitrogen cylinder until the cylinder valve is
oriented in the desired position relative to the actuation
piping/tubing connection.
The nitrogen cylinder must be positioned so that the manual lever assembly is readily accessible
and cannot be obstructed during manual operation.
4. Securely tighten the mounting bracket clamps and hardware.
5. Connect the actuation piping/tubing as described below.
6. Install the emergency manual lever with the piston in the “SET” (up) position.
The pneumatic actuation tubing must be 1/4” (6 mm) O.D. x 0.035” (0.009 mm) wall thickness, stainless steel
tubing or 1/4” NPT galvanized schedule 40 or 80 piping. The pipe or tubing must be routed in the most direct
manner possible, with a minimum of fittings used. Each actuation line must be protected from backpressure by
supplying a 1/4” check valve in-line between the pneumatic actuator and the Master Valve (or tee connection for
multiple units). The actuation line(s) are then connected to the 1/4” NPT pressure inlet port(s) located on top of
the Master Valve(s).
SYMBOL LEGEND
CARBON DIOXIDE CYLINDER PNEUMATIC SIREN

(WITH DISCHARGE VALVE)
1/4" (8MM) CHECK VALVE
L LOCAL LEVER ACTUATOR

PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR
TO NOZZLES
P/S PRESSURE SWITCH
PRESSURE TRIP PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR TUBING
L L P/S
(OPTIONAL) (OPTIONAL)

All pipe, tubing, and fittings used for these connections must be supplied in accordance with the strength
requirements outlined in NFPA 12.
4.10.5.1 PNEUMATIC ACTUATION LINE LIMITATIONS

1) 1/4” NPT pipe (Sch. 40): 300 ft. (91.5 m)
2) 1/4” NPT pipe (Sch. 80): 436 ft. (132.9 m)
3) 1/4” O.D. (6mm) tubing [0.035” (0.009mm) wall thickness]: 450 ft. (137.2 m)
4.10.5.2 MASTER CYLINDER ADAPTER KIT (C70-243) INSTALLATION

Install the Master Cylinder Adapter Kit as follows:
1) Install the Local Lever Actuator as described in steps 3 and 4 of section (4.10.2).
2) Remove the 1/8” NPT pipe plugs from the top port and actuation/fill port of the CO2 Valve.
3) Place Teflon tape on the 1/8” NPT pipe thread of two (2) 1/4 Tube to 1/8” NPT Male Adapters
(C02-1357) and install in the top pressure ports of the two Master Valves.
4) Install the 1/4” SST Tube Cross to the Master Cylinder closest to the actuation line connection
and tighten in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
5) Install the 1/4” SST Tube Tee (C02-1359) to the remaining Master Cylinder and tighten in
24" BRAIDED STEEL HOSE

1/4" TUBE CROSS (P/N C02-1370)
(P/N C02-1358)
1/4" TUBE x 1/4" JIC ADAPTER 1/4" TUBE x 1/4" JIC ADAPTER
1/4" CHECK VALVE (P/N C02-1356) (P/N C02-1356)
1/4" TUBE TEE
(TUBE OR NPT)
(P/N C02-1359)
*NOT INCLUDED
LOCAL LEVER ASSY.

(P/N C85-119)
1/4" TUBE x 1/4" TUBE x
1/8" NPT ADAPTER 1/8" NPT ADAPTER
(P/N C02-1357) (P/N C02-1357) LOCAL LEVER ASSY.
(P/N C85-119)
ACTUATION TUBING
*NOT INCLUDED
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

6) Install the 24” long SST Hose (C02-1370) between the SST Cross and SST Tee as shown.
Tighten fittings in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
7) Install the loose end of the short SST hoses supplied with the Local Lever Actuator to the SST
Cross and SST Tee as shown. Tighten fittings in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
8) Install the actuation piping (or tubing) to the inlet of the SST Cross. An adapter will have to be
supplied by the installation contractor as appropriate for the type of actuation line selected.

4.10.6 REMOTE PULL CABLE COMPONENTS

Locate the Remote Pull Box(es) as shown on the system installation drawings. Connect the Pull Box(es) to the
Cable Junction Box (if used) using 3/8” NPT, Schedule 40 piping. If a Cable Junction Box is not used, connect
the Pull Box directly to the Local Lever Actuator. Do not run more than one cable in each pipe run. At each
change in pipe direction, a Corner Pulley must be used. DO NOT bend the pipe. A Cable Junction Box MUST be
used where more than one Pull Box is used to operate a Local Lever Actuator.
Beginning at the Pull Box, remove the covers of each Corner Pulley and feed the 1/16” cable through the Pulley
and into the 3/8” piping. Connect one end of the cable to the cable fastener in the Pull Box. Route the other end
to the Local Lever Actuator, taking up as much slack as possible, and reattach the Corner Pulley covers.
After installation is complete, test the remote cable actuation for free travel and pull force, making certain that the
cable doesn’t bind or kink, and the pull force doesn’t exceed the 40 lb. pull force limitation.
PULL HANDLE
COVER
OVAL CABLE CRIMP
BASE
2 - HOLES FOR 1/4"

1/16" SST CABLE
SST MOUNTING SCREWS
(NOT SUPPLIED WITH PULL BOX)
3/8" NPT FEMALE
PULL BOX INSTALLATION
4.11 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURES

When required for service, maintenance or re-charge procedures, the solenoid actuator(s) must be removed from
the Master Valve(s).
When removing the Solenoid Actuation Assembly, it is normal for a small amount of CO2 vapor to leak
around the 1/8” NPT threads until the pilot valve back-check seats.
Solenoid removal is accomplished, as follows:

1. Remove the nut, protective cap and solenoid coil from the solenoid valve(s).
2. Disconnect the short, stainless steel braided hose at the top of the Brass valve.
3. Hold the 3/4” (20mm) stainless steel hex fitting on the side of the Brass valve secure with an open-end
wrench to keep it from turning while loosening the Solenoid Actuation assembly using a 5/8” (16 mm)
wrench.
WARNING: EXTREME CARE MUST BE USED WHEN REMOVING THE SOLENOID ACTUATION
ASSEMBLY. IT IS CRITICALLY IMPORTANT TO BE SURE THAT THE 3/4” (20 MM) STAINLESS
STEEL HEX FITTING ON THE SIDE OF THE BRASS VALVE, INTO WHICH THE SOLENOID
ACTUATION SYSTEM IS CONNECTED, REMAINS TIGHTLY SEALED IN THE BRASS VALVE. IF
THIS FITTING IS REMOVED, A RAPID DISCHARGE OF ALL THE CO2 AGENT IN THE CYLINDER
WILL OCCUR. SEE THE FIGURE IN PARAGRAPH 4.10.1 WHERE THIS FITTING IS SHOWN IN THE
FILL/ACTUATION PORT.

Section 5
Verification
and Tes t
Carbon Dioxide
Manual P/N C06-018
SECTION 5 – VERIFICATION AND TEST
5.0 VERIFICATION AND TEST

Prior to placing the completed CO2 system into service, the installation shall be inspected and tested to confirm
the following:
1. Installation conforms to the system design and drawings.
2. Piping installation conforms to the piping design, is properly anchored and supported, and contains the
correct sizes and type of pipe and fittings.
3. The installation conforms to the designed operating sequence.
4. Sealing of the hazard space has been completed.
5. All system functions perform as required and designed, all interlocks and shutdowns operate correctly
and remote alarm functions (if provided) operate as required.
6. Installed system complies with NFPA 12 and all applicable codes, standards, and this manual.
5.1 DISCHARGE TEST

In order to comply with NFPA 12, a complete system discharge test must be performed unless waived by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). See Section 5.8 for details of the tests required.
5.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS

Check the piping system installation for compliance to the project drawings and flow calculation piping isometric.
Check to ensure that the correct pipe sizes are installed, the correct type of pipe has been provided for each pipe
size, and the appropriate pipe fittings and other devices have been installed in the distribution system.
Ensure that all piping, including the discharge manifold, has been adequately supported and anchored against the
thrust of the system’s discharge.
5.3 CYLINDERS AND RACKING

CO2 cylinder racking should be assembled in accordance with the information and directions contained within this
manual. After assembly, anchor the rack system securely to the floor using the holes provided in the “post base”
bracket(s).
CO2 cylinders should never be handled or moved without the protective safety cap securely in place. DO NOT
remove this cap until the cylinders have been installed into their rack or bracket system. Once the cylinders are in
place, remove the safety cap and perform the following checklist:
1. Check and record the weight of each cylinder. This can be done on a scale before placing the cylinders
in the rack, or afterward using the Weigh Beam & Scale (P/N C70-229). The cylinder contents shall be
within +/- 10% of normal capacity. After weighing, secure the cylinders in the rack or bracket.
2. Inspect all cylinders for evidence of external damage and replace if necessary.
Check discharge bends for damage, connect to cylinders, and tighten securely. Replace any damaged
bend(s).
3. Connect Solenoid Actuator(s) as detailed in this manual (See Section 4.10.1). Install solenoid actuator
connecting link (P/N C70-228), if required.
4. Provide and install all necessary “Caution & Advisory” signage, including any custom signs provided.
5.4 NOZZLES
CO2 systems include a variety of discharge nozzles; each designed for a specific application or flow rate. All
nozzles have discharge orifices drilled to suit the specific nozzle location and discharge flow requirements.
When installing nozzles, it is imperative that the correct nozzle be installed in its appropriate location within the
system discharge piping network. To ensure that this is accomplished, do the following:
1. Verify the orifice code value and pipe size for each nozzle in the system as listed on the project drawings.
Nozzle code values are stamped on each nozzle.
2. Install the nozzles in their correct location within the pipe distribution network.
3. Verify that each nozzle is oriented to discharge correctly.

5.5 SOLENOID ACTUATOR

Prior to installing the Solenoid Actuator(s), P/N C85-113 (12VDC) or C85-114 (24VDC), a complete operational
checkout and test of the CO2 system control panel, detection, audible/visual devices, and all other devices or
interface functions should have been conducted as specifically indicated in the appropriate system control panel
manual. The final inspection and test of the CO2 system involves the qualification of the control panel
firing/actuation circuit and the operation of the Master Cylinder control valves as follows:
WARNING: The stainless steel braided hose(s) connected between the top of the cylinder Master
Valve(s) and the Solenoid Actuator(s), must be disconnected and removed prior to proceeding with this
testing. Failure to disconnect this/these hose(s) will result in a system discharge during the testing
procedures.
1. Verify that the control panel has been reset and is in a “normal” operational status.
2. Close the Stop / Maintenance Valve prior to testing the system. This should give you a “Trouble”
condition at the control panel.
3. Disconnect and remove the stainless steel braided hose from the pressure port on top of the Master
Valve(s).
4. Disconnect the field wiring to the solenoid(s). This should cause a “Trouble” condition at the system
control panel. Reconnect the field wiring and reset the control panel.
The following tests should be performed with a minimum of 2 individuals as a safety

precaution, and to reduce the potential loss of CO2 agent from the Master Cylinder(s).
5. Operate the system detection system to cause a “system discharge” condition at the control panel. CO2
should discharge from the stainless steel braided hose(s).
CAUTION: Care MUST be taken to ensure that subsequent CO2 discharges do not
contact the skin in order to prevent cryogenic burns.
6. Reset the control panel.

7. Repeat this test for each “remote” electric manual actuator installed in the control system.
8. Remove the “safety” ring pin at the “local” manual actuator and operate. Agent should discharge from the
stainless steel hose(s). Replace the ring pin and secure with a beaded plastic wire seal, or equal.
9. Reset the control panel.
10. Reconnect the stainless steel hose(s) to the top connection of the Master Valve(s).
11. Open the Stop / Maintenance Valve and reset the control panel. If the stop valve had a lock installed,
replace it.
12. The control panel should now indicate a “normal” condition.
13. The CO2 system can now be considered “armed” and in service.
5.6 AUXILIARY DEVICES

All auxiliary and optional devices provided in the CO2 system must be tested for functional operation prior to
turning the system over to the customer / owner.
5.6.1 STOP/MAINTENANCE VALVES
The system’s control panel electrically supervises the Stop/Maintenance valve. The valve can be tested by
closing the valve manually and verifying that a “Trouble” condition is being annunciated by the control panel.
Open the valve with the manual lever and reset the control panel after testing.
5.6.2 PRESSURE TRIPS
With a screwdriver or other blunt instrument, manually push the stem to the retracted position. Allow the cable to
fall to ensure that the connected equipment operates correctly.

5.6.3 PRESSURE SWITCHES

To test the electrical circuits and ensure that all auxiliary functions operate correctly, do one or more of the
following tests:
1. Disconnect the pressure connection and attach a small CO2 or Nitrogen cylinder as a pressure source.
Open the valve on the test cylinder. The pressure switch should operate and the connected auxiliary
function should perform as required. Push the reset plunger down to reset the pressure switch.
2. Disconnect the pressure connection. Insert a small rod into the pressure port opening of the cover plate
and push against the piston that trips the switch. Be careful not to damage the piston. The connected
auxiliary function should operate. Push the reset plunger down to reset the pressure switch.
3. Remove the switch cover plate and manually operate the interior toggle switch. The connected auxiliary
function should operate. Return the toggle switch to its normal, stand-by position. Replace the cover
plate.
5.7 TRAINING OF PERSONNEL
The discharge of a CO2 fire suppression system can be an endangerment to personnel who are not familiar with,
or who are uninformed as to the necessary precautions that need to be taken. Individuals who will be required to
operate and/or maintain the CO2 system MUST be trained in the proper use and operation of the system. Other
individuals who may not be directly involved with the system, but who could be in the vicinity, should be informed
as to the precautionary measures and evacuation procedures to be taken should the CO2 system discharge.
Generally, this training is given prior to turning the completed system installation over to the end-user/customer.
When a system concentration/discharge test is to be conducted, this training MUST be completed before such
testing is undertaken. Failure to conduct appropriate training can result in loss of property and/or personnel
injury. Many hazards protected with a CO2 suppression system have experienced a system discharge without
injury or loss simply because adequate training was provided, and appropriate safety precautions were
implemented prior to the system being placed into service.
5.8 CO2 SYSTEM DISCHARGE TEST
A full discharge test of the CO2 system should be conducted as required in NFPA 12. This testing is conducted to
ensure that the completed system will function as intended and the design concentration of CO2 is delivered, and
subsequently held, for the appropriate period of time. Individuals who are experienced and knowledgeable with
the application and operation of CO2 systems should conduct the discharge test. Due caution should be taken to
ensure that all personnel are informed as to safety procedures to be taken during the testing.
All CO2 systems testing should successfully accomplish the following:
1. Check the integrity of the piping distribution system including racking, hangers, supports and anchors.
2. Verify detector operation.
3. Verify audible and/or visual alarm operation.
4. Verify manual release operation.
5. Verify that all interlock and shutdown functions operate and occur at the appropriate time in the system’s
discharge sequence.
6. Actuation sequence conforms to the intended design and pre-discharge time delays (if provided),
operates correctly and with the correct time delay period.
7. All pressure operated devices function as intended and at the correct point in the firing sequence.
8. All safety and warning features are in place and operate satisfactorily.

5.8.1 TOTAL FLOOD SYSTEM TEST

When testing a system designed for Total Flood coverage, a concentration test can ensure that:
1. Design concentration is attained within the appropriate time, in accordance with NFPA 12.
2. Designed concentration levels are attained and remain in the hazard enclosure for the period of time
(soak time) specified. The ability to reach and maintain concentration levels is STRICTLY dependent
upon the enclosure’s construction and measures taken to prevent agent loss. Total flood systems
perform best when agent loss due to leakage from the enclosure is held to a minimum.
3. Performing a “Room Integrity Fan Test” is strongly recommended prior to conducting a discharge test.
This test is “non-destructive” and will help pinpoint points of possible hazard leakage that can be sealed
and secured before the actual discharge test is performed.
5.8.2 LOCAL APPLICATION SYSTEM TEST
Concentration testing CANNOT be performed on “Local Application” systems. However, a “Performance” test
should be conducted to ensure that:
1. All nozzles are correctly orientated and discharge in an acceptable pattern onto the specific hazard.
2. The duration of discharge complies with the requirements of the specific hazard being protected.
3. Ensure that evacuation routes from the hazard area have been provided and ARE being maintained.

Section 6
Maintenance and
Inspection
Carbon Dioxide
Manual P/N C06-018
SECTION 6 – MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
6.0 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

In order to ensure that the CO2 system is in a fully operational condition at all times, it must be inspected and
tested on a regular testing schedule. All such inspection and testing shall be done by competent and trained
service personnel who are thoroughly familiar with Fike CO2 systems, auxiliary devices, and control equipment.
To this end, it is recommended that a maintenance and service contract be established between the
owner/customer and a factory trained and authorized Fike distributor.
All persons who are expected to inspect, service, maintain and/or operate Fike CO2 fire suppression systems
shall be thoroughly trained in the systems operation and the inspection/maintenance functions that they will be
expected to perform. It is also recommended that all service personnel upgrade that training on a regular basis.
6.1 MONTHLY INSPECTIONS
1. Check system components for tampering and/or mechanical damage. Replace any component that
shows damage or wear. All wire seals installed on operating/releasing devices should be secure and not
broken. Replace any broken seal.
2. Verify that all points of egress are clear and will allow a safe evacuation of personnel from the protected
area. Verify that safe access is provided to all of the manual operating controls and the system control
panel.
3. Ensure that there are no obstructions that would prevent the system from operating or prevent proper
distribution of CO2 agent from the system discharge nozzle(s).
4. Check the system control panel. It should be indicating a “System Normal” supervisory condition.
6.2 SEMI-ANNUAL INSPECTIONS

1. Perform all the monthly inspection procedures.
2. Check to determine if any changes have been made to the shape, size, contents or use of the protected
space. Any changes whatsoever will necessitate a complete review of the current system design.
3. Close the Stop/Maintenance Valve. This should give you a “trouble” condition at the control panel.
4. Weigh all system cylinders. This is accomplished using a platform scale, Fike beam scale, or an
approved liquid level indicator device. Record weight on the cylinder tag and/or system logbook. If any
cylinder shows a net weight loss of more than 10% of the fill weight, the cylinder must be recharged, or
replaced. Cylinder fill, tare and total weights are etched on the cylinder label.
5. Check the cylinder hydro-test date. CO2 cylinders are required to be hydrostatically tested to verify
cylinder strength in accordance with the following NFPA 12 requirements:
a) CO2 cylinders shall not be recharged without a hydrostatic test (and date stamping), if more than
5 years have elapsed from the date of the last test.
b) Cylinders continuously in service without discharging may be retained in service for a maximum
of 12 years from the date of manufacturer or last hydrostatic test. At the end of 12 years, they
shall be discharged and hydro-statically tested before being returned to service. (This is an
excellent opportunity to perform a discharge test of the system to qualify the system design and
equipment operation.)
Transporting charged CO2 cylinders that are out of test may be illegal. Check your local
regulations before transporting.
6. Examine cylinders, racking, piping, nozzles, and any other auxiliary devices, for evidence of corrosion or
other physical damage.
7. Check system piping, pipe hangers, straps and anchors to ensure all are secure and provide suitable
support. This is particularly important where shock and/or vibration are encountered as a normal part of
the system environment.
8. Review all discharge nozzles to determine that they are still orientated as originally installed, that the
nozzle discharge orifices are clear and free of dirt or other materials, and that the nozzle discharge
pattern is unobstructed.
9. Make sure that all seals are intact and installed wherever necessary.
10. Remove the solenoid and/or manual actuator(s) from all cylinders and auxiliary devices they operate and
operate the hand lever. The actuator should operate freely. The manual actuator operating pin should
extend outward as required for system actuation.

SECTION 6 – MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
WARNING: When 2 manual actuators are connected together with a connecting link, both
must be removed prior to testing or a system discharge may occur.
11. Inspect and clean all system detectors. Check sensitivity and adjust if necessary.
12. Inspect and confirm the operation of the system control panel in accordance with the instructions and
procedures detailed in it’s associated instruction manual. The testing performed should include the
operation of all alarm initiating devices, alarm signals, panel operating sequences, system actuation
operation and all auxiliary panel functions. Check the supervision of all circuits.
WARNING: Before testing, ensure that all solenoid actuators have been disconnected
from the cylinder valves, or have had the solenoid coils removed to render them in-
operative. Failure to do so will cause a system discharge to occur.
13. Confirm the operation of all auxiliary and supplemental components such as time delays, pressure
switches, release trips, damper releases, stop valves, etc. by manual operation, wherever possible.
Pressure operated time delays and gas operated sirens can be tested using a small CO2 cylinder or
portable extinguisher as a pressurizing source.
14. Open the Stop / Maintenance Valve and reset the control panel. If the stop valve is equipped with a
locking device, it should be replaced. The control panel should now indicate a “normal” condition.
6.3 OPERATION – AFTER A FIRE

In general, the CO2 system should extinguish the fire within 1 minute of the end of the system discharge.
However, the protected area should be kept closed for at least 20 minutes following the system discharge to allow
the area to cool to prevent a re-ignition of the fire. For “Deep Seated” hazards, the space should be kept tightly
closed for at least 60 minutes following a discharge.
These time periods are recommendations only. After a fire, the fire department and responsible
authorities MUST be notified, and they should determine when it is appropriate to re-enter the protected
area. When in doubt, only persons who have been thoroughly trained in the use of self-contained
breathing apparatus (SCBA) should enter the space after a discharge.
6.4 RECHARGING AND REFURBISHING THE SYSTEM

After a system discharge, the system must be recharged and returned to service without delay to ensure
continued protection. The system should be serviced by a Fike authorized distributor as follows:
1. Reset the system control panel in accordance with the panel instruction manual.
2. If a Reserve cylinder bank is present, transfer the Main-Reserve switch to the standby supply.
WARNING: Be sure that the control panel has been reset or discharge of the standby
Reserve cylinders will occur.
3. Remove, inspect and recharge the discharged cylinders. If more than 5 years has elapsed since the last
cylinder hydrostatic test, retest the cylinder(s) before recharging and returning to service.
4. Inspect the piping distribution system to ensure that all piping and supports are secure.
5. Inspect all system components; i.e. nozzles, switches, detectors, alarms, etc. Replace all equipment that
has been damaged or shows signs of exposure to the direct flames or extreme heat of the fire.
6. Reinstall the system in accordance with Section No. 4 of this manual.
7. Verify and test the system in accordance with Section No. 5 of this manual.
8. Arm and return the system to service. Advise the owner/customer accordingly.

Appendix A
Racking
Assemblies
Carbon Dioxide
Manual P/N C06-018
Fike Corporation Offices
Fike World Headquarters Fike Europe Fike Latina LTDA

704 South 10th Street Toekomstlaan 52 Av. Juvenal Arantes, 2500
Blue Springs, Missouri B-2200 Herentals Condominio Industrial Bracaiuva
P.O. Box 610 Belgium Bairro do Medeiros CEP 13212-370
Blue Springs, Missouri Telephone: 011-32-14-210031 Jundair, Brazil
64013 U.S.A. Fax: 011-32-14-210743 Telephone: 011-55-11-4525-1277
Phone: (800) 979-FIKE (3453) Fax: 011-55-11-4525-1201
Fax: (816) 229-0314
E-mail: fpssales@fike.com
Internet: www.fike.com
Fike Canada Fike Far East Corporation Fike Protection Systems LTD.
4140 Morris Drive 19-9 Toranomon Unit 4
Burlington, Ontario L7L5L6 1 Chome Minato-Ku The Moorfield Centre
Canada Tokyo 105-0001 Moorfield Road
Telephone: (905) 681-3100 Japan Guildford, Surrey GU1 1RA
Fax: (905) 681-3107 Telephone: 011-81-335-951-291 United Kingdom
Fax: 011-81-335-951-295 Telephone: 011-44-8700-777-540
Fax: 011-44-7000-777-540
DATA SHEET
CO2 FLEXIBLE DISCHARGE BEND WITH CHECK VALVE
DESCRIPTION
The Flexible Discharge Bend is used to provide a flexible connection between the CO2 cylinder valve and the
discharge piping or the distribution manifold. The discharge bend has an internal check valve that prevents
loss of agent should the system discharge while a cylinder is removed.
The Flexible Discharge Bend is comprised of a 5/8” I.D., double wire braided hose, 1/2” NPT brass coupling
for the connection to the discharge manifold or piping and a 13/16”-16 UN brass coupling for the connection
to the brass cylinder valve. The overall length of the Flexible Discharge Bend is 20” (50.8 cm).
All Flexible Discharge Bends are hydrostatically tested to 2,500 psig (17,239 kPa) in accordance with NFPA 12.
SPECIFICATIONS
Part Number: C70-226 APPROVALS:
Material: Black rubber • UL Listed - Ex 4447
Brass coupling • FM Approved
Length: 20” (50.8 cm) overall • ULC Listed - CEx 1312
Strength: 2,500 psig (17,239 kPa) minimum • USCG - 162.038/12/0
• LPCB
• CE
Form No. E.1.03.01-3

Form No. E.1.03.01-3, October 2010. Specifications are subject to change without notice.
SPECIFICATION SHEET
Technology of the Future

Protection for Today
ESP Safety’s Model IPES-IR/UV Flame Detector provides superior sensitivity for fires from oil and
petrochemical products. It is also indicated for a wide range of other fire types including metal fires.
IPES-IR/UV’s advanced detection technology includes optical filters configured for maximum
sensitivity to radiation produced by flame or fire and ensures rapid flame recognition and alarm
SIL3
signaling. Upon fire recognition within its 90-degree field of view, the IPES-IR/UV signals a change
in state from normal operation to fire in any OEM or proprietary alarm and response system.
RATED
In addition, via integrated ultraviolet (UV) and infrared (IR) sensors, the IPES-IR/UV monitors in
specific regions of both spectral ranges. In the infrared spectrum, the device is configured for
sensitivity to wavelengths in the range of 4.2 to 4.6 microns, allowing optimal sensitivity to combusti-
ble gas fires while rejecting false signals from incandescent lamps, sunlight and hot objects. For
ultraviolet (UV) radiation, the device is configured for sensitivity in the range of 180 to 250 nanome-
ters, making the sensor “blind” to sunlight and radiation from heated objects but still able to “see” the
UV radiation emitted by a flame. With these settings, the IPES-IR/UV detects and alarms for only
those characteristic wavelength emissions from the UV and IR spectrum that indicate actual flame
or fire.
The combination of multiple sensors and wavelength range settings makes the IPES-IR/UV an
excellent choice for elimination of false positive indicators caused by non-flame sources of radiation
such as artificial lighting, direct and indirect sunlight, lightning, arc welding and metal grinding.
While operating, the IPES-IR/UV generates detector-status information via:

• A standard RS-485 communication channel under protocol Modbus RTU
• 4-20 mA analog output
• Relay outputs
IPES IR-UV
The IPES-IR/UV is constructed in an explosion-proof housing for use in hazardous (classified)
locations and meets the industry certifications and requirements of Class I, Division 1, Group B, C &
FLAME DETECTOR
Applications Features and benefits
• Drilling and production platforms • Power consumption of <3W means low power costs, protection against surges
• Shipping tankers, freighters, and other vessels • Digital, analog and relay outputs provide reliable status information
• Fuel loading facilities across a range of communication formats
• Refineries, bulk terminals, and tank farms • Automatic and manual self-tests ensure system integrity and correct operation
• LNG/LPG processing and storage facilities • Continuous monitoring of the optical path for obstruction or reduced
• Compressor stations and pipeline facilities transmission affords maximum reliability
• Petrochemical, paint, and fertilizer plants • Industry standard for remote alarm and fault indication
• Power plants and gas turbine facilities • Combines both IR sensor configuration and UV sensor configuration
• Transportation facilities (airports and subways) • Color status LED
• Oil and gas fired boilers / furnaces • Explosion-proof package allows for hazardous environment operation
• Aircraft hangars • Heated optics, secondary heater function helps to prevent
condensation problems
CONTACT CALIFORNIA TEXAS

www.espsafetyinc.com 555 N. First Street | San Jose, CA 95112 4001 W. Sam Houston Parkway N. Ste #150 | Houston, TX 77043
info@espsafetyinc.com Ph: +1-408-886-9746 | Fx: +1-408-886-9757 Ph: +1-713-999-1050 | Fx: +1-713-999-1060
SPECIFICATIONS info@espsafetyinc.com
Certifications Response:
Very High Sensitivity
Fuel Size Distance Typical Response

Ex d IIC T4 Feet (M) Time (Sec.)
Class I, Division 1 -40°F to +185°F
n-Heptane 1 ft x 1 ft 100 (30) 5.0
Groups B, C & D, (-40°C to +85°C)
T4 Ta = -40°F to +167°F CE Mark for EMC (TUV) Methanol 1 ft x 1 ft 85 (26) 4.9
(-40°C to +75°C) CE Mark for IECEx
IP66 IP66 JP5 2 ft x 2 ft 100 (30) 5.0
Class I, Division 1 Field of View

Groups B, C & D, Ex d IIC T4
T4 Ta = -40°F to +167°F -40°F to +185°F The detector has a 90° field of view (horizontal) with the highest
(-40°C to +75°C) (-40°C to +85°C) sensitivity lying along the central axis.
IP66 IP66
Viewing Angle 0
15 15
FLAME DETECTOR
100
30 90 30
Electrical Characteristics
80
45 45
Voltage 18 to 32 VDC 70
60
Power < 2.0 W, standby
< 3.0 W, during alarm 50
< 5.0 W, self test
< 7.3 W, maximum with heated window & alarm 40
X
30
Outputs 1) Analog signal 4 - 20 mA 20

Fault signal 2 mA ± 0.1 mA
10
Ready signal 4 mA ± 0.1 mA
Fire signal 18 mA ± 0.1 mA
Test Mode 8 mA ± 0.1 mA
Y
2) RS 485, Modbus RTU y = feet
3) Relay: x = degrees
Fire:
- normally open relay
- closed on fire detection Dimensions
- latching / non-latching in inches (millimeters)
Fault:
- normally closed relay
- open on fault detection
IPES IR-UV
The IR3 can be adjusted
to cover a Wide Angular Range
Operating Temperature -40°F to +185°F (-40°C to +85°C) 5.96”

(151.30mm)
Extended Operating -75°F to +255°F (-60°C to +125°C) Adjustable
Temperature (By Request) Pivot
Storage temperature -76°F to +185°F

(-60°C to +85°C) 8.39”
(213.16mm)
Humidity Up to 95% Relative humidity, AT THIS ORIENTATION
(withstands up to 100% RH for short periods)
Wiring 14 AWG (2.08 mm) or 16 AWG (1.31 mm)

Shielded cable is recommended
5.45”
(138.43mm)
R1.97”
.61” (50mm)
Mechanical Characteristics: (15.5mm)
Material Aluminum or 316 Stainless Steel

.61”
Cable Entry 3/4” NPT (15.5mm)
Weight Aluminum: 5.5 lbs (2.5 kg)

Stainless Steel: 11 lbs (5.0 kg)
Warranty 5 years
80011-001
R08
X1
X2
1L1 3L2 5L3 13 NO

A1
A2
H1
H2
2T1 4T2 6T3 14 NO
BAT 1 BAT 2
12VDC/65AH 12VDC/65AH
B
-
A
-
SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y EXTINCION DE INCENDIO FILOSOFIA DE CONTROL
MOTIVATOR 01 FRN-03008521-LB-FC-001
LAS BAMBAS
FILOSOFIA DE CONTROL INTEGRAL SISTEMA DE DETECCION,

ALARMA Y EXTINCION DE INCENDIO
FRN-03008521-LB-FC-001
MOTIVATOR 01
0 20/03/2021 EMITIDO PARA INFORMACION J.A.I. E.R.V. M.A.R.

A 05/03/2021 REVISION INTERNA A.P.C. R.H.V. M.A.R.
FILOSOFIA DE CONTROL Page 1 of 7
FRN-03008521-LB-FC-001 REV 0
LAS BAMBAS
TABLA DE CONTENIDO
1. OBJETIVO ................................................................................................................................................................ 3
2. ANALISIS Y DESCRIPCION GENERAL. .................................................................................................................. 3
3. SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y ALARMA DE INCENDIO. .......................................................................................... 3
3.1 ACTIVACIÓN DE UNA ESTACIÓN MANUAL DE DESCARGA. ...................................................................... 4
3.2 ACTIVACIÓN DE DETECTORES DE TEMPERATURA. ................................................................................. 4
3.3 ACTIVACIÓN DE DETECTORES DE FLAMA SALA DE MÁQUINAS GENERADOR ..................................... 5
3.4 ACTIVACIÓN DE DETECTORES DE TEMPERATURA CELDAS ELÉCTRICAS............................................ 5
3.5 ACTIVACIÓN DE BOTÓN DE ABORTO. ......................................................................................................... 6
3.6 ACTIVACIÓN DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS AUDIOVISUALES DE ALARMA. ....................................................... 6
3.7 SISTEMA DE SHOUTDOWN. .......................................................................................................................... 6
4. SISTEMA DE EXTINCIÓN POR AGENTES LIMPIOS.............................................................................................. 6
4.1. AGENTE SUPRESOR SELECCIONADO FM-200 CELDAS ELÉCTRICAS .................................................... 6
4.2. AGENTE SUPRESOR SELECCIONADO CO2 ................................................................................................ 7
LAS BAMBAS
1. OBJETIVO
El objetivo del presente documento es describir el funcionamiento de cada uno de los sistemas de protección contra
incendios que serán reinstalados Motivator 01 las bambas.
2. ANALISIS Y DESCRIPCION GENERAL.

Todos los sistemas descritos en el presente documento serán parte de un sistema particular de detección y alarma de
incendios, supervisado únicamente por personal capacitado. Este sistema recibirá las señales de activación de todos los
dispositivos de detección, manuales o automáticos, supervisará el funcionamiento de los sistemas de extinción de FM-
200 y CO2, donde estos sean instalados, considerados dentro del alcance.
El sistema de detección y alarma de incendios del motivator 01 estará centralizado en panel de detección y alarma de
incendios listado UL para el uso y estará ubicado dentro de la sala del Generador del Motivator 01, de acuerdo a lo que
se muestra en los diagramas del plano.
3. SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y ALARMA DE INCENDIO.

Se contará con un panel de detección y alarma de incendios ubicados en la sala de máquinas del generador del
motivator01. Este panel recibirá las señales de los dispositivos de protección de la sala de máquinas generador y celdas
eléctricas, los cuales cuentan con un grado de protección IP 50. Su funcionamiento, manual o automático, no debe
interferir con los sistemas de iluminación de emergencia o cualquier otro equipo interconectado con el panel de control de
incendio (FACP)
El panel de detección de incendios será del tipo analógico, y recibirá la señal de todos los dispositivos de detección
(automáticos y manuales) con los que contará el motivator 01. Además, deberán monitorear y/o controlar otros sistemas
de protección contra incendios como el sistema de extinción por agentes limpios FM-200 y CO2.
Los sistemas anexos, deberán interconectarse con el panel de detección y alarma de incendios, bajo las siguientes
condiciones:
 Cualquier cambio, adición, reemplazo, falla, procedimiento de mantenimiento, modificación de equipo,

programación o circuito en los sistemas descritos a continuación no deberán tener ningún efecto en el
sistema de detección y alarma de incendios.
 Las señales Alarma de los dispositivos de detección de incendios (automáticos o manuales) deberán tener
prioridad sobre cualquier otra señal que no sea del sistema de protección contra incendio, aun cuando ésta
se haya generado primero.
El sistema debe ser programado en modo de Alarma para los dispositivos automáticos y manuales de detección de
incendios. El modo de Alarma significa que cualquier señal de activación emitida por alguno de los dispositivos de
detección de incendios, generará en el panel principal una indicación de Alarma que automáticamente activará las
cornetas con luz estroboscópica del área donde se generó la emergencia.
El diseño del sistema de detección y alarma de incendios se realizará de acuerdo con los parámetros indicados en la
NFPA 72 (National Fire Protection Association).
LAS BAMBAS
3.1 Activación de una Estación Manual de Descarga.

- SALA DE MAQUINAS GENERADOR CO2
Estación manual de descarga TAG Tipo de Agente Limpio
1000-FED-001 CO2
1000-FED-003 CO2
Descarga con retardo de 40 segundos, cuando una estación manual de descarga es activada, debe generarse una señal
audiovisual de alerta en el panel de detección supresión y alarma de incendios.
Al recibir esta señal de alarma el panel deberá activar todas las cornetas con luz estroboscópica de las zonas del
motivator 01 y la vez debe activarse un retardo de 40 segundos para una descarga del agente ante una eventual
alarma visual de incendio.
Una vez llegue a cero el retardo de 30 segundos, inmediatamente el Panel de Control enviará una señal eléctrica
al módulo de descarga (1000-FMD-001, 1000-FMD-002), se iniciará la descarga del agente supresor CO2 y la vez
comandará el apagado del equipo mediante el relay (1000-FMR-001) conectado en serie al motivator 01 de dicho
sistema.
- CELDAS ELECTRICAS FM-200
Estación manual de descarga TAG Tipo de Agente Limpio

1000-FED-002 FM-200
Descarga inmediata al activarse la estación manual de descarga, cuando la estación manual de descarga sea activada,
debe generarse una señal audiovisual de alerta en el panel de detección y alarma de incendios Al recibir esta señal de
alarma el panel deberá activar todas las cornetas con luz estroboscópicas del interior y exterior del motivator 01. El
sistema de supresión y detección de alarma de incendios comandará el apagado del equipo mediante el relay (1000-
FMR-001) conectado en serie al motivator 01 de dicho sistema. Inmediatamente el Panel de Control enviará una señal
eléctrica al módulo de descarga (1000-FMD-003), se iniciará la descarga del agente limpio FM-200.
3.2 Activación de Detectores de Temperatura.

- Sala de máquinas generador
Detector de temperatura TAG Zonas
1000-FMI-003 Zona 1 Generador
1000-FMI-03.1 Zona 1 Generador
1000-FMI-04.1 Zona 1 Generador
LAS BAMBAS
Trabajará por zona cruzada consta de 4 detectores de temperatura puntuales de 107.22°C, cuando el detector se expone
a temperaturas continuas de 107.22°C se activará. Debe generarse una señal audiovisual de alerta nivel 2 en el panel de
detección supresión y alarma de incendios ubicado en el motivator 01 que indicará cual es el dispositivo activado.
Cuando al menos un detector de temperatura se active, el panel deberá activar las sirenas con luz estroboscópica nivel 2
del interior y exterior del motivator 01 y esperará la confirmación de un segundo detector de temperatura. Cuando el
sistema detecte dos detectores de temperatura el panel deberá activar el tiempo de retardo de 40 segundos de descarga
y comandará el apagado del motivator-01 mediante relay (1000-FMR-001) el operador tendrá el tiempo de la
primera alarma 40 segundos para verificar si el evento es real o falsa alarma y poder abortar la descarda del CO2
3.3 Activación de Detectores de Flama sala de máquinas generador
Detector de Flama TAG Zonas

Cuando al menos un detector de flama se active, el panel deberá activar las sirenas con luz estroboscópicas nivel 2 del
interior y exterior del motivator 01 y a la vez se activará un retardo de 40 segundos para una descarga del agente
ante una eventual alarma visual de incendio y El sistema de supresión y detección de alarma de incendios
comandará el apagado del equipo mediante el relay (1000-FMR-001) conectado en serie al motivator 01 de
dicho sistema. Inmediatamente el Panel de Control enviará una señal eléctrica al módulo de descarga y se iniciará
la descarga del agente CO2.
3.4 Activación de Detectores de temperatura celdas eléctricas
Detector de Temperatura TAG Zonas

Cuando al menos un detector de temperatura se active, el panel deberá activar las sirenas con luz estroboscópicas nivel
2 del interior y exterior del motivator 01 y a la vez se activará un retardo de 40 segundos para una descarga del agente
ante una eventual alarma visual de incendio y El sistema de supresión y detección de alarma de incendios comandará el
apagado del equipo mediante el relay (1000-FMR-001) conectado en serie al motivator 01 de dicho sistema.
Inmediatamente el Panel de Control enviará una señal eléctrica al módulo de descarga y se iniciará la descarga del
agente FM-200.
LAS BAMBAS
3.5 Activación de botón de Aborto.

Para las situaciones de descarga anteriormente descritas con los detectores de temperatura y flama. Se dispondrá de un
botón de aborto dentro del sistema de extinción para los agentes CO2 y FM-200.
El dispositivo está diseñado para abortar la descarga del agente limpio CO2 y FM200 solo cuando ocurra un evento de
alarma generado por los detectores de temperatura y detectores de flama. Esto se logra colocando un mini módulo de
monitoreo que supervise su contacto e indique al panel su estado. Cuando el panel detecte el contacto seco se
detendrá la descarga. Esto se usa para evitar la activación en caso de una falsa alarma o una acción por manipulación
inadecuada.
3.6 Activación de los Dispositivos Audiovisuales De Alarma.
Se deberá contar con luz estroboscópica en el interior y exterior del motivator 01 zona protegida. El panel de Detección
supresión y Alarma de incendios del motivator 01 activará estos dispositivos de notificación al recibir una señal de alarma
de cualquiera de los dispositivos de detección que forman parte del sistema.
3.7 Sistema de Shut down.

El motivator 01, se preverá el apagado del equipo. Esto se hará a través del uso de un terminal Relay que será activado
cuando el panel del motivator 01 reciba una señal de alarma des descarga de cualquiera de los dispositivos de detección
de incendios del interior área protegida.
4. SISTEMA DE EXTINCIÓN POR AGENTES LIMPIOS
Las áreas a protegerse consisten de equipos, tableros eléctricos, terminales eléctricos, Sala de Máquinas, entre otros. La
mayoría de los fuegos con posibilidad de ocurrir son de Clase C. El fuego Tipo C producirá grandes cantidades de
partículas de humo con relativamente pequeñas cantidades de productos térmicos, que puede distribuirse a través de los
ambientes protegidos, dependiendo del tamaño / forma de ésta. A pesar que el fuego eléctrico produce altas
temperaturas, éstas están confinadas al área inmediata de la falla eléctrica.
El diseño de extinción de incendios se realizará de acuerdo a los parámetros indicados en la NFPA 2001 (National Fire
Protection Association).
4.1. Agente Supresor Seleccionado FM-200 Celdas eléctricas
El Agente Limpio Pentafluoroethano HFC-227ea (FM-200) es la mejor opción de supresión de incendios para este tipo de
riesgos, porque no es conductor eléctrico, no deja residuos que puedan dañar los componentes, no deja residuos que
limpiar, apaga rápidamente, es seguro para las personas, y está aprobado por la United States Environmental Protection
Agency como un agente que no posee cualidades agotadoras de la capa de ozono. También, es un agente muy efectivo,
se requieren de menores cantidades, menos contenedores de almacenaje y menos espacio para almacenarlos.
El Agente Limpio HFC-227ea, es usado como un agente supresor de fuego por inundación total que es muy efectivo para
fuegos clases A, B y C, especialmente donde existen fuentes de reinicio. El HFC-227ea se descarga directamente dentro
de las áreas a protegerse, esparciéndose rápidamente, alcanzando la concentración diseñada o de extinción en menos
de 10 segundos.
El Agente Limpio HFC-227ea, se almacena dentro de contenedores que han pasado una exhaustiva prueba por
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) y Factory Mutual (FM), presurizados a 360 PSIG a 21°C.
LAS BAMBAS
Esta solución emplea un sistema de detección e inundación total del agente en las áreas protegidas, El entubado se
encuentra ubicado dentro del motivator 01.
Este sistema de extinción por inundación total es generado por la activación de los sensores de temperatura al detectar
temperatura superior a lo seteado, por lo cual los puntos de descarga estarán al interior y permitirá una rápida respuesta
y una mínima dispersión del incendio.
Esta solución será aplicada las celdas eléctricas.
4.2. Agente Supresor Seleccionado CO2
El dióxido de carbóno extingue el fuego por reducción del oxígeno contenido en el área a proteger, hasta el punto
donde éste no puede soportar una combustión. Debido a la extrema densidad del CO2, la protección de las áreas
peligrosas está cubierta con una supresión de incendios rápido y efectivo.
La selección del dióxido de carbón, desarrollada para aplicación total, que consiste de la instalación del tanque
conectado a las tuberías en forma fija y las tuberas de descarga CO2, dirigidas directamente en el área a proteger y no
se necesita que el ambiente este completamente cerrado para extinguir el fuego.
- El sistema es de activación automática y/o manual.
- El sistema utilizará una red de tuberías y boquillas fijas.
- El sistema será capaz de extinguir los fuegos en peligros de clase A, B, y C.
- No conduce la electricidad.
- Es un agente limpio, no ensucia a los combustibles que apaga.
- Es un gas, por consiguiente, puede penetrar por todas las zonas del área en riesgo.
Los componentes utilizados en el sistema de protección contra incendios, deben estar específicamente certificados
por Underwrite laboratories Inc. (UL) para ser usados en sistemas contra incendios

Dossier de Calidad - Motivator 01

Cargado por

Información del documento

Descripción original:

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Dossier de Calidad - Motivator 01

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y EXTINCION DE INCENDIO LISTA DE DOCUMENTOS

GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01 FRN-030085-LDO-001

SISTEMA DE DETECCION Y ALARMA CONTRA INCENDIOS

0 20/03/2021 EMITIDO PARA CONSTRUCCION J.A.I. E.R.V. M.A.R.

LISTA DE DOCUMETOS Page 1 of 4

2. IDENTIFICACIÓN DE DOCUMENTOS Y PLANOS

2.1. DESIGNACION DE DOCUMENTOS

2.1.1. TIPO DE DOCUMENTO

HTE : Hojas Técnicas

3. LISTA DE DOCUMENTOS DE INGENIERÍA DEL SISTEMA DE PROTECCIÓN DE INCENDIOS

ITEM N° DOCUMENTO TIPO DESCRIPCIÓN DEL DOCUMENTO REV

4. LISTA DE PLANOS DEL SISTEMA DE DETECCIÓN Y EXTINCIÓN DE INCENDIOS

ITEM N° PLANO TIPO DESCRIPCIÓN DEL PLANO REV

FRN-030085-P01-D300-PGU- PDF UBICACION DE EQUIPOS EXTINCION CO2 Y

SISTEMA DE DETECCION, ALARMA Y EXTINCION

DE INCENDIO CON AGENTE LIMPIO

0 20/03/2021 EMITIDO PARA CONTRUCCION J.A.I. E.R.V. M.A.R.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA Page 1 of 19

ITEM N° PLANO TIPO DESCRIPCIÓN DEL PLANO REV

2 FRN-030085-P01-D300-PGC-001 PDF UBICACION DE EQUIPOS DETECCION 0

ITEM DESCRIPCIÓN TAG UBICACIÓN

6. EQUIPOS DEL SISTEMA DE DETECCIÓN Y ALARMA DE INCENDIOS

 Función de maniobra en el panel y control remote

6.1.1. FUENTE DE ALIMENTACIÓN ELÉCTRICA SECUNDARIA

6.2. DISPOSITIVOS QUE OPERAN CON EL PANEL CHEETAH XI 50

 MÓDULO SUPERVISADO DE CONTROL 55-042

- Resistencia max de cableado entrada de contacto seco 100ohms

 ESTACION MANUAL DE DESCARGA

 PULSADOR DE ABORTO DE DESCARGA 10-1639

CAMPO DE VISTA Y RANGO DE DETECCIÓN

6.3. DISPOSITIVOS DE NOTIFICACION Y ALARMA

7. EQUIPOS DEL SISTEMA DE INCENDIOS CON CO2 Y FM-200

8.1. AGENTE CO2

- El sistema será diseñado para los requisitos de aplicación total.

Nombre químico: Heptafluoropropane

Temperatura crítica 101.6 ºC

9. CARACTERISTICAS DE LA EXTINCION POR AGENTE CO2

 CILINDROS 100 Lbs. (45.4 Kg)

 VALVULA ENSAMBLADA AL CILINDRO

 COMPONENTES DE ACTIVACIÓN DEL CILINDRO MAESTRO

 ACTUADOR MANUAL DE EMERGENCIA

 MANGUERA CURVADA FLEXIBLE DE DESCARGA

 VÁLVULA DE MANTENIMIENTO Y PARADA

 RACK PARA EL MONTAJE DE CELINDROS

 BOQUILLAS DE DESCARGA TIPO RADIAL

 SIRENA OPERADORA POR NEUMÁTICA

10. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SISTEMA DE DETECCIÓN Y ALARMA CONTRA INCENDIOS

10.1. GENERADOR ELECTRICO 01

Descripción de Área Dispositivo Cantidad

Sirena con luz estroboscopia 4

Modulo de control P/N 55-042 12

Módulo Relay P/N 55-043 3

Módulo de descarga P/N 55-052 3

Estación M de descarga P/N 20-1343 3

11. DESCRIPCIÓN DEL SISTEMA DE EXTINCIÓN CON AGENTE LIMPIO

Descripción de Área Dispositivo Cantidad

MOTIVATOR 01 Cilindro de Agente Limpio CO2 6

Cilindro de Agente Limpio FM-200 1

SISTEMA DE DETECCION, ALARMA Y EXTINCION

DE INCENDIO CON AGENTE LIMPIO

0 20/12/2019 EMITIDO PARA CONTRUCCION F.B.S. E.R.V. M.A.R.

MEMORIA DE CALCULO Pág. 1 de 20